Manual de Conduccion Camion Freightliner Business Class m2

Foreword
Introduction
This manual provides information needed to operate
and understand the vehicle and its components.
More detailed information is contained in the Owners
Warranty Information for North America booklet, and
in the vehicles workshop and maintenance manuals.
Custom-built Freightliner vehicles are equipped with
various chassis and cab components. Not all of the
information contained in this manual applies to every
vehicle. For details about components in your vehicle, refer to the chassis specification pages included in all new vehicles and to the vehicle specification decal, located inside the vehicle.
For your reference, keep this manual in the vehicle
at all times.
IMPORTANT: Descriptions and specifications in

this manual were in effect at the time of printing.
Freightliner Trucks reserves the right to discontinue models and to change specifications or
design at any time without notice and without
incurring obligation. Descriptions and specifications contained in this publication provide no
warranty, expressed or implied, and are subject
to revisions and editions without notice.
Environmental Concerns and

Recommendations
Whenever you see instructions in this manual to discard materials, you should first attempt to reclaim
and recycle them. To preserve our environment, follow appropriate environmental rules and regulations
when disposing of materials.
Event Data Recorder

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices
that record specific vehicle data. The type and
amount of data recorded varies depending on how
the vehicle is equipped (such as the brand of engine,
if an air bag is installed, or if the vehicle features a
collision avoidance system, etc.).
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

Compliance
This vehicle must be regularly inspected and maintained as indicated in the Business Class M2 Maintenance Manual, and in the Pretrip and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance chapter in this manual, in
order to continue satisfactory performance and ensure coverage of the vehicle under the manufacturers warranty. Many maintenance procedures ensure
that the vehicle and engine continue to comply with
applicable emissions standards. Maintenance procedures, using components engineered to comply with
greenhouse gas emissions and fuel efficiency regulations, may be performed by an authorized Daimler
Trucks North America dealer, an independent outlet,
or the vehicle owner or operator.
The vehicle owner is responsible for determining the
suitability of replacement components to maintain
compliance with federal and local jurisdictional regulations. Components including, but not limited to,
tires, cab/sleeper side extenders, chassis fairings,
bumper, hood, vehicle speed limiters, and idle reduction timers are specifically designed and manufactured to exacting standards for regulatory fuel efficiency and greenhouse gas emissions compliance. It
is important that these components are always replaced with components that meet or exceed the performance of the originally installed components.
Customer Assistance Center

Having trouble finding service? Call the Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-385-4357 or 1-800-FTLHELP. Call night or day, weekdays or weekends, for
dealer referral, vehicle information, breakdown coordination, or Fleetpack assistance. Our people are
knowledgeable, professional, and committed to following through to help you keep your truck moving.
Reporting Safety Defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Daimler Trucks North America
LLC.
If the NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
STI-455-6 (6/12)
A24-01238-000
Printed in U.S.A.
Foreword
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a

recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Daimler Trucks North
America LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety
from www.safercar.gov.
Canadian customers who wish to report a safetyrelated defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact Transport
Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD,
Place de Ville Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada K1A 0N5.
For additional road safety information, please visit
the Road Safety website at: www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
20012012 Daimler Trucks North America LLC. All rights reserved. Daimler Trucks North America LLC is a Daimler
company.
No part of this publication, in whole or part, may be translated, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Daimler Trucks North America LLC. For additional information, please contact Daimler Trucks North
America LLC, Service Systems and Documentation, P.O. Box 3849, Portland OR 972083849 U.S.A. or refer to
www.Daimler-TrucksNorthAmerica.comand www.FreightlinerTrucks.com.
Contents
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Page
Introduction, Environmental Concerns and Recommendations,
Event Data Recorder, Emissions and Fuel Efficiency Compliance,
Customer Assistance Center, Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Vehicle Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Cab Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Heater, Ventilator and Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Drivetrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Steering and Brake Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Fifth Wheels and Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Pretrip and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Cab Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
In an Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Headlight Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Hybrid Electric Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Natural Gas Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1
1
Vehicle Identification
Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component GWR Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.2
Component Information Label

NOTE: Labels shown in this chapter are examples only. Actual specifications may vary from
vehicle to vehicle.
The component information label lists the vehicle
model, identification number, and major component
models. It also lists the major assemblies and installations shown on the chassis specification sheet.
One copy of the component information label is installed on the right-side dash; another copy is inside
the rear cover of the Owners Warranty Information
for North America booklet. An illustration of the label
is shown in Fig. 1.1.
The tire and rim portion of the FMVSS certification

label certifies suitable tire and rim combinations that
can be installed on the vehicle, for the given gross
axle weight rating. Tires and rims installed on the
vehicle at the time of manufacture may have a higher
load capacity than that certified by the tire and rim
label. If the tires and rims currently on the vehicle
have a lower load capacity than that shown on the
tire and rim label, then the tires and rims determine
the load limitations on each of the axles.
Trucks built without a cargo body that are intended
for service in the U.S. have an incomplete vehicle
certification label attached by the final-stage manufacturer. See Fig. 1.4. This label will be attached to
the incomplete vehicle document included with the
vehicle, and certifies that the vehicle conforms to all
applicable FMVSS regulations in effect on the date of
completion.
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard Labels
In Canada, tractors with fifth wheels are marked as
certified by means of a statement of compliance label
with the Canadian National Safety Mark attached to
the driver-side door frame B-pillar. See Fig. 1.5.
02/20/2012
f080176
Fig. 1.1, Component Information Label
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard Labels
NOTE: Due to the variety of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) certification requirements, not all of the labels shown will apply
to your vehicle.
Tractors with or without fifth wheels purchased in the
U.S. are marked as certified by means of an FMVSS
certification label. See Fig. 1.2. This label is attached
to the driver-side B-pillar, as shown in Fig. 1.3.
If purchased for service in Canada, trucks built without a cargo body and tractors built without a fifth
wheel are marked as certified by a "Statement of
Compliance" label, similar to Fig. 1.4. This label must
be attached by the final-stage manufacturer to certify
that the vehicle conforms to all applicable Canada
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) regulations
in effect on the date of completion.
Component GWR Label

The component GWR label is located on the
passenger-side B-pillar. The label provides maximum
GWR ratings for each component.
02/20/2012
f080177
Fig. 1.2, Vehicle Certification Label
1.1
Emission Labels
Aftertreatment System Indicators
Label
1
Engines and vehicles manufactured after December

31, 2006 and domiciled in the U.S. or Canada are
required to meet all EPA regulations effective as of
the vehicle build date, and are equipped with an
emission aftertreatment system (ATS). Vehicles domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada may not
have aftertreatment equipment, depending upon local
statutory emissions guidelines. See Table 1.1.
A warning label on the driver-side visor contains important warning indicators in the instrument cluster
that pertain to the ATS. See Fig. 1.7 or Fig. 1.8.
11/13/2001
f080117
1. Tire and Rim Information

2. FMVSS Certification Label
EPA Noise Emission Control Label
Fig. 1.3, Label Locations
02/28/2012
A vehicle noise emission control label (Fig. 1.9) is

located on the driver-side B-pillar as shown in
Fig. 1.3. It is the owners responsibility to maintain
the vehicle so that it conforms to EPA regulations.
f080180
Fig. 1.4, Incomplete Vehicle Certification Label
10/10/2006
It is a violation of U.S. federal law to alter exhaust

plumbing, ATS, or other components in any way that
would bring the engine/vehicle out of compliance with
certification requirements [Ref: 42 U.S.C. S7522(a)
(3)]. It is the owners responsibility to maintain the
vehicle so that it conforms to EPA regulations.
IMPORTANT: Certain Freightliner incomplete

vehicles may be produced with incomplete noise
control hardware and will not have a noise
emission control information label. For such vehicles, it is the final-stage manufacturers responsibility to complete the vehicle in conformity
to EPA regulations (40 CFR Part 205) and label
it for compliance.
f080024
Fig. 1.5, Canadian National Safety Mark
See Fig. 1.6 for a typical component GWR label.
1.2
02/20/2012
f080178
Fig. 1.6, Component GWR Label
Applicable Emissions System Based on Build Date and EPA Regulations

Build Date
Regulation: Emissions Components
EPA07 (reduce nitrogen oxides (NOx) emissions to 1.1 g/bhp-hr, and reduce
January 1, 2007December 31,
particulate matter emissions to 0.01 g/bhp-hr): Aftertreatment device (ATD) containing
2009
a diesel particulate filter that traps soot and ash.*
EPA10 (reduce NOx emissions to 0.2 g/bhp-hr): EPA07-type ATD, with additional
January 1, 2010December 31,
selective catalyst reduction (SCR) technology that utilizes diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
2012
to convert NOx to nitrogen and water vapor.
GHG14: Aerodynamic and fuel efficiency components including, but not limited to,
tires, cab/sleeper side extenders, chassis fairings, bumper, hood, vehicle speed
From March 5, 2012
limiters, and idle reduction timers specifically designed to meet regulatory fuel
efficiency and greenhouse gas emissions standards.
* Cummins, Detroit, and Mercedes-Benz ATDs are also equipped with a diesel oxidation catalyst to break down pollutants.
Table 1.1, Applicable Emissions System Based on Build Date and EPA Regulations
Vehicle Emission Control Information

Label
Model year 2013 and later vehicles meet additional
requirements as specified by federal greenhouse gas
and fuel efficiency regulations (GHG14). These vehicles are equipped with components that increase
fuel efficiency and reduce GHG emissions. Components may include, but are not limited to, low-rolling
resistance tires; aerodynamic devices such as hood,
cab side extenders, and fuel tank fairings; vehicle
speed limiters; and idle shutdown timers.
A Vehicle Emission Control Information Label is located on the driver-side door. See Fig. 1.10. It is the
owners responsibility to maintain the vehicle so that
it conforms to EPA and NHTSA regulations.
Certified Clean Idle Label

The California Air Resources Board (CARB) requires
model year 2008 and newer heavy-duty diesel engines to be equipped with a non-programmable engine shutdown system that automatically shuts down
1.3
the engine after five minutes of idling in order to limit

emissions of particulate matter and NOx.
Certified vehicles are equipped with a label placed
near the bottom edge of the driver-side door. See
Fig. 1.11.
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION

INDICATOR
LAMP(S)
STOP
CHECK
(Solid)
(Flashing)
Level 1
Level 2
WARNING
(Flashing)
Level 3
Level 4
Indicator Lamp
Message(s)
Filter Regeneration
Recommended.
Filter
Regeneration
Necessary
Parked Regeneration
Required Engine
Derate
Service Regeneration Required.

Engine Derate To Idle Only.
Diesel Particulate
Filter Condition
Filter is reaching
capacity.
Filter is now
reaching maximum
capacity.
Switch.
Filter has reached

maximum capacity.
Filter has exceeded maximum

capacity.
Required Action
Bring vehicle to
highway speeds to
allow for an
Automatic
Regeneration or
perform a Parked
Regeneration.
To avoid engine
derate, bring vehicle
to highway speeds
to allow for an
Automatic
Regeneration, or
perform a Parked
Regeneration as
soon as possible.
Vehicle must be
parked, and a Parked
Regeneration must
be performed.
Engine will begin
derate.
Vehicle must be parked, and a

Service Regeneration must be
performed. Check engine
operators manual for details.
Engine will shut down.
HEST (High Exhaust

System Temperature)
Flashing
A regeneration is in
progress.
Solid
Exhaust components
and exhaust gas are at
high temperature. When
stationary, keep away
from people and
flammable materials or
vapors.
For a driver performed Parked Regeneration, vehicle must be equipped with a dash mounted Regeneration Switch.
02/20/2009
f080156
Fig. 1.7, ATS Indicators, EPA07
1.4
IMPORTANT
DPF Regen Needed
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

regeneration is needed.
If flashing, regenerate as soon as
possible. Engine derate possible.
Hot exhaust can cause fire.
Hot Exhaust
Keep flammables and people away

from exhaust.
DEF Refill Needed
DEF
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) level is

low. Engine derate likely.
Refill tank with certified DEF.
See operators manual for complete instructions.
2401656000
11/30/2010
f080162
Fig. 1.8, ATS Indicators, EPA10 and Newer

VEHICLE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
DATE OF MANUFACTURE 01/96
FREIGHTLINER CORPORATION
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA REGULATIONS FOR NOISE EMISSION
APPLICABLE TO MEDIUM AND HEAVY TRUCKS.
THE FOLLOWING ACTS OR THE CAUSING THEREOF BY ANY PERSON ARE PROHIBITED BY
THE NOISE CONTROL ACT OF 1972:
A. THE REMOVAL OR RENDERING INOPERATIVE, OTHER THAN FOR PURPOSES OF
MAINTENANCE, REPAIR, OR REPLACEMENT, OF ANY NOISE CONTROL DEVICE OR
ELEMENT OF DESIGN (LISTED IN THE OWNERS MANUAL) INCORPORATED INTO THIS
VEHICLE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE NOISE CONTROL ACT.
B. THE USE THIS VEHICLE AFTER SUCH DEVICE OR ELEMENT OF DESIGN HAS
BEEN REMOVED OR RENDERED INOPERATIVE.
2400273020
10/06/98
CERTIFIED
CLEAN IDLE
f080026
Fig. 1.9, Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label

MANUFACTURED BY:
VIN:
VEH FAMILY CD:
GVWRKG
GVWRLBS
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
REGULATORY CLASS:
EMISSION CONTROL IDENTIFIERS:
THIS VEHICLE COMPLIES WITH U. S. EPA REGULATIONS FOR XXXX HEAVY DUTY VEHICLES.
SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR PROPER MAINTENANCE OF THIS VEHICLE.
U PART NO. 2401177060 REV A
02/29/2012
f080181
Fig. 1.10, Vehicle Emission Control Information Label
1.5
02/20/2012
f080179
Fig. 1.11, CARB Clean Idle Label
2
Vehicle Access
Cab Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grab Handles and Access Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cab Entry and Exit, Vehicles With Two Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cab Entry and Exit, Vehicles With One Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back-of-Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood Opening and Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Vehicle Access
Cab Door Locks and Handles
One key operates the ignition switch and all of the

door locks.
2
3
IMPORTANT: Each key is numbered. Record

the number so a duplicate key can be made, if
needed.
To unlock the drivers door from outside the cab, insert the key in the lockset and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise (Fig. 2.1). To remove the key, turn it counterclockwise to its original position. Pull out on the
door pull handle to open the door.
5
2
1
f720398
10/25/2001
To open the door from the inside, lift up on the door lever
(arrow).
1. Lock Button
2. Armrest/Handle
3. Door Lever
4. Window Crank
5. Inner Door Grab Handle (optional)
10/22/2001
f720397
1. Key
2. Lock
3. Door Pull Handle

Fig. 2.1, Exterior Door Handle
To unlock the passengers door from outside the cab,

insert the key in the lockset and turn it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise. Turn the key clockwise to the
original position to remove it.
NOTE: The cab door locks can be operated

when the doors are open.
To lock a door from outside the cab, do either one of
the following:
Insert the key in the lockset and turn it in the
direction opposite to the unlocking direction

(counterclockwise for the drivers door, clockwise for the passengers door). Close the door
if it is open.
Push down the inside lock button (Fig. 2.2).
Close the door.
2.1
Fig. 2.2, Door Interior
To open the door from the inside, lift up on the door

lever. This will unlatch the door whether or not it is
locked. If it is open, close the door by pulling the
inner door grab handle.
To lock either door from inside the cab, slide the lock
button downwards (Fig. 2.3). To unlock the door
without unlatching it, push the lock button upwards. A
red dot will show below the lock button when it is
unlocked.
Grab Handles and Access

Steps
For ease of entry and exit, there are three grab
handles, one on the A-pillar, one on the inner B-pillar,
and an optional one on the inside of the door. In addition, the steering wheel may be used to provide
secure handholds. There are one or two access
steps to provide secure footholds.
Vehicle Access
Use the cab access system (grab handles, access

steps, and steering wheel) to enter or exit the cab.
Entering from the Drivers Side

2
To enter the cab from the drivers side, do the following steps (Fig. 2.4):
3
1
10/24/2001
f720401
Move the button down to lock, and up to unlock (arrows).

The door is unlocked when the red dot shows.
1. Door
2. Lock Button
3. Red Dot
Fig. 2.3, Door Lock Button
NOTE: The A-pillar grab handle is not installed

on the drivers side.
4
The grab handles, access steps, and steering wheel

are all part of the cab access system. Use these
"helping hands" when getting into, or out of, the cab.
They will increase your security and comfort.
Cab Entry and Exit, Vehicles

With Two Steps
WARNING
Wet or dirty shoe soles greatly increase the
chance of slipping or falling. If your soles are wet
or dirty, be especially careful when climbing
onto, or down from, the back-of-cab area.
3
11/02/2001
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
f720399
Steering Wheel
B-Pillar Grab Handle
Bottom Step
Top Step
Inner Door Grab Handle (optional)
Fig. 2.4, Cab Access System, Drivers Side
1.
Use the door pull handle to open the drivers

door, and place anything that you are carrying in
the cab.
Always maintain three-point contact with the

back-of-cab access supports while entering and
exiting the back-of-cab area. Three-point contact
means both feet and one hand, or both hands
and one foot, on the grab handles, steps, and
deck plates. Other areas are not meant to support back-of-cab access, and grabbing or stepping in the wrong place could lead to a fall, and
personal injury.
2.
Grasp the B-pillar grab handle with both hands.

Reach up as far as is comfortable.
3.
Place your right foot on the bottom step, and pull

yourself up.
4.
Place your left foot on the top step.
5.
Grasp the steering wheel with your left hand, and

step up.
Be careful not to get hands or feet tangled in

hoses or other back-of-cab equipment. Carelessness could cause a person to trip and fall, with
possible injury.
6.
Step into the cab with your right foot first, and
grasp the steering wheel with your right hand.
2.2
Vehicle Access
NOTE: You can also use the inner door grab

handle, if available, as a support when getting
up or down from the bottom step.
5
4
Exiting from the Drivers Side

To exit the cab from the drivers side, do the following steps (Fig. 2.4):
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab

while carrying any items in your hands.
1.
If you wish to take any items with you, after you

exit the cab, place them in an accessible location
on the seat or cab floor. Make sure they will not
get in your way as you exit.
WARNING
Always face in when exiting the cab. Do not attempt to exit with your back to the cab, as you
would going down a flight of stairs. It is easier to
slip or lose your balance. If you slip when exiting
in this way, there is a greater likelihood of personal injury.
2.
Grasp the steering wheel with both hands. Place

your left foot on the top step, and stand on the
threshold, facing into the cab.
2
1
10/23/2001
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
f720400
Bottom Step
Top Step
B-Pillar Grab Handle
Sidewall Grab Handle (optional)
A-Pillar Cover Grab Handle
Fig. 2.5, Cab Access System, Passengers Side and

Back of Cab
3.
Place your left foot on the bottom step and step

up to the upper step with your right foot.
4.
Move your right hand to the A-pillar cover grab

handle.
Step to the ground with your left foot first.
5.
Place your left foot on the top step and step up.
Retrieve from the cab any items that you wish to

take with you.
6.
Move your left hand to the A-pillar cover grab

handle.
7.
Step into the cab with your left foot first.
3.
Move your right hand to the B-pillar grab handle.
4.
Move your right foot to the bottom step.
5.
Move your left hand to the B-pillar grab handle.
6.
7.

Entering from the Passengers Side

To enter the cab from the passengers side, do the

following steps (Fig. 2.5):
Exiting from the Passengers Side
1.
Open the passengers door, and place anything

that you are carrying in the cab.
To exit the cab from the passengers side, do the following steps (Fig. 2.5):
2.
Grasp the B-pillar grab handle on the door with

both hands.

1.
2.3

Vehicle Access

WARNING
ness could cause a person to trip and fall, with

possible injury.
Use the cab access system (grab handles, access
steps, and steering wheel) to enter or exit the cab.
Entering from the Drivers Side

To enter the cab from the drivers side, do the following steps (Fig. 2.4):
1.
Use the door pull handle to open the drivers

door, and place anything that you are carrying in
the cab. Use the door armrest/handle and, if
available, the inner door grab handle, as a support if needed.
2.

3.
Place your right foot on the step, and pull yourself up.
2.
Grasp the A-pillar cover grab handle with both

hands, then place your right foot on the top step
while standing up from the seat facing inward.
3.
Place your left foot on the top step.
4.
5.
Move your left foot to the bottom step.
6.
4.
Step into the cab with your left foot.
7.
Step to the ground with your right foot first.
5.
Grasp the steering wheel with your left hand.
8.

take with you.
6.
Step into the cab with your right foot, and grasp
the steering wheel with your right hand.



With One Step
Exiting from the Drivers Side
WARNING
onto, or down from, the back-of-cab area.
personal injury.
hoses or other back-of-cab equipment. Careless-
To exit the cab from the drivers side, do the following steps (Fig. 2.4):

1.

WARNING
2.4
Vehicle Access
2.
Grasp the steering wheel with both hands. Place

your left foot on the step, and stand on the
threshold, facing into the cab.
3.
4.
5.
Move your right foot onto the step.
6.
Step to the ground with your left foot first.
7.

take with you.

Entering from the Passengers Side

To enter the cab from the passengers side, do the
following steps (Fig. 2.5):
WARNING
2.
Grasp the A-pillar cover grab handle with both

hands, then place your right foot on the step
while standing up from the seat facing inward.
3.
Place your left foot on the step.
4.
5.
6.
Step to the ground with your right foot first.
7.

take with you.
1.
Open the passengers door, and place anything

that you are carrying in the cab.
2.

3.
Place your left foot on the step and step up to

the cab with your right foot.
Back-of-Cab Access
4.
Move your right hand to the A-pillar cover grab

handle.
5.
Move your left hand to the A-pillar cover grab

handle.
6.
Step into the cab with your left foot.

Exiting from the Passengers Side

To exit the cab from the passengers side, do the following steps (Fig. 2.5):

1.

When trailer air and electrical connections cannot be

reached conveniently from the ground, Federal Motor
Carrier Safety Regulations require commercial carriers to provide back-of-cab access.
Optional grab handles are mounted on each cab
sidewall, or on the left sidewall only. See Fig. 2.6.
Steps are mounted either on the fuel tank(s) or on
metal brackets. When a deck plate is necessary, it is
mounted across the top of the frame rails.
IMPORTANT: Climb onto, and down from, backof-cab access facing in toward the vehicle, as
you would on a ladder. Do not climb up or down
facing out away from the vehicle.
WARNING
onto, or leaving, the back-of-cab area.
2.5
Vehicle Access
2.
Place one foot on the bottom step and pull yourself up.
3.
Place your other foot on the top step.
4.
Move your lower hand to a higher position on the

grab handle.
5.
Step onto the deck plate.
Climbing Down from Back-of-Cab

To climb down from the back-of-cab area:
2
3
1.
Grasp the sidewall grab handle with both hands.
2.
Step one foot at a time onto the top step.
3.
Move your upper hand to a lower position on the

grab handle.
4.
Move one foot to the bottom step.
5.
Move your upper hand to a lower position on the

grab handle.
6.
Step to the ground with your upper foot first.
Battery Access
Battery Compartment
09/28/2007
1. Steps
2. Grab Handle
f602336
3. Deck Plate
Fig. 2.6, Back-of-Cab Access Supports (typical)
The battery compartment is located in the lower part

of the cab beneath and to the rear of the drivers
door. It is fastened by a quarter-turn fastener. To
open the battery access door, turn the quarter-turn
fastener with a small screwdriver. See Fig. 2.7.

personal injury.
hoses or other back-of-cab equipment. Carelessness could cause a person to trip and fall, with
possible injury.
Entering Back-of-Cab
When climbing onto the deck plate, do the following:
1.
Grasp the sidewall grab handle with both hands.

10/25/2001
f543934
Open the battery access door by turning the quarter-turn

fastener (arrow) with a small screwdriver.
Fig. 2.7, Battery Compartment, Closed
2.6
Vehicle Access
With the battery access door open (Fig. 2.8), it is

easy to get access to the battery terminals for cleaning, charging, or emergency jump starting.
NOTE: Whenever battery power is disconnected, clocks and electronically tuned radios
must be reset.
4
1
01/18/95
1.
2.
3.
4.
Top Step
Battery
Cab
Battery Access Door
Fig. 2.8, Battery Compartment, Open
To close the battery access door, do the following

steps:
1.
Swing the battery access door to line up the

quarter-turn fastener with the hole in the cab
door frame.
2.
Close the battery access door and check to be

sure the quarter-turn fastener is engaged with
the hole.
3.
Fig. 2.9, Cab (Battery) Isolation Switch
Hood Opening and Closing

The hood can be raised to a full-open position. A torsion bar helps you to raise the hood, and to lower it
to the operating position. Hood restraint cables prevent the hood from overtravel. A hood damper limits
the closing speed. In the operating position, the hood
is secured to the cab-mounted half-fenders by a
hold-down latch on each side of the hood.
To Open the Hood

1.
Apply the parking brakes.
2.
Release both hood hold-down latches by pulling

the ends outward. See Fig. 2.10.
Turn the fastener one-quarter turn.
Cab (Battery) Isolation Switch

The cab isolation switch (see Fig. 2.9) is located on
the cab floor at the left of the drivers seat, or inside
the battery box. The battery isolation switch reduces
the power to the cab and engine power wiring. Use it
whenever the vehicle is to be put out of service for
extended periods.
IMPORTANT: The battery disconnect switch

does not completely isolate the batteries from
the electrical system. For service operations that
require that the batteries be disconnected, always shut down the engine and remove the
negative battery cables.
2.7
f600150a
f543933
10/24/2001
CAUTION
Do not let the hood free-fall to the full-open position. To do so could cause damage to the hood
or hood straps.
3.
Standing in front of the hood, raise the rear of

the hood upward until it reaches the over-center
position (45 degrees from vertical). Then slowly
bring it to a stop.
To Close the Hood

1.
Push the hood over center.
Vehicle Access
3
2
1
10/24/2001
f880555
1. Fender
2. Latch Hook
3. Latch Handle
4. Half-Fender
Fig. 2.10, Hood Hold-Down Latch
2.
As the hood goes over center, the damper automatically slows its rate of descent. If needed, you
can also slow its rate of descent with your hand.
3.
Make sure the hood is flush with the cowl, then

secure the hood by engaging both hood holddown latches.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that both hold-down

latches are fully engaged before operating the
vehicle.
Fuse Identification
Main Fuse Box/PDM
The main fuse box, also known as the power distribution module, or PDM, is located under the hood on
the left front fender just forward of the bulkhead module. See Fig. 2.11. To open the fuse box, pull down
on the wire clips holding the lid on the fuse box.
A sticker inside the lid of the fuse box shows the locations of the fuses and describes the circuit(s) that
each fuse protects (see Fig. 2.12). See Table 2.1 for
descriptions of a typical set of fuses. The fuses in the
main fuse box are mini blade-type fuses. Battery
power fuses, located near the batteries, are bolt-in
megafuses.
Because the electrical system is multiplexed, no relays are needed. The multiplexing module performs
the functions normally provided by relays.
Fuse Identification, Main Fuse Box

Pos.
Description
Fuse Color
Rating
No.
F1 VCU (MBE900 only)
Red
10 Amp
F2 Blower Motor
Green
30 Amp
F3 Engine ECU
Yellow
20 Amp
Transmission Control
Green
30 Amp
F4
Unit
F5 Ignition Switch
Tan
5 Amp
F6 Spare
F7 Bulkhead Module
Green
30 Amp
F8 ICU
Red
10 Amp
Transmission Control
Yellow
20 Amp
F9
Unit
F10 Door Locks (optional)
Red
10 Amp
F11 Mirrors (optional)
Blue
15 Amp
F12 Radio/Diagnostics
Yellow
20 Amp
F13 Chassis Module
Green
30 Amp
L/H Power Windows
Blue
15 Amp
F14
(optional)
F15 Bulkhead Module
Green
30 Amp
F16 ABS ECU
Blue
15 Amp
F17 Chassis Module
Green
30 Amp
F18 Bulkhead Module
Green
30 Amp
F19 Chassis Module
Green
30 Amp
F20 Bulkhead Module
Green
30 Amp
R/H Power Windows
Blue
15 Amp
F21
(optional)
F22 Bulkhead Module
Green
30 Amp
F23 Spare
F24 Spare
F25 Spare
F26 Spare
M1 Battery Power
125 Amp
M2 Battery Power
125 Amp
M3 Battery Power
150 Amp
Table 2.1, Fuse Identification, Main Fuse Box
Trailer and Taillight Fuse Boxes

The trailer fuse box and the taillight fuse box, on vehicles so equipped, are mounted on a bracket with
the chassis module on the left-hand frame rail aft of
the cab, or on a crossmember at the end of the
frame rail. These may be referred to as the chassis
fuse box or chassis PDM. See Fig. 2.13 for trailer
fuse and relay information, and Fig. 2.14 for taillight
fuse and relay information.
2.8
Vehicle Access
These fuse boxes contain mini blade-type fuses, 12volt mini relays, and 12-volt micro relays.
2
09/28/2004
09/25/2001
f544528
f543935
1. Bulkhead Module
Fig. 2.13, Trailer Fuse Box Diagram
2. Main Fuse Box
Fig. 2.11, Location of the Main Fuse Box
10/25/2001
f543936
Fig. 2.12, Main Fuse Box Diagram
10/07/2004
f544541
Fig. 2.14, Taillight Fuse Box Diagram
2.9
3
Instruments
Instrumentation Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Warning and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Standard Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Optional Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Overhead Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Instruments
Instrumentation Control Unit
Vehicles that are not EPA10-compliant do not have a

fuel/diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) gauge.
The ICU3 instrument cluster is a single unit that provides the driver with engine and vehicle information.
It is comprised of gauges, warning and indicator
lamps, an audible warning, and a liquid crystal display (LCD) screen.
There can be up to eight gauges on the drivers instrument panel (six electronic and two mechanical).
The air gauges operate mechanically.
The ICU3 also has the capability to drive up to six
independent stand-alone gauges such as those installed on the auxiliary dash panel. Figure 3.2 shows
a typical dash panel layout.
IMPORTANT: Vehicles that are domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada may not have
EPA07- or EPA10-compliant engines with an
emission aftertreatment system (ATS), depending upon local jurisdictional emissions guidelines.
Dash Message Center

The dash message center houses all of the standard
and optional warning and indicator lamps, as well as
the driver display screen. The display screen has a
Figure 3.1 shows a typical ICU3 instrument cluster

installed in EPA07- and EPA10-compliant vehicles.
2
6
12
7
09/10/2009
11
10
f610525a
NOTE: This instrument cluster is shown with the U.S. speedometer, which shows miles per hour (mph) more prominently
than kilometers per hour (km/h).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

Dash Message Center
Driver Display Screen
Headlight High-Beam Indicator
5.
6.
7.
8.
Fuel/DEF Level Gauge

Primary Air Pressure Gauge
Mode/Reset Button
Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
9.
10.
11.
12.
Speedometer (U.S. version)

Tachometer
Transmission Temperature Gauge
Coolant Temperature Gauge
Fig. 3.1, Typical Gauge Layout, U.S. (EPA10 shown)
3.1
Instruments
2
3
4
10/11/2001
f610578
NOTE: Instruments and controls, and their locations, may vary from those shown.
1. Left-Hand Control Panel
2. ICU3
3. Right-Hand Control Panel
4. Auxiliary Dash Panel

5. Climate Control Panel
Fig. 3.2, Dash Panel Layout (typical)
7-character LCD that normally shows odometer readings and, below that, a smaller 3-character LCD that
shows voltmeter readings. Warning messages and
diagnostic fault codes will also appear in the display
screen.
Information provided by the driver display screen includes:
odometer readings (in miles or kilometers)
trip and total engine distance
trip and total engine hours
service screens
fault code displays
warning messages
Ignition Sequence
When the ignition is turned on, the ICU3 runs
through the ignition sequence. See Fig. 3.3. First,
the ICU3 performs a self-test, looking for active fault
codes and displays them, if any, one after the other
until the engine is started or the ignition switch is
turned off. If there are no active fault codes, the
driver display screen displays the odometer.
When the ignition is first turned on, all the electronic
gauges complete a full sweep of their dials, the
warning and indicator lamps illuminate, and the audible warning sounds for three seconds. On EPA10compliant vehicles, the DEF level indicator illuminates all segments green, then turns them off one at
a time before turning the left most segment amber
then red.
3.2
Instruments
HEADLIGHTS ON
/ IGNITION OFF
POWER ON
IGNITION ON
123456.7
MI
ICU PERFORMS SELFTEST:

ELECTRONIC GAUGE NEEDLES
SWEEP, WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS COME ON, BUZZER SOUNDS
ODOMETER
SCREEN
IF NO FAULTS
WERE DETECTED
**
IF FAULT DETECTED
123456.7
ABS 11
MI
12.3 VOLTS
FAULT CODE
SCREEN
PARK BRAKE
RELEASED MOVING
**
123456.7
RELEASE PARK BRAKE
MI
12.3 VOLTS
f040804
10/26/2009
* HOURS SERVICE or MI SERVICE may display

** If the key was cycled off wile displaying Trip Miles, Trip Hours, or Ambient Air Temperature, that screen will be dis-
played instead of odometer miles, when the key is cycled ON without any fault codes.
Fig. 3.3, Ignition Sequence
NOTE: The air gauges do not sweep.

NOTE: If active fault codes are present, take the
vehicle to an authorized Freightliner service facility as soon as possible.
If the fault is a serious problem that requires immediate attention, the engine protection system will activate. In most cases, the check engine light will illuminate also.
If service miles or service hours has been exceeded,
either Fig. 3.4 or Fig. 3.5 will come up before the
fault screen (if fault codes are present). If no fault
codes are present and service hours or miles are
exceeded, either Fig. 3.4 or Fig. 3.5 will stay displayed until the parking brake is released with the
engine running, or the mode/reset button is pressed.
3.3
HOURS
SERVICE
10/26/2009
f040805
Fig. 3.4, Service Hours Exceeded
MI
SERVICE
10/26/2009
f040806
Fig. 3.5, Service Miles Exceeded
Instruments
Odometer
iv. Select screen
The odometer is set to display in either miles or kilometers, depending on the primary scale of the
speedometer. The legend, either MI or KM, illuminates between the odometer and the volts display
when the engine is running or the headlights are on.
v.
The odometer is a 7-digit display with a decimal point

until the vehicle has traveled 999,999.9 miles or kilometers (km). At one million miles (km), the odometer
rolls over to "1000000" without the decimal point, and
can continue up to 9,999,999. The odometer only
displays significant figures (no leading zeros).
ix. Engine hours
Mode/Reset Button
To reset trip miles and/or trip hours to zero, press the

mode/reset button for one second or longer.
The mode/reset button (Fig. 3.6) is located on the

right side of the instrument cluster. The mode/reset
button is used to scroll through the displays on the
driver display screen, and to reset the trip distance
and trip hours values to zero.
When the parking brake is off, pressing the mode/

reset button will scroll through the following screens:
Trip hours
iii. Outside temperature

iv. Back to odometer
When the parking brake is set, pressing the mode/

reset button will scroll through the following screens:
i.
Trip distance
ii.
Trip hours
iii. Outside temperature
x.
Setup screen
xi. Back to odometer
Trip Miles
Miles or Kilometers
To toggle between MI (miles) or KM (kilometers),
press the mode/reset button while in the Select
screen.
level shown in Table 3.1.
Functions
ii.
viii. Engine miles
Engine oil pressure falls below the minimum
Fig. 3.6, Mode/Reset Button
Trip distance
vii. Clear screen (with less than 254 miles)
An audible warning sounds during the ignition sequence and whenever one of the following conditions
exist:
f610340
i.
vi. Diagnostic screen
Audible Warnings
PUSH
MODE
HOLD
RESET
09/25/99
Temperature alert screen
Coolant temperature rises above the maximum
temperature shown in Table 3.2.

Air pressure falls below approximately 70 psi
(483 kPa).
Parking brake is set with the vehicle moving at
a speed greater than two miles per hour.

System voltage falls below 12.0 volts.
Door is open and the parking brake is off.
Occupied seat belts are not fastened and the
parking brake is off.

Outside temperature falls below 35F (1.7C).
Minimum Oil Pressure*
At Idle Speed:
At Rated RPM:
Engine Model
psi (kPa)
psi (kPa)
Caterpillar
1020 (69138) 3045 (207310)
Cummins
15 (103)
35 (241)
3.4
Instruments
Minimum Oil Pressure*

At Idle Speed:
At
Engine Model
psi (kPa)
Detroit Diesel
14 (97)
Mercedes-Benz
7 (50)
Rated RPM:
psi (kPa)
55 (350)
36 (250)
* Oil pressures are given with the engine at operating temperature. With
the engine cold, oil pressure may be higher. Individual engines may vary
from the listed pressures; observe and record pressures when the engine
is new to create a guide for checking engine condition.
Table 3.1, Minimum Oil Pressure
Maximum Coolant Temperature

Engine Make
Temperature: F (C)
Caterpillar
230 (110)
Cummins
225 (107)
Detroit Diesel
215 (101)
Mercedes-Benz
222 (105)
Table 3.2, Maximum Coolant Temperature
Warning and Indicator Lights

There can be up to 28 warning and indicator lamps
installed in the dash message center. See Fig. 3.7
for pre-EPA07 engines, Fig. 3.8 for EPA07 engines,
or Fig. 3.9 for EPA10 engines.
The lamps, or telltales, in the top row are optional.
The lamps on the other three rows are installed at
fixed positions that do not vary. If an optional lamp is
not requested, the position is blank.
See Table 3.3 for a list of standard and commonly
used warning and indicator lamps.
Engine Protection System

If a critical engine condition exists (for example, low
engine oil pressure, low coolant level, high coolant
temperature, high diesel particulate filter soot level,
or uncontrolled regeneration), the CHECK engine
lamp will illuminate to alert the driver to correct the
condition as soon as possible. If the condition worsens, the STOP engine lamp will illuminate.
NOTE: If the CHECK engine lamp illuminates

during vehicle operation, take the vehicle directly to an authorized Freightliner service facility.
3.5
WARNING
When the red STOP engine lamp illuminates,
most engines are programmed to shut down automatically within 30 seconds. The driver must
immediately move the vehicle to a safe location
at the side of the road to prevent causing a hazardous situation that could cause bodily injury,
property damage, or severe damage to the engine.
The STOP engine lamp illuminates when the engine
protection system is activated. The engine protection
system typically works as follows, depending on the
engine type. Some vehicles may have a shutdownoverride switch, which may be used to momentarily
override the shutdown sequence. See Chapter 7 for
more information.
On some engines, the engine protection sys-
tem will derate the engine, allowing it to run at

lower rpm and slower vehicle speeddrive the
vehicle to a safe location or to a service facility.
On other engines, the engine protection sys-
tem will shut down the engine. It will first derate the engine, then shut it down completely
30 to 60 seconds after the indicator illuminates
(depending on the critical fault type) if the condition does not improve.
Bring the vehicle to a stop on the side of the
road before the engine shuts down. Do not attempt to restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving. To restart the engine, turn the ignition
switch to OFF, leave it there a few seconds,
then turn the switch to START. The engine will
run for a short period and shut down again if
the condition does not improve.
Instruments
1
10
WHEEL
LOCK
WASH
FLUID
INTAKE
HEATER
12
11
13
WATER
IN FUEL
WHEEL
SPIN
14
LOW
WATER
9
15
CHECK
TRANS
ENG
FAN
LOW
FUEL
BRAKE
16
03/05/2002
22
17
19
18
24
23
21
20
26
25
27
f610593a
Typical installation shown. Location of legends installed in the top row may vary, and other legends may be specified.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Wheel Lock Warning

Low Washer Fluid Indicator
Intake Heater On Indicator
Water In Fuel Indicator
Wheel Spin Indicator
Low Coolant Warning
Check Transmission Indicator
Engine Fan On Indicator
Low Fuel Warning
Check Engine Indicator
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Engine Protection Warning

No Charge Indicator
Tractor ABS Indicator
Transmission Temperature
Indicator
Trailer ABS Indicator (as applies)
Low Oil Pressure Warning
High Coolant Temperature
Warning
Fasten Seat Belts Warning
Parking Brake On Indicator

Not Used
Air Restriction Indicator
Left-Turn Signal
Low Battery Voltage Warning
High-Beam Headlights Indicator
Low Air Pressure Warning
Right-Turn Signal
Fig. 3.7, Pre-EPA07 Dash Message Center
1 2
OPT
3
OPT
OPT
5
OPT
OPT
OPT
6
OPT
7
OPT
OPT
ABS
ABS
8
14
9
15
11
10
16
13
12
17
18
19
f610850
10/18/2006
Typical installation shown. Location of legends installed in the top row may vary, and other legends may be specified.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Optional Indicator
Check Engine Indicator
Stop Engine Indicator
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Tractor ABS Indicator
Transmission Temperature
Indicator
7. Trailer ABS Indicator (as applies)
8. Low Oil Pressure Warning

9. High Coolant Temperature
Warning
10. Fasten Seat Belt Warning
11. Parking Brake On Warning
12. DPF Status Lamp
13. High Exhaust System
Temperature (HEST) Warning
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Left-Turn Signal
Low Battery Voltage Warning
High-Beam Headlights Indicator
Low Air Pressure Warning
Right-Turn Signal
Fig. 3.8, EPA07 Dash Message Center
3.6
Instruments
CHECK
STOP
Common Warning and Indicator Lamps

Indicates a critical engine condition (low oil pressure, low
coolant level, high coolant temperature, high DPF soot level,
CHECK Engine
or uncontrolled DPF regeneration). Correct the condition as
soon as possible. If the condition worsens, the STOP engine
lamp will illuminate.
Indicates a serious fault which requires engine shutdown
immediately. The engine protection system will reduce the
maximum engine torque and speed, and, if the condition
does not improve, will shut down the engine within 30 to 60
seconds.
STOP Engine
The driver must safely bring the vehicle to a stop on the side
of the road and shut down the engine as soon as the red
light is seen. If the engine shuts down while the vehicle is in
a hazardous location, restart the engine after turning the key
to the OFF position for a few seconds. Move the vehicle to a
safer location.
Slow (10-second) flashing indicates a regeneration (regen) is
in progress.
High Exhaust System Temperature
(HEST)
DPF Status
Solid illumination indicates high exhaust temperatures at the

outlet of the tail pipe, when speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
It does not signify the need for service; it only alerts the
vehicle operator to high exhaust temperatures when a regen
is in progress.
Solid illumination indicates a regen is required. Change to a
more challenging duty cycle (such as highway driving ) to
raise exhaust temperatures for at least twenty minutes, or
perform a parked regen.
Blinking indicates that a parked regen is required
immediately. An engine derate and shutdown will occur.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Indicates an emissions-related fault. See the engine

operation manual for details.
Indicates the vehicle ABS is engaged.
WHEEL
SPIN
Vehicle ABS
When ABS is not engaged. illumination indicates a problem

with the vehicle ABS. Repair the ABS immediately to ensure
full braking capability.
Indicates the trailer ABS is engaged.
Trailer ABS
When ABS is not engaged. illumination indicates a problem

with the vehicle ABS. Repair the ABS immediately to ensure
full braking capability.
Indicates the Automatic Traction Control (ATC) is engaged.
Wheel Spin
Solid illumination indicates a problem with the ATC system.

Repair the ATC system immediately to ensure full braking
capability.
High Coolant Temperature
3.7
Indicates the coolant temperature is above the maximum

allowable temperature listed in Table 3.2.
Instruments
WAIT
TO START
NO
CHARGE
IDLE
MGMT
Low Air Pressure
Indicates air pressure in the primary or secondary reservoir

is below 70 psi (483 kPa).
Wait To Start
Illuminates when starting the engine during cold conditions.

Wait until the lamp goes out before turning the ignition key to
START.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
Indicates the engine oil pressure is below the minimum

allowable pressure listed in Table 3.1.
Water In Fuel
Indicates the fuel may contain water. Drain any water

collected in the fuel/water separator.
Fuel Filter Restriction
Indicates the fuel filter is clogged and requires service.
Low Battery Voltage
Indicates that battery voltage is 11.9 volts or less.
Check Transmission
Indicates an undesirable transmission condition.
Transmission Overheat
Indicates high transmission temperature.
No Charge
Indicates an alternator charge output failure.
Engine Brake
Indicates the engine brake is engaged.
Optimized Idle
Indicates optimized idle is enabled.
Left-Turn Signal
Flashing indicates the outside left-turn signal lights are

activated.
Right-Turn Signal
Flashing indicates the outside right-turn signal lights are

activated.
High-Beam Headlights
Indicates the high-beam headlights are on.
3.8
Instruments

Parking/Emergency Brake
Indicates the parking brake is engaged.
Cruise Control
Indicates the cruise control is enabled.
Unfastened Seat Belt
Activates with an audible alert when the system detects that

the parking brake is off and the driver seat belt is not
fastened on some vehicles. On other vehicles, this lamp
illuminates for 15 seconds when the ignition is first turned
on.
Table 3.3, Common Warning and Indicator Lamps
AIR
WASH
*WAIT*
WHEEL
LOW
CHECK
FILTER
FLUID
TO START
SPIN
WATER
TRANS
CHECK
STOP
ABS
OPT 8
OPT 9
ABS
BRAKE
BRAKE
AIR
11/09/2011
f611107a
Fig. 3.9, EPA10 Dash Message Center
Standard Instruments
Standard instruments are present on every vehicle.
They are listed here in alphabetical order, to make
the information easier to find.
Air Pressure Gauges
WARNING
If air pressure falls below minimum pressure, the
braking ability of the vehicle will be limited. Slow
the vehicle down and bring it to a gradual stop.
Do not attempt to move the vehicle until air pressure has risen above the minimum level. Moving
3.9
a vehicle without adequate braking power could

cause an accident resulting in personal injury or
death.
Air pressure gauges, as shown in Fig. 3.10, register
the pressure in the primary and secondary air systems. The gauges are labeled for the A or B reservoir. Normal pressure with the engine running is 100
to 120 psi (689 to 827 kPa) in both systems.
A low-air-pressure warning light and audible warning,
connected to both the primary and secondary systems, activate when air pressure in either system
drops below 64 to 76 psi (441 to 524 kPa).
Instruments
If coolant temperature rises above the maximum

temperature listed in Table 3.2, the CHECK engine
lamp will illuminate. If the condition does not improve, the STOP engine lamp will also illuminate and
an audible warning will sound. The engine will then
derate or shut down, depending on the type of engine protection system installed.
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
NOTICE
05/14/2001
f610556
Fig. 3.10, Air Pressure Gauge (reservoir A shown)
When the engine is started, the warning light and

audible warning remain on until air pressure in both
systems exceeds minimum pressure.
Coolant Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
A sudden increase in coolant temperature may
indicate engine or cooling system failure. Bring
the vehicle to a safe stop and investigate the
cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate
the engine until the cause has been determined
and corrected.
A sudden decrease or absence of oil pressure

may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle
to a safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate the engine
until the cause has been determined and corrected.
The engine oil pressure gauge, as shown in
Fig. 3.12, displays the current engine oil pressure. If
engine oil pressure falls below the minimum levels
shown in Table 3.1, the CHECK engine lamp will illuminate. If the condition does not improve, the STOP
engine lamp will also illuminate and an audible warning will sound. The engine will then derate or shut
down, depending on the type of engine protection
system installed.
During normal engine operation, the coolant temperature gauge, as shown in Fig. 3.11, should read
175 to 195F (79 to 91C). If the temperature remains below 160F (71C), inspect the cooling system to determine the cause.
50
PSI
100
OIL
150
200
10/09/2001
f610528
Fig. 3.12, Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
100
250
Fuel Gauge, Pre-EPA10
WATER
10/09/2001
Fig. 3.11, Coolant Temperature Gauge
f610565
Pre-EPA10-compliant vehicles have a fuel level

gauge indicating the level of diesel in the fuel tank(s).
See Fig. 3.13. A single fuel gauge is standard. If
equipped with an optional second fuel gauge, each
fuel tank level is indicated on a separate gauge.
3.10
Instruments
warning lamp that illuminates when the DEF level

reaches 10% of capacity. See Chapter 7for details of
the DEF gauge functions.
1/2
15
20 25
30
15
5
10/09/2001
f610566
1. Tachometer
1/2
85
km/h
2
f610527
2. Speedometer
Fig. 3.15, Speedometer and Tachometer (U.S. version)
Speedometer
The voltmeter is a digital readout located on the bottom line of the dash message center whenever the
ignition switch is turned on.
3
f611045
4. Low Fuel Warning

Lamp (amber at 1/8
tank of fuel)
Fig. 3.14, Fuel/DEF Gauge, EPA10
The diesel fuel level is indicated at the top of the

gauge, with a low-fuel warning lamp that illuminates
when the diesel fuel level registers 1/8th of capacity.
The DEF level is indicated in the lightbar on the
lower portion of the gauge. There is a low DEF level
3.11
75
130
Voltmeter
DEF
1. Diesel Fuel Level

Indicator
2. DEF Level Indicator
3. Low DEF Warning
Lamp (amber below
10% DEF)
65
110
30
Three speedometer options (see Fig. 3.15) are available. The U.S. version of the speedometer registers
speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h), with mph in larger numbers. The
metric version of the speedometer face reverses this
arrangement, with km/h in larger numbers. The
metric-only version shows km/h exclusively.
ULTRA LOW SULFUR

DIESEL FUEL ONLY
55
90
MPH
08/21/2009
50
10/09/2001
For engines that are EPA10-compliant, the fuel and

DEF levels are measured in a dual purpose fuel/DEF
gauge. See Fig. 3.14.
RPM
X100
Fig. 3.13, Fuel Level Gauge, Pre-EPA10
Fuel/Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)

Gauge, EPA10
45
70
10
25
10
FUEL
35
The voltmeter indicates the vehicle charging system

voltage when the engine is running and the battery
voltage when the engine is off. By monitoring the
voltmeter, the driver can stay aware of potential battery charging problems and have them fixed before
the batteries discharge enough to create starting difficulties.
The voltmeter will normally show approximately 13.7
to 14.1 volts when the engine is running. The voltage
of a fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts when
the engine is off. Battery voltage under 12.0 volts is
considered a low battery, and a completely discharged battery will produce only about 11.0 volts.
The voltmeter will indicate lower voltage as the vehicle is being started or when electrical devices in
the vehicle are being used.
Instruments
If the voltmeter shows an undercharged or overcharged condition for an extended period, have the
charging system and batteries checked at an authorized Freightliner service facility.
On a vehicle equipped with a battery isolator system,
the voltmeter measures the average voltage of all the
batteries when the engine is running. When the engine is off, the voltmeter shows only the isolated battery voltage and does not indicate the voltage of the
engine-starting batteries.
Optional Instruments
Optional instruments, typically located on the auxiliary dash panel or right-hand control panel, are not
found on every vehicle. They are listed here in alphabetical order, to make the information easier to find.
Air Restriction Gauge

The air intake restriction gauge measures the
vacuum on the engine side of the air cleaner. On
standard installations, it is mounted on the air intake
duct in the engine compartment.
10/10/2001
f610568
Fig. 3.16, Air Intake Restriction Indicator
As an option for easier viewing, the air intake restriction indicator (see Fig. 3.16) can be mounted on the
dash, usually on the right-hand control panel.
NOTE: Rain or snow can wet the filter and

cause a higher than normal reading temporarily.
Air intake restriction vacuum is measured in inches
of water (inH2O). For vehicles equipped with a
graduated indicator or a restriction gauge on the
dash, check the gauge with the engine off. If the yellow signal stays locked in the red zone once the engine is shut down, or is at or above the values
shown in Table 3.4, the air cleaner element needs to
be replaced.
Vehicles may be equipped with a go/no-go restriction
indicator without graduations (see Fig. 3.17) instead
of a graduated indicator.
04/08/2005
f090431
Fig. 3.17, Manual-Reset Air Restriction Indicator, Go/

No-Go
Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values
Pre-EPA07
EPA07/EPA10
Engine Make*
Engines (inH2O) Engines (inH2O)
Caterpillar
25
Cummins
25
25
Detroit Diesel
20
22
Mercedes-Benz
22
22
* Turbocharged engines must be checked at full load and governed engine speed.
Table 3.4, Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values
3.12
Instruments
Ambient Temperature Gauge

The ambient temperature gauge, shown in Fig. 3.18,
displays the in-cab or outside temperature, depending on the settings selected.
SET
ADJ
IN
ALARM
OUT
12/14/2011
10/10/2001
f610573
Fig. 3.19, Ammeter
f611153
Fig. 3.18, Ambient Temperature Gauge
When the alarm is enabled, the ambient temperature

gauge will sound an audible alert and the amber
lamp will illuminate when the outside or inside temperature (depending on the setting selected) reaches
the set temperature. Turn the alarm on and off using
the steps below.
1.
Press the IN button for in-cab temperature, or

the OUT button for outside temperature.
2.
Press the SET button.
3.
Press the ADJ button until the desired temperature is displayed.
4.
Press the ALARM button and "AL" will appear on

the display.
5.
Press the SET button to return to the current

temperature display.
NOTE: To turn the alarm off, press the ALARM

button again and "AL" will disappear from the
display.
Ammeter
An ammeter, shown in Fig. 3.19, measures current
flowing to and from the battery. When the batteries
are charging, the meter needle moves to the plus
side of the gauge. When the batteries are being dis-
3.13
charged, the needle moves to the minus side. A consistent negative reading when the engine is running
indicates a possible problem with the charging
system.
Digital Clock
The digital clock, shown in Fig. 3.20, displays the
current time, and has a 24-hour alarm with a
3-minute snooze feature.
SET
SNOOZE
HRS
ALARM
MIN
12/14/2011
f611154
Fig. 3.20, Digital Clock
Set the clock by pressing the SET button, then selecting the desired time by pressing the HRS and
MIN buttons. When the clock is set to PM hours, a
PM indicator will appear on the display. When the
PM indicator is not displayed, the clock is set to an
AM hour.
Instruments
To set the alarm, press the SET button, then press

the ALARM button. Select the desired alarm time by
pressing the HRS and MIN buttons, then press the
SET button once again.
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
To turn the alarm on and off, press the ALARM button when the current time is displayed. When the
alarm sounds, pressing the SNOOZE button will
delay the sounding of the alarm for three minutes.
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not

caused by a load increase may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
Do not operate the engine until the cause has
been determined and corrected.
Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauges
NOTICE
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
caused by a load increase may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause has
been determined and corrected.
During normal operation, forward-rear and rear-rear
axle oil temperature gauges (see Fig. 3.21) should
read between 160 and 220F (71 and 104C).
10/10/2001
NOTICE
During normal operation, the optional engine oil temperature gauge (Fig. 3.22) should read in the following temperature ranges:
160 to 195F (71 to 91C) for Caterpillar en-
gines
200 to 260F (93 to 126C) for Detroit Diesel
and Cummins engines

177 to 203F (81 to 95C) for Mercedes-Benz
engines
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil temperature range for a short period are not unusual. If
the temperature returns to normal when the load decreases, there is no problem.
f610571
Fig. 3.21, Axle Oil Temperature Gauge

10/10/2001
f610569
Fig. 3.22, Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
Tachometer
The tachometer, shown in Fig. 3.9, indicates engine
speed in revolutions per minute (rpm) and serves as
a guide for shifting the transmission and keeping the
engine in the appropriate rpm range. For low idle and
rated rpm, see the engine identification plate.
3.14
Instruments
Transmission Fluid Temperature

Gauge
The transmission fluid temperature gauge, shown in
Fig. 3.23, measures the transmission lubricant operating temperature. Temperatures vary by application,
but the transmission fluid temperature gauge reading
should not exceed 250F (121C).
200
275
10/10/2001
f610574
Fig. 3.24, Turbo Boost Pressure Gauge
125
350
accommodated on the drivers or auxiliary dash

panels.
TRANS
10/30/2001
f610600
Fig. 3.23, Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
A sudden increase in transmission fluid temperature that is not caused by a load increase may
indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a
safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent
further damage. Do not operate the vehicle until
the cause has been determined and corrected.
Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge

A turbocharger boost pressure gauge, shown in
Fig. 3.24, measures the pressure in the intake manifold, in excess of atmospheric pressure, being created by the turbocharger.
Overhead Instrument Panel

The optional overhead instrument panel, shown in
Fig. 3.25, may hold a citizens band (C/B) radio, a
microphone clip, and any switches that can not be
3.15
The underside of the overhead console also holds

the sun visors and the optional dome/reading light
assembly. For more information on the dome/reading
light assembly, see Chapter 4.
Instruments
4
1
f680028
04/19/2002
1. Storage Area with Netting

2. C/B Radio
3. Microphone Clip
4. Dome/Reading Light Assembly
Fig. 3.25, Overhead Instrument Panel
3.16
4
Controls
Ignition Switch and Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Multifunction Turn Signal Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Horn Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
All-Wheel-Drive Controls, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Adjustable Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Other Dash-Mounted Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Heater/Air Conditioner Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Controls
Ignition Switch and Key
WARNING
The ignition switch (Fig. 4.1) has four positions: ACCESSORY, OFF, ON, and START. In addition, the
same key locks and unlocks the cab doors.
Do not attempt to modify, add, splice, or remove

electrical wiring on this vehicle without authorization from Freightliner Engineering. Doing so
could damage the electrical system and result in
a fire that could cause serious personal injury or
property damage.
There are two new electrical modules, a master module located near the frontwall (bulkhead module) and
a slave module located between the frame rails
(chassis module).
This new wiring system features intelligent controls
that blink to show switch activity and error conditions.
These controls cannot be distinguished by their appearance, only by their function.
09/12/2001
f610509
Fig. 4.1, Ignition Switch Positions
In the OFF position, the key slot is vertical; the key

can be inserted and removed only in this position.
The following can be operated in the off position (regardless of whether the key is inserted): The lowbeam headlights, taillights, brake lights, road lights,
dome lights, clearance lights, turn signals, hazard
warning lights, horn, CB radio, power windows, cigarette lighter, clock, and electric oil pan heater.
In the ACCESSORY position, the key is turned counterclockwise. The radio, stereo system, mirror heat,
air dryer, backup lights, and all of the electrical systems that are operable in the off position are operable in the accessory position.
In the ON position, the key is turned clockwise and
all electrical systems are operable. The low air pressure and low oil pressure warning lights (or messages) and buzzer operate until the engine is started
and pressure is built up.
Electrical System
The Business Class M2 features a new type of
electrical system, different from any previous vehicle.
Multiple electrical signals are carried along a simplified set of wires, reducing the size of wiring bundles.
There are significantly fewer wires overall, meaning
less chance of damage, shorts and other problems.
For more information about these controls, see under

the headings "Axle Switches" and "Suspension
Dump Switch."
Lighting Controls
The lighting controls mentioned under this heading
generally operate through switches located on the
dash.
Two types of dash switches are used:
Paddle switches with a single paddle located in
the center of the switch. The paddle can be

raised or lowered to perform a function.
Rocker switches that can be pressed at either
the upper or lower end to perform a function.

Certain rocker switches are guarded to prevent
them from being switched on or off accidentally.
When the panel lights are on, most switch legends
are backlit with a colored light, usually green. This
allows the driver to find the switch more easily in the
dark. When the switch is on, the switch icon is normally backlit with a colored light, usually amber.
Some switch icons are dead-fronted (not visible until
the switch is turned on). When turned on, some
switches are illuminated from within by a red or
amber LED (light-emitting diode).
Control Panels
The left-hand control panel (Fig. 4.2) contains a louvered window outlet for the face vents of the heating,
4.1
Controls
ventilation, and air conditioning system (HVAC), and

four switches arranged in a vertical line, usually the
headlight, panel light increase/decrease, and the
cruise control On/Off and Set/Resume switches.
The HVAC climate control panel is on a separate

panel below the auxiliary dash panel, between the
two cupholders.
Exterior Light Controls

Headlight/Parking Light Switch
2
3
4
1
The headlight/parking light switch (Fig. 4.3) is a

paddle switch located on the left-hand control panel
above the cruise control switches. When the paddle
is lowered, the parking lights illuminate (the front turn
signals, the cab marker and identification lights, and
the taillights). When the paddle is raised, the lowbeam headlights illuminate, along with all the parking
lights. To turn off all lights, return the paddle to the
center position.
5
f610579a
10/15/2001
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Left-Hand Control Panel

Instrumentation Control Unit
Right-Hand Control Panel
Radio Panel
Auxiliary Dash Panel
Fig. 4.2, Switch and Gauge Panels
The instrument cluster (ICU3-M2) is located right behind the steering wheel. No controls are installed on
the standard instrument cluster.
The right-hand control panel (Fig. 4.2) usually contains the transmission push-button shift selector (on
vehicles with automatic or automated transmission)
and the trailer brake lever (hand control valve). On
vehicles with manual transmission, a variety of
switches are installed here. If there is a dashmounted air-restriction indicator, it is often mounted
here.
The radio panel contains two louvered dash outlets
for the face vents of the HVAC, one on either side of
the radio (if installed).
The auxiliary dash panel (Fig. 4.2) below the radio
panel contains the marker interrupt switch, the air
brake valve knobs, the cigarette lighter, and a variety
of switch options.
10/15/2001
f610580
Raise the paddle to illuminate the headlights, low beam.

Lower the paddle to illuminate the parking lights.
Fig. 4.3, Headlight/Parking Light Switch
NOTE: The front turn signal is the amber lens in

each headlight unit. The low-beam headlight is
the top clear lens in each headlight unit.
When the headlights or parking lights are on, the
panel lights also illuminate. An amber light in the
switch backlights either the top icon (for headlights
and parking lights) or the bottom icon (for parking
lights only).
Panel Light Increase/Decrease Switch

When the panel lights are on, they can be either
brightened or dimmed by using the INCR/DECR
rocker switch just below the headlight switch
(Fig. 4.4). To brighten the panel lights, press on the
upper part of the rocker (at the INCR legend). To dim
4.2
Controls
the panel lights, press on the lower part of the rocker

(at the DECR legend).
f610581
05/09/2002
Raise the paddle to flash the marker lights.

10/29/2001
f610598
Fig. 4.4, Panel Light Increase/Decrease Switch
When the panel lights are on, both legends are backlit in green.
Daytime Running Lights

Switching on the ignition and releasing the parking
brakes automatically activates the daytime running
lights, if equipped. The daytime running lights will
operate until the parking brakes are applied or the
headlights are turned on.
Fig. 4.5, Marker Light Interrupt Switch
The low beam headlights must be turned on before

the road lights can be turned on. The road lights will
not illuminate if the high beam headlights are already
on, and switching from low beams to high beams will
switch off the road lights.
To turn the road lights on, press on the upper part of
the rocker (at the road light icon). See Fig. 4.6. To
turn the road lights off, press on the lower part of the
rocker (at the ROAD LAMP legend).
NOTE: Daytime running lights are standard on

all Canadian vehicles.
The daytime running lights illuminate at about twothirds of normal power.
Marker Light Interrupt Switch

The marker light interrupt (MRKR INT) paddle switch
temporarily flashes the marker lights and taillights
(Fig. 4.5). With the vehicle lights on, raise the paddle
to briefly turn off the marker lights and taillights. With
the vehicle lights off, raise the paddle to briefly turn
on the marker lights and taillights.
Turning off the vehicle lights automatically turns off
the marker lights. When the panel lights are on, the
marker light icon and MRKR INT legend are backlit
in green.
Road Light Switch, Optional

The road light (ROAD LAMP) rocker switch operates
the optional road lights, which are recessed into the
front bumper or mounted on the lower edge of a cutout in the center of the front bumper.
4.3
f610582
10/15/2001
Fig. 4.6, Road Light Switch
When the road lights are on, the road light icon is
backlit in amber. When the panel lights are on, the
ROAD LAMP legend is backlit in green.
Utility Light Switch, Optional

The utility light switch operates one of the following
lights or sets of lights:
A single round utility light swivel-mounted in
the center of the cab roof;
Controls
Two round utility lights mounted in fixed posi-
tions on each side of the cab roof;

Two flush-mounted utility lights mounted on the
back of the cab, one on each side.

To turn the utility light(s) on, press in on the upper
part of the utility light (UTLY LAMP) rocker switch
(Fig. 4.7). To turn the utility light(s) off, press on the
lower part of the rocker (at the UTLY LAMP legend).
10/16/2001
f543926
To remove the lens, press in at the mounting tabs

(arrows).
Fig. 4.8, Rear Dome Light
1
f610583
10/15/2001
Fig. 4.7, Utility Light Switch
When the utility lights are on, the diagonal light beam
icon is backlit in red. When the panel lights are on,
the UTLY LAMP legend is backlit in green.
Spotlight, Optional
The spotlight switch is located on the pivoting handle
of the spotlight. There may be a single spotlight assembly mounted on the drivers door, or one on each
door.
Interior Lights and Light Controls
3
10/17/2001
1. Overhead Console
2. Trimplate
f610587
3. Light Assembly
Fig. 4.9, Overhead Console Dome Lights
The interior lights include dome lights, red map

lights, and clear reading lights.
Light Replacement
Rear Dome Light
Dome Lights
To replace the rear dome light (Fig. 4.8), do the following steps:
Diffuse dome lights are installed on all cabs. The

standard dome light has a clear lens and is installed
on the back of the cab above the rear window. See
Fig. 4.8 for the rear dome light.
On cabs with an overhead console, there is an optional overhead dome light assembly containing a
diffuse dome and a clear reading light. See Fig. 4.9
for the optional dome/reading lights on the overhead
console.
1.
Press in on the lens at the four mounting tabs

(arrows).
2.
Replace the bullet-type bulb and install the lens

on the lamp base with the button at the bottom.
Overhead Console Dome/Reading Lights

To replace the overhead console dome/reading lights
(Fig. 4.9), do the following steps:
4.4
Controls
1.
Remove the tapping screws that attach the lamp

assembly and trimplate to the overhead console.
2.
Separate the lamp assembly from the trimplate

and disconnect the wiring harness.
3.
Replace the lamp assembly.
4.
Snap the lamp assembly and trimplate together.
5.
Connect the lamp assembly to the wiring harness.
6.
Insert the tabs on the trimplate into the slots on

the overhead console attachment plate.
7.
Center the lamp assembly in the headliner cutout

and install the center tapping screw.
8.
Install the remaining tapping screws.
Dome Light Switches

In the standard cab, there is one dome light switch in
the drivers door that turns on the diffuse dome light
when the drivers door is opened. In one option, two
switches are installed, so that the diffuse dome light
turns on when either the drivers or passengers door
is opened.
Clear Reading Lights, Optional

Clear reading lights are available as a option. They
are included only in the light assembly installed in
the overhead console, located next to the diffuse
dome light in the same fixture (Fig. 4.9). Like the
dome lights, the reading lights are door-activated.
4
5
1
2
3
11/16/2001
f820386
Press down on the upper part of the rocker to activate

the hazard warning flashers.
1. Washer Button
2. Wiper Control Dial
3. Turn Signal Lever
4. Hazard Flasher (red rocker switch)
5. Multifunction Switch Module
Fig. 4.10, Multifunction Turn Signal Switch
Turn-Signal Controls
The turn signal lever (Fig. 4.11) is mounted on the
steering column. Moving the lever down turns on the
left turn signal lights; moving it up turns on the right
turn signal lights.
Multifunction Turn Signal

Switch
The multifunction turn signal switch is attached to the
steering column, just below the steering wheel, on
the left-hand side. This switch has the following
functions:
The turn signals
The windshield wipers and washers
The headlight high beams
The hazard warning flasher
See Fig. 4.10 for the multifunction switch and its

component parts.
4.5
10/17/2001
f820384
Move the lever down to turn on the left turn signals.

Move the lever up to turn on the right turn signals.
Fig. 4.11, Turn Signal Controls
When one of the turn-signal lights is on, a green indicator arrow flashes at the far left or far right of the
warning and indicator light panel.
Controls
The lever automatically returns to the neutral position

(self-cancels the switch) when the steering wheel
returns to the straight ahead position after a turn. To
cancel the signal manually, move the lever to the
neutral position.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls
the control dial clockwise as far as it will go (to the

OFF setting) turns the wipers off.
The washers are operated by a yellow button at the
very end of the turn signal lever. To operate the
washers, press the button in and hold it in until you
want the washers to stop.
Headlight High Beams
CAUTION
Do not move the wiper arms manually. Wiper
motor damage will occur if the arms are moved.
The wipers are operated by a rotary switch in the
wiper control dial, which is on the end of the turn signal lever. See Fig. 4.12. There are five delay settings, marked on the dial by lines of increasing
length, and two steady speed settings, LO and HI.
Push the turn signal lever forward, towards the windshield, to turn on the high-beam headlights. Pull the
turn signal lever back to its original position to turn
them off. See Fig. 4.13.
2
2
4
10/17/2001
5
f820383
10/29/2001
Rotate the control dial away from you to turn the wipers
on, or speed them up.
Rotate the control dial towards you to slow the wipers
down, or turn them off.
1. Washer Button
2. OFF Position
3. Delay Positions
4. Wipers On, Low Speed
5. Wipers On, High Speed
Fig. 4.12, Wiper/Washer Controls
Rotating the control dial forward (in a counterclockwise direction) turns the wipers on. If they are already on, rotating the handle further forward (to a
faster speed setting) increases the speed of the wipers through the various delay settings, and to LO and
then HI.
f820385
Move the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.
Move the lever back to its original position to turn them
off.
Move the lever towards you to flash the high beams
momentarily.
2. Boot
Fig. 4.13, Headlight High Beams
When the high beam headlights are on, a blue light

illuminates on the instrument cluster between the tachometer and speedometer. For vehicles built to operate in the United States, switching on the high
beams will switch off the road lights.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be on for the

high beams to work.
With the headlight low beams on, pull the lever backward, towards the steering wheel, to flash the high
beams (turn them on momentarily).
Rotating the control dial in the opposite direction

(clockwise) causes the wipers to slow down. Rotating
4.6
Controls
The headlight low beams remain on continuously

during high beam operation. If the low beam headlights are turned off by use of the headlight switch,
the high beams turn off also.
The air horn is controlled by a wire lanyard hanging

down just inboard on the drivers door. See Fig. 4.15.
Pull downward on the lanyard to sound the air horn.
Hazard Warning Flasher

The hazard warning light flasher (Fig. 4.10) is a red
rocker switch located on the top of the multifunction
switch module. When the flashers are activated, all
of the turn signal lights (front, side, and rear) and the
two green indicator arrows on the control panel will
blink on and off.
To flash the hazard warning lights, press down on
the upper part of the rocker (towards the dash). To
stop the hazard warning lights, press down on the
lower part of the rocker (towards the steering wheel).
10/17/2001
f610592
To sound the air horn, pull down on the lanyard (arrow).
Horn Controls
NOTE: It is possible to have both the electric
and the air horn installed on one vehicle.
Electric Horn
A single electric horn is standard. Dual electric horns
are available as an option.
The button for the electric horn is located in the center of the steering wheel. To sound the horn, press
down on the button. See Fig. 4.14.
Fig. 4.15, Air Horn Control
Powertrain Controls
After-Treatment System (ATS)
Request/Inhibit Regen Switch
A parked regen of the ATS can be initiated with the
request/inhibit regen switch. It may also be used to
inhibit the vehicle from performing an automatic
regen. See Fig. 4.16.
The style and function of switch will vary with the engine make and model. See the engine operation
manual for operation details.
To sound the electric horn, press down on the horn

button.
1. Horn Button
Fig. 4.14, Electric Horn Control
Air Horn, Optional

Single and dual air horns are available as options.
4.7
RGEN
f461918
10/17/2001
03/09/2012
Fig. 4.16, Request/Inhibit Regen Switch
f610848
Controls
Cruise Control Switches
CAUTION
Do not attempt to shift gears without using the
clutch pedal when the cruise control is engaged.
Failure to follow this precaution will result in a
temporarily uncontrolled increase in engine
speed; transmission damage and gear stripping
could result.
On standard models, cruise control is activated by

two dash switches. See Fig. 4.17. On some models,
cruise control can be activated by a button on the
transmission shift knob.
The On/Off Switchthis two-position rocker
switch bears the legend SPD CNTL on the

lower half of the switch. When cruise control is
on, an amber light illuminates in the top part of
the switch.
The Set/Resume Switchthis three-position
paddle switch bears the legend RES/ACC

above the paddle and SET/CST below the
paddle.
NOTE: For more information about cruise control operation, see Chapter 7.
Engine Brake Switch, Optional
f610510
09/13/2001
To turn cruise control on, press the upper half of the On/
Off (rocker) switch. To turn cruise control off, press the
lower half of the On/Off (rocker) switch.
1. Cruise Control On/Off (rocker) Switch
2. Cruise Control Set/Resume (paddle) Switch
Fig. 4.17, Cruise Control Switches, Dash-Mounted
The engine brake switch controls the degree of engine braking. Normally there are two paddle
switches, a two-position On/Off Switch to activate the
engine brake, and a two-position HI-LO Switch to
control the amount of engine braking.
To turn the two-position On/Off Switch on, raise the
paddle. When the two-position switch is on, an
amber LED (light-emitting diode) illuminates inside
the switch.
To turn the two-position HI-LO Switch on high, raise
the paddle (at the HI-LO icon). To turn the twoposition HI-LO Switch on low, lower the paddle (at
the ENG BRK legend). See Fig. 4.18.
A three-position switch is used on MBE900 engines
equipped with both the regular engine brake and the
constant-throttle (decompression) brake. It works the
same as the two-position HI-LO switch, except that
there is a third (off) position when the switch is left at
its normal position.
f610588
10/17/2001
1. On/Off Switch
2. HI-LO Switch
Fig. 4.18, Engine Brake Switches
The engine brake turns off automatically or when the

clutch pedal is pressed. On vehicles without a clutch
pedal, the brake pedal can be used to deactivate the
engine brake. For more information about engine
brake operation, see Chapter 7.
When the panel lights are on, the HI-LO icon is backlit in amber on the HI-LO switch. On both switches,
4.8
Controls
the ENG BRK legend is backlit in green when the

panel lights are on.
Exhaust Brake Switch, Optional

The optional exhaust brake is controlled by a dashmounted rocker switch to help slow the vehicle when
the accelerator is released. See Chapter 7 under the
heading "Exhaust Braking System, Optional" for additional information.
To turn the exhaust brake on, press on the upper
part of the rocker (at the light inside the switch). The
exhaust brake turns off automatically. See Fig. 4.19
or Fig. 4.20.
Engine Fan Switch, Optional

The engine cooling fan can be turned on by the engine fan switch (ENG FAN legend). The fan will continue to operate for a set amount of time and then
turn off unless the coolant temperature is high
enough to continue the fan operation.
To turn the engine fan on, press on the upper part of
the rocker (at the fan icon). See Fig. 4.21.
When the engine fan is running, the fan blade icon is
backlit in amber. When the panel lights are on, the
ENG FAN legend is backlit in green.
f610590
01/04/2011
11/28/2001
f610589
Fig. 4.19, Exhaust Brake Switch
Fig. 4.21, Engine Fan Switch
Transmission Controls
If so equipped, the transmission range control valve
and splitter valve are attached to the gearshift knob.
Transmission shift pattern labels are located inside
the cab. See Chapter 8 for complete transmission
operating instructions.
On vehicles with standard Allison On-Highway Series
automatic transmission, the shift selector is leveractivated. The display mounted on the steering column provides four forward ranges and one reverse
range. See Fig. 4.22.
03/31/2009
f610589a
When the exhaust brake switch is on, an amber LED

illuminates inside the switch. When the panel lights
are on, the EXHST BRK legend is backlit in green.
When the transmission is in D (drive), the vehicle will

operate in the overdrive (5th) gear. To shift down into
the direct drive (4th) gear, use the overdrive lockout
switch (O/D legend). See Fig. 4.23. The transmission
will shift into 4th gear and remain in that gear unless
a range inhibitor is active, such as engine overspeed.
See Chapter 8 for more information about range
inhibitors.
To shift to fourth gear, press on the upper part of the
rocker (at the LED). The LED will come on and stay
4.9
Controls
Axle Switches
1
All axle switches contain a red LED (light-emitting

diode) that illuminates the switch from within when
the switch is turned on (the upper part of the rocker
is pressed). The legend under the LED, if any, is not
visible until the switch is turned on.
IMPORTANT: A guard is positioned around all

axle switches to prevent unintentional activation.
NOTE: For more information on axle switch
function, see Chapter 8.
Differential Lock Switch
CAUTION
01/22/2003
f270119
1. All Series, Standard (without park)

2. 1000/2400 Series, Optional (with park)
3. 2000 Series, Optional (with auto-apply parking
brake)
Fig. 4.22, Steering Column-Mounted Shift Controls
Differential lock should only be engaged when

the vehicle is stopped or moving slowly at low
throttle. This will prevent internal axle damage.
The differential lock switch is a two-position guarded
rocker switch. See Fig. 4.24. It causes the wheels on
each axle governed by the switch to rotate together.
It is also known as side-to-side wheel lock.
10/26/2001
f610638
01/22/2003
Fig. 4.23, Overdrive Lockout Switch
illuminated until the bottom part of the rocker switch

is pressed.
On vehicles with Allison MD Series automatic transmission or Eaton Autoshift automated transmission, a
push-button shift selector provides four, five, or six
forward ranges and one reverse range. See Chapter 8 for more information about the push-button shift
selector.
f610596
Fig. 4.24, Differential Lock Switch
To lock the wheels together, press the upper half of

the rocker momentarily (at the LED). To turn off differential lock, press the upper half of the rocker
again.
When the panel lights are on, the double-axle icon is
backlit in green.
IMPORTANT: The differential lock switch is

guarded to prevent unintentional switch activation. If the LED in the switch begins to blink during normal operation, when the switch has not
been activated, this indicates an error condition.
4.10
Controls
Bring the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner

service facility as soon as possible.
The axle shift switch is a two-position guarded rocker

switch installed on vehicles with two-speed axles.
See Fig. 4.26.
Interaxle Lock Switch
CAUTION
The interaxle lock should not be engaged on a
vehicle with obviously spinning wheels. Engagement at high speed or power can damage the
axle(s).
The interaxle lock switch is a two-position guarded
rocker switch installed on vehicles with dual drive
axles. See Fig. 4.25. It causes both axle shafts to
rotate together.
10/26/2001
f610594
Fig. 4.26, Axle Shift Switch
To shift the axle from low speed to high speed, press

the upper half of the rocker momentarily (at the
LED). To turn the axle shift off (switch from high
speed back to low speed), press the upper half of
the rocker again.
10/26/2001
f610595
Fig. 4.25, Interaxle Lock Switch
To lock the axles together, press the upper half of the

rocker momentarily (at the LED). To turn off interaxle
lock, press the upper half of the rocker again.
When the panel lights are on, the double-axle icon is
backlit in green.
IMPORTANT: The interaxle lock rocker switch is

guarded to prevent unintentional switch activation. This switch does not have a diagnostic
blink function when inactive.
Axle Shift Switch
CAUTION
To prevent transmission and axle damage, make
sure the automatic transmission is in high range
when performing an axle shift with the vehicle
moving.
4.11
NOTE: On vehicles with tandem drive axles,

there is an interlock that prevents a 2-speed
axle from shifting whenever the interaxle lock is
on.
When the panel lights are on, the AXLE SHIFT legend is backlit in green.
IMPORTANT: The axle shift switch is guarded to

prevent unintentional switch activation. If the
LED in the switch begins to blink during normal
operation, when the switch has not been activated, this indicates an error condition. Bring the
vehicle to an authorized Freightliner service facility as soon as possible.
All-Wheel-Drive Controls,
Optional
All-wheel-drive (AWD) allows the driver to direct
driveline power to all four axles, front and rear. Two
switches are used to control AWD: an AWD operation
switch used to activate all-wheel-drive, and an AWD
range switch used to select the high or low range.
AWD controls are not multiplexed.
Controls
AWD Operation Switch

The AWD operation switch is a two-position rocker
switch with a light-emitting diode (LED) that illuminates when AWD is engaged. The legend LOCKED
is underneath the LED on the upper half of the
switch. On the lower half is the legend AWD. See
Fig. 4.27. When the panel lights are on, the AWD
legend is backlit in green.
at the upper end and HIGH RANGE at the lower

end. On vehicles with a power take-off unit (PTO),
the three-position switch has a neutral (N-TRL) position in the middle. See Fig. 4.28. When the panel
lights are on, the HIGH RANGE legend is backlit in
green.
1
LOCKED
LO
RANGE
LO
NTRL
HIGH
RANGE
HIGH
RANGE
AWD
07/21/2006
08/10/2006
f610807
Fig. 4.27, AWD Operation Switch
To engage AWD, press the upper half of the rocker

switch. The LED illuminates to indicate that AWD is
engaged. To turn off AWD, press the lower half of the
switch. The LED goes out to indicate the AWD is no
longer engaged.
f610808
1. Two-Position Switch
2. Three-Position Switch
Fig. 4.28, AWD Range Switches
Two-Position Switch (no PTO)
When AWD is engaged, the LOCKED legend is

backlit in red. In addition, a red indicator with the legend T-CASE ENGAGED displays on the dash message center.
On vehicles without a PTO, high range is considered

standard operation. To activate the low range, press
the upper half of the switch. When the low range is
activated, the LO RANGE legend is backlit in red. In
addition, a red indicator with the legend T-CASE LO
RNG displays on the dash message center. To
switch back to HIGH RANGE, press the lower half of
the switch.
AWD Range Switch
Three-Position Switch (with PTO)
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the transfer case and the
driveline, stop the vehicle and apply the parking
brake before using the range switch.
The AWD range switch is used under similar conditions to those of the axle shift switch on a two-speed
rear axle. Use the high range when driving at normal
speeds under off-road conditions, or on non-paved
surfaces. Use the low range when extra traction is
needed at lower speeds; for example, under conditions of mud, snow, or ice. This switch should be
used only when AWD has been engaged.
In most cases, the AWD range switch is a twoposition rocker switch with the legends LO RANGE
IMPORTANT: Always use the N-TRL switch position when operating the PTO.
On vehicles with a PTO, neutral is considered standard operation (switch in the middle position). An
amber indicator with the legend T-CASE NTRL displays on the dash message center.
To activate the high range, press the lower half of the
switch. No indicator displays on the dash message
center with the high range activated. Press the upper
half to return to N-TRL.
To activate the low range, press the upper half of the
switch. A red indicator with the legend T-CASE LO
RNG displays on the dash message center. On the
switch, the LO N-TRL legend is backlit in red. Press
4.12
Controls
the lower half to return to N-TRL, and then press the

lower half again to select HIGH RANGE.
Braking
Parking Brake Control Valve
The yellow diamond-shaped knob (Fig. 4.29) on the
auxiliary dash panel operates the parking brake control valve (park brake switch). Pulling the yellow knob
applies the tractor parking brakes (spring brakes).
Pushing in the knob releases the tractor parking
brakes. Before the parking brakes can be released,
the air pressure in either air brake system must be at
least 65 psi (448 kPa).
Trailer Brake Lever

The trailer brake lever (hand control valve) is used
for applying the trailer brakes without applying the
truck or tractor brakes. It is usually mounted on the
right-hand control panel. See Fig. 4.30. See Chapter 9 under the heading "Dual Air Brake System" for
operating instructions.
f610591
10/17/2001
Fig. 4.30, Trailer Brake Lever

f610291
03/10/99
1. Trailer Air Supply Valve (red knob)

2. Parking Brake Control Valve (yellow knob)
Fig. 4.29, Brake Valve Control Knobs
See Chapter 9 under the heading "Dual Air Brake

System" for further information about the parking
brake control valve.
Trailer Air Supply Valve

The red octagonal-shaped knob (Fig. 4.29) on the
auxiliary dash panel operates the trailer air supply
valve. After the vehicle and its air hoses are connected to a trailer, and the pressure in the air system
is at least 65 psi (448 kPa), the red knob must be
pushed in (and should stay in) to charge the trailer
air supply system and release the trailer spring parking brakes. Before disconnecting a trailer or when
operating a vehicle without a trailer, the red knob
must be pulled out.
See Chapter 9 under the heading "Dual Air Brake
System" for further information about the trailer air
supply valve.
4.13
Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking

System (ABS)
The Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking System (ABS)
has an amber tractor indicator light (TRACTOR ABS
legend) and, if equipped with automatic traction control (ATC), an amber wheel spin indicator light
(WHEEL SPIN legend). See Fig. 4.31.
On vehicles equipped with a compatible trailer, there
is also an amber trailer indicator light (TRAILER ABS
legend).
See the brake system operating instructions in Chapter 9 for more information about ABS.
Adjustable Steering Column

To tilt the steering column, press down on the foot
pedal located below the steering column. Tilt the
steering column up or down to the desired position.
Release the foot pedal to lock the steering column in
place. See Fig. 4.32.
To telescope the steering column, press down on the
foot pedal located below the steering column. Pull
the steering wheel closer to you or push the steering
Controls
2
1
3
5
10/12/2000
f610454
1. Tractor ABS Indicator

2. Wheel Spin Indicator
(optional)
3. Trailer ABS Indicator
Fig. 4.31, ABS Indicator Lights
wheel farther away from you. Release the foot pedal

to lock the steering column in place.
Other Dash-Mounted Controls

Windshield-Fan Switches, Optional
Ceiling-mounted defogger fans are operated by
LOW/OFF/HIGH toggle switches located in the base
of the fan.
Cigarette Lighter
Push in the lighter to heat the element. The lighter
will stay in and will automatically pop out when the
element is hot.
CB Radio Connections
An antenna connection and positive (+) and negative
() power connections are provided for a CB radio.
Suspension Dump Switch
NOTICE
Do not operate the vehicle over uneven ground
such as ramps, speed bumps, curbs, etc. with
the air springs deflated. Doing this may lead to
air bag separation from the piston, preventing the
suspension air springs from reinflating.
07/19/2006
f610799
1. Multifunction Turn
Signal Switch
2. Headlight Switch
3. Ignition Switch
4. Adjustable Steering
Column foot Pedal
5. Steering Wheel
Fig. 4.32, Adjustable Steering Column
NOTICE
Never exhaust air from the suspension while
driving. When the air is exhausted, the suspension will not absorb road shocks, and components may be damaged.
The suspension dump switch is a two-position
guarded rocker switch (Fig. 4.33). It allows the air in
the vehicle air suspension to be quickly exhausted,
lowering the rear of the vehicle. This makes it easier
to connect to, or disconnect from, a trailer.
To lower the rear of the vehicle quickly, press the
upper half of the rocker momentarily (at the LED). To
4.14
Controls
will also autofill if the vehicle is operated with the

suspension dumped, and the speed is over 5 mph
(e.g. -- driver forgot to inflate the bags or there was a
system failure).
Suspension Autofill Override Valve
10/26/2001
f610597
Fig. 4.33, Suspension Dump Switch
raise the suspension to its normal height, press the

upper half of the rocker again.
The suspension autofill override option is a dash air

valve, that keeps the suspension deflated when the
ignition is turned off. To operate it, turn off the ignition
then push the override valve knob. See Fig. 4.34.
When the ignition is turned on, the override valve will
release automatically, and the suspension will autofill.
The suspension dump switch will then operate normally as described previously.
When the panel lights are on, the tractor icon is

backlit in green.
IMPORTANT: The suspension dump switch is

SH TO
PU
When the suspension dump switch is pressed, three

responses are possible: a normal response, a slow
response, and an abnormal response.
Normal Response: The LED in the switch blinks

while the suspension is deflating or filling. When it is
completely deflated, the LED comes on steady and
stays illuminated. In normal operation, the suspension may dump or fill so quickly that the blinking of
the switch is barely noticeable.
If operation of the switch is not possible for any reason (vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph, ignition is
turned off, etc.), the LED will stop blinking and turn
off.
Slow Response: If operation of the switch is slowed

for any reason (by cold weather, low air pressure,
etc.), the switch will continue to blink until the suspension completes a dump or fill. As in the normal
response, the LED comes on steady and stays illuminated when the suspension if fully deflated.
Abnormal Response: If the LED blinks for more than
10 seconds, the suspension dump mechanism may
not be operating properly. Bring the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner service facility for testing.
If the ignition is turned off while the vehicle is in
dump mode, the power to the dump solenoid is cut
off to prevent battery drain, and the suspension system will autofill the rear air springs. The suspension
4.15
09/11/2007
f321102
Fig. 4.34, Suspension Autofill Override Valve
Heater/Air Conditioner Control

Panel
Standard controls (Fig. 4.35) for the heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning system (HVAC) consist of
an eight-speed fan switch, an air selection switch,
and a temperature control switch. On vehicles with
air conditioning, the panel also contains a telltale
LED and an air recirculation button. See Chapter 6
for detailed operating instructions for the HVAC.
Seat Controls
Bench Seat Adjustment Controls
The standard bench seat has one control: the seat
slide lever. See Fig. 4.36. The two-person bench
Controls
seat to prevent damage to the seat and the cab interior.
All adjustment controls for a suspension seat are located on the seat base. See Chapter 5 for complete
instructions.
2
3
1
0
10/03/2001
f831452
1. Fan Switch
2. Air Selection Switch
3. Temperature Control Switch
Fig. 4.35, HVAC Climate Control Panel, Standard
seat and the non-suspended passenger seat have

no controls.
2
10/05/2001
f910481
1. Three-Person Seat
2. Seat Slide Lever
Fig. 4.36, Full Bench Seat
Suspension Seat Adjustment Controls

All controls for adjusting air suspension seats are
located within easy reach of the occupant.
Due to the maximum adjustability of mid- and highback air suspension seats, it is possible to combine
the seat back recline adjustment and the seat slide
adjustment so that the seat back contacts the backwall. It is the responsibility of the driver to adjust the
4.16
5
Cab Features
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Air Bag, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Cab Features
Windows
Mirrors
Standard windows operate mechanically using a

hand crank.
The standard outside mirrors are mounted on the

door frame. There is a primary rear view mirror and a
convex mirror.
Power windows are optional, and can be installed on

one side or both sides. One power window switch
(window icon) will be installed on the dash for each
window. See Fig. 5.1. If your vehicle is equipped with
power windows, press up to raise the window; press
down to lower the window. Releasing the switch
causes the window to stop.
Mirror Heat Switch, Optional

One or both outside door mirrors can be heated to
keep them clear of fog, frost, and ice.
To heat the mirrors, press the upper part of the mirror heat switch (MIRR HEAT) on the dash. See
Fig. 5.3. When the mirror heat switch is on, an
amber indicator light illuminates inside the switch.
MIRR
HEAT
10/09/2001
f610522
Press up to raise the window; press down to lower the

window. Releasing the switch causes the window to stop.
Fig. 5.1, Power Window Switch
Standard vent (wing) windows do not open. Operating vent windows are optional. To open the operating
vent window, turn the latch on the window and push
the window open. See Fig. 5.2.
10/09/2001
f610524
To heat the mirrors, press up; press down to turn off the
heat.
Fig. 5.3, Mirror Heat Switch
The mirror heat switch is a smart switch (fully multiplexed).
Power Mirrors, Optional

The main outside mirrors, if heated, can be equipped
with an electrical remote control located on the drivers door. See Fig. 5.4.
To select the mirrors on the left-hand side, press the
left side of the mirror select switch. To select the mirrors on the right-hand side, press the right side of the
mirror select switch.
The keypad has four arrow keys, pointing up, down,

left, and right. To adjust the mirror position, press the
keypad in the direction you want the mirror to move.
2
f670096
10/05/2001
1. Latch
2. Vent Window
Fig. 5.2, Operating Vent Window (optional)
5.1
Down View Mirror, Optional

A down view mirror can be installed on the top of the
passenger door frame to allow the driver a view of
Cab Features
the area adjacent to the right side of the cab. See

Fig. 5.5.
Unless otherwise noted, all seat adjustments should

be made while seated and before the engine is
started.
Due to the high degree of adjustability found in highback air suspension seats, it is possible to set the
seat back recline adjustment and the seat slide adjustment in such a combination that the seat back
will come into contact with the rear wall of the cab. It
is the responsibility of the driver to adjust the seat to
prevent damage to the seat and the cab interior.
The following is a description of adjustments that are

available on one or more seats. Not all seats have all
of the adjustments listed below.
10/05/2001
f610523
1.
To adjust the mirror position, press the keypad on the

door in the direction you want the mirror to move.
1. Mirror Select Switch
Seat Slide (fore-and-aft): When this adjustment is

made, the entire seat moves forward or backward on its track (Fig. 5.6).
2. Keypad
Fig. 5.4, Power Mirror Switch Pad
1
f720396
10/05/2001
10/05/2001
f910482
A. Seat Slide (fore-and-aft) Adjustment

B. Isolator Feature
1. Mirror
Fig. 5.5, Down View Mirror (optional)
Seats
Fig. 5.6, Seat Slide Adjustment and Isolator Feature
2.
Isolator: This feature (also referred to as backslap isolator or Chugger-Snubber) reduces the
amount of road shock by isolating the occupant
from the motion of the vehicle, and allowing the
upper seat to move in a simple pendulum motion. Whenever the isolator is not desired, it can
be locked out (Fig. 5.6).
3.
Lumbar Support: Lumbar support changes the

shape of the seat back to give more or less support to the occupants lumbar (lower back) area.
General Information
WARNING
Keep hands, tools, and other objects away from
the scissor points under the seats. Failure to do
so could cause personal injury.
5.2
Cab Features
This adjustment is either mechanical or air controlled, depending on make and model of the
seat (Fig. 5.7).
B
A
B
10/05/2001
f910484
A. Backrest Tilt
B. Seat Cushion Tilt
Fig. 5.8, Cushion Tilt Adjustments

10/05/2001
A. Lumbar Support
f910483
B. Headrest Adjustment
Fig. 5.7, Lumbar Support and Headrest Adjustment
4.
Headrest: When this adjustment is made, the

upper part of the backrest (back cushion)
changes angle to provide head and upper back
support (Fig. 5.7).
5.
Backrest Tilt: This adjustment pivots the backrest

forward or backward (Fig. 5.8).
6.
Seat Cushion Tilt: This adjustment raises or lowers the front and/or back of the seat (bottom)
cushion. This adjustment is easier to perform
when all weight is removed from the seat
(Fig. 5.8).
7.
Seat Tilt: When this adjustment is made, the seat

assembly, both backrest and seat cushion, tilts
forward or backward (Fig. 5.8).
8.
9.
5.3
10/05/2001
Ride Height Adjustment: The entire seat moves

up or down when adjusting the ride height. The
adjustment is either manual or air controlled, depending on the make and model of the seat
(Fig. 5.9).
Damper: When you sit on the seat, a leveling
valve places you in the center of the ride zone.
When the damper is adjusted properly under nor-
f910485
A. Ride Height
Fig. 5.9, Ride Height Adjustment
mal driving conditions, the seat should not top or

bottom against the limits of the vertical travel.
10. Ride Firmness: A firmer ride gives a better feel
for the road but less protection against unevenness in the road surface. A softer ride smooths
out the bumps.
Cab Features
Bench Seats
The three-person full bench seat is standard. See
Fig. 5.10.
1
1
6
4
5
10/10/96
2
10/05/2001
f910481
1. Three-Person Seat
2. Seat Slide Lever
Fig. 5.10, Full Bench Seat
The full bench seat has a seat slide adjustment to

allow more or less leg room for the driver and passengers. Release the seat slide lever and push backwards or forwards to move the seat along its track.
High-back air suspension seats are optional for both
drivers and passengers seats. Also available are a
non-suspended passengers seat, and a two-person
bench seat with a safe or tool box located under the
seat.
No adjustments are possible on the two-person
bench seat or the non-suspended passenger seat.
Bostrom Seat
Seat Slide Adjustment
Move the seat slide and isolator lever (Fig. 5.11) to
the left and hold it there to slide the seat forward or
backward to the desired position.
Isolator
To engage the isolator, put the seat slide and isolator
lever in the center position. Lock out the isolator by
moving the lever to the right.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2
3
f910131
Backrest Tilt Lever

Air Lumbar Support Control Valve (optional)
Damper Adjustment Switch
Height Adjustment Switch
Seat Cushion Tilt Knob
Seat Slide and Isolator Lever
Lumbar Support Knob (standard)
Fig. 5.11, Bostrom Seat
Lumbar Support
To increase lumbar support, rotate the lumbar support knob forward. To decrease lumbar support, rotate the knob rearward.
On seats equipped with air lumbar support, press the
control valve upward to increase lumbar support.
Press the control valve downward to decrease lumbar support.
Seat Cushion Tilt

Rotate the seat cushion tilt knob to increase or decrease seat cushion tilt.
Backrest Tilt
To tilt the backrest, lean forward slightly to remove
pressure from the cushion and hold the backrest tilt
lever rearward. Lean backward slowly to the desired
position and release the lever to lock the backrest in
place.
5.4
Cab Features
Ride Height and Damper Adjustment
Lumbar Support
To raise the seat, press the upper portion of the

height adjustment switch. To lower the seat, press
the lower portion of the switch.
To adjust the lumbar support, use the lumbar support

switch on the side of the seat to give more or less
support to your lower back.
Press the damper adjustment switch to adjust the

damper.
Backrest Tilt
National 2000 Series Seat
To tilt the backrest, turn the backrest tilt knob until

the desired position is reached.
Seat Cushion Adjustment
Move the seat slide lever (Fig. 5.12) to the left and
hold it there to slide the seat forward or backward to
the desired position. Move the lever back to its original position to lock the seat in place.
To adjust the height of the front of the seat cushion,

lift the front cushion height adjustment handle, and
pull forward or push back to the desired setting.
To adjust the height of the rear of the seat cushion,
remove your weight from the seat and turn the rear
cushion adjustment knob to one of three positions.
Ride Height Adjustment

To raise or lower the height of the seat, use the
height adjustment switch on the side of the seat.
7
Sears Seat
f910445
11/14/2000
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Push the seat slide (fore-and-aft adjustment) lever

(Fig. 5.13) all the way to the left and slide the seat
forward or backward, as desired. Release the lever
to lock the seat in the desired position.
Backrest Tilt Knob

Lumbar Support Switch
Height Adjustment Switch
Seat Slide Lever
Front Cushion Height Adjustment Handle
Isolator Handle
Rear Cushion Adjustment Knob
Fig. 5.12, National 2000 Series Seat

10/08/2001
Isolator
To use the isolator feature, turn the isolator handle to
the horizontal position. Turn the isolator handle down
to lock out the isolator.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
f910487
Seat Slide Lever

Seat Cushion Tilt Adjustment
Ride Height Knob
Lumbar Support Lever
Backrest Lever
Fig. 5.13, Sears Low Profile Seat
5.5
Cab Features
Isolator
To engage the isolator (if installed), move the seat
slide and isolator lever (Fig. 5.14) all the way to the
right. To lock out the isolator, move the isolator lever
to the center position.
1
10/08/2001
f910488
1. Ride Height Switch

2. Air Lumbar Support Switch
Fig. 5.15, Air Controls, Sears Seat
2
4
Seat Cushion Tilt

5
Backrest Adjustment
7
10/09/2001
To raise the seat cushion, lift upward on the front of

the seat cushion, and then push it rearwards. To
lower the seat cushion, pull forward on the front of
the seat cushion, and then push downwards.
f910486
NOTE: Armrests are optional.

1. Lumbar Support Lever
2. Backrest Lever
3. Ride Height Knob
4. Shock Absorber Bracket (ride firmness)
5. Pin (ride firmness)
6. Snap Ring (ride firmness)
7. Seat Slide and Isolator Lever
8. Seat Cushion Adjustment
Fig. 5.14, Sears Fleetmaster Seat (with isolator)
Lumbar Support
Move the three-position lumbar support lever upward
to increase lumbar support (firmer). Move the lever
downward to decrease lumbar support (less firm).
NOTE: This three-position lever (see inset) does

not rotate a full 360 degrees.
For seats with air support, use the aft rocker switch
on the control panel on the left-hand side of the seat
(Fig. 5.15). Press up to make the seat firmer; press
down to make the seat less firm.
To adjust the backrest, push downwards on the backrest lever just below the bottom of the backrest cushion. With the lever down, lean forward or backward
to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the
backrest in place.
Ride Height Adjustment

Push the ride height knob inwards to inflate the air
cylinder, raising the height of the seat. Pull the ride
height knob outwards to deflate the air cylinder, lowering the height of the seat.
For seats with air support, use the forward rocker
switch on the control panel on the left-hand side of
the seat (Fig. 5.15). Press up to raise the seat; press
down to lower the seat.
Ride Firmness Adjustment

For a softer ride, remove the snap ring and pin from
the shock absorber bracket (see inset). Relocate the
pin in the other set of holes in the bracket and secure it with the snap ring.
5.6
Cab Features
Seat Belts and Tether Belts
Seat Belt Inspection
General Information
Seat belt assemblies are designed to secure persons
in the vehicle to help reduce the chance of injury or
the amount of injury resulting from accidents or sudden stops. For this reason, Daimler Trucks North
America LLC urges that the driver and all passengers, regardless of age or physical condition, use
seat belts when riding in the vehicle.
WARNING
Always use the vehicles seat belt system when
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so can result
in severe personal injury or death.
Seat belt assemblies in Daimler Trucks North
America (DTNA) vehicles meet Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 209, "Type 1" and "Type 2" requirements.
When transporting a child, always use a child restraint system or the vehicle seat belts as appropriate. To determine whether a child restraint system is
required, review and comply with applicable state
and local laws. Any child restraint used must comply
with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213,
"Child Restraint Systems." When providing a child
restraint system, always carefully read and follow all
instructions pertaining to installation and usage for
the child. Make certain the child remains in the restraint system at all times when the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an
accident, and the seat belt system was in use,
the entire vehicle seat belt system must be replaced before operating the vehicle. Do not attempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
could change the effectiveness of the system.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
making any modifications to the system, may result in personal injury or death.
Inspect the seat belts and tether belts (if so
equipped).
1.
Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme dirt and

dust, or for severe fading from exposure to sunlight, especially near the buckle latch plate and in
the D-loop guide area.
2.
Check operation of the buckle, latch, Komfort

Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch (if equipped), web
retractor, and upper seat belt mount on the door
pillar. Check all visible components for wear or
damage.
3.
Check the seat belt and tether belt connection

points and tighten any that are loose.
Seat Belt Operation
In addition to seat belt assemblies, tether belts are

installed on suspension-type seats. Tether belts help
secure the seat to the floor and are intended to restrain the seat and seat belt in case of an accident or
sudden stop.
Three-Point Seat Belt With Komfort Latch

or Sliding Komfort Latch
IMPORTANT: Seat belts have a finite life which

may be much shorter than the life of the vehicle.
Regular inspections and replacement as needed
are the only assurance of adequate seat belt
security over the life of the vehicle.
Wear three-point seat belts only as described

below. Three-point seat belts are designed to be
worn by one person at a time. In case of an accident or sudden stop, personal injury or death
could result from misuse.
WARNING
Fasten the seat belts before driving. Fastening a

three-point seat belt while driving creates a hazard.
When engaged and used properly, the Komfort Latch
(Fig. 5.16) and the Sliding Komfort Latch (Fig. 5.17)
5.7
Cab Features
lap (from outboard to inboard) far enough to engage the buckle. If the retractor locks too soon,
allow the belt to retract slightly, then slowly pull it
out again.
introduce a small amount of slack into the seat belt,

resulting in a more comfortable ride.
2.
03/11/2010
f910620
A. Disengaged
B. Engaged
11/18/2010
f910004a
01/18/95
Fig. 5.16, Komfort Latch
Fig. 5.18, Fastening the Three-Point Belt
f910621a
Fig. 5.17, Sliding Komfort Latch
1.
Fasten the three-point seat belt by pushing the

latch into the buckle. Listen for an audible click.
See Fig. 5.18.
Slowly pull the latch end of the three-point seat

belt out of the retractor and pull it across your
3.
Tug on the seat belt to make sure it is securely

fastened. If the buckle unlatches, repeat this
step. If the problem continues, replace the threepoint seat belt.
4.
Snug the seat belt to your waist.
5.
Position the shoulder strap diagonally across

your chest with the adjustable D-loop bracket (if
equipped). If desired, engage the Komfort Latch
or Sliding Komfort Latch as follows.
If equipped with a Sliding Komfort Latch, make

sure that the shoulder strap is snug against your
chest. Without loosening the shoulder strap,
push the Sliding Komfort Latch switch to the
"ON" position. See Fig. 5.17. To activate the
latch lean forward until you hear a click. This will
allow for approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm) of slack
between your chest and the shoulder harness.
Once engaged, the latch will allow you to lean
forward about 5 inches (13 cm) without having to
reset the latch. Leaning forward more than 5
inches (13 cm) will disengage the Sliding Komfort Latch, requiring it to be reset.
5.8
Cab Features
If equipped with a Komfort Latch, pull on the

shoulder strap to lessen the pressure of the strap
on your shoulder and chest. Allow no more than
1 inch (2.5 cm) of slack between your chest and
the shoulder harness. More slack can significantly reduce the seat belt effectiveness in an
accident or a sudden stop. While holding the belt
slack, press the Komfort Latch lever up, clamping the seat belt webbing (Fig. 5.19 and
Fig. 5.20).
belt to release the Sliding Komfort Latch, or

press the Sliding Komfort latch to the "OFF" position, then unbuckle the seat belt.
If equipped with a Komfort Latch, unbuckle the

seat belt, then release the Komfort Latch by giving the shoulder belt a quick tug. If you lean forward against the shoulder belt, the Komfort Latch
will automatically release, and will need to be
reset.
NOTE: Neither the Komfort Latch nor the Sliding

Komfort Latch need to be manually released in
an emergency situation. Each will release by
itself under rough road or other abnormal conditions. Make sure the three-point seat belt is
completely retracted when it is not in use.
Air Bag, Optional

Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with a
drivers air bag supplemental restraint system.
f910048a
01/06/95
A. 1 Inch (2.5 cm) Maximum

Fig. 5.19, Adjusting Shoulder Harness Clearance,
Komfort Latch
The air bag, when used with seat belts, provides additional protection to the driver in severe frontal collisions. The operational readiness of the air bag system is indicated by the supplemental restraint system
(SRS) indicator on the dash. The SRS indicator
comes on when the engine is started and then goes
off. The indicator will remain on if there is a problem
with the air bag system. The vehicle should be serviced if the SRS indicator does not come on when
the engine is started or if the SRS indicator remains
on.
WARNING
11/02/95
f910144
Fig. 5.20, Locking the Komfort Latch
6.
Unbuckle the three-point seat belt and release

the Komfort Latch or the Sliding Komfort Latch
as follows.
If equipped with a Sliding Komfort Latch, unbuckle the seat belt, then tug on the shoulder
5.9
Air bags are designed to inflate only in severe

frontal collisions. The driver and the passenger
should always wear seat belts. For maximum protection in a collision or rollover, always be in a
normal seated position with your back against
the seat back and your head upright. Fasten your
seat belt and ensure that it is properly positioned
on your body as described under the "Seat Belt
Operation" heading. Since the air bag inflates
with considerable speed and force, a proper seat
position will keep you a safe distance from the
inflating air bag.
Do not place objects on the steering wheel or between you and the steering wheel. Keep your
hands on the sides and lower portion of the
Cab Features
steering wheel. Any objects may cause harm during an accident.
Do not cut, drill, braze, solder, weld, strike,
Failure to follow these instructions may result in

death or personal injury.
Do not expose the air bag module to elec-
Air Bag Safety Guidelines

The air bag system contains components that use
combustible chemicals. Because these chemicals are
combustible, care must be taken when replacing or
handling system components.
WARNING
Consider undeployed air bags to be dangerous
and capable of deploying at any time. Do not attempt to service the air bag system unless
trained to do so. Damaged air bag systems
should be examined by qualified personnel before any attempt is made to remove or to deploy
the air bag. All intentional deployments and testing of the system should be performed by trained
personnel. Unintentional or improper air bag deployment could cause severe bodily injury or
death.
Do not attempt to disassemble the air bag inflator
unit or breach the integrity of the sealed metallic
inflator case. Doing so could cause severe bodily
injury or death.
Do not allow system chemicals to contact other
liquids, combustibles, and flammable materials.
Doing so could cause chemical burns or personal injury.
The surface of the deployed air bag may contain
small amounts of sodium hydroxide (which is a
by-product of the gas generant combustion) and
metallic sodium. Sodium hydroxide may be irritating to the skin and eyes. Always wear rubber
gloves and safety glasses when handling a deployed air bag. Immediately wash your hands and
exposed skin areas with a mild soap and water.
Flush your eyes immediately if exposed to sodium hydroxide.
Review and comply with the following list of
warnings. Failure to do so could result in severe
injury or death.
Keep all liquids, acids, halogens, heavy
metals, and heavy salts away from the air

bag system.
or probe any part of the air bag system.

tricity. Never probe a circuit.
Do not attempt to adapt, reuse, or install an
air bag system in any vehicle other than the

specific vehicle for which it is designed.
Do not cut wires or tamper with the connec-
tor between the vehicle wiring harness and

the air bag module. Cutting or removing the
connector from the system will disable the
safety shunt and could cause unintentional
deployment.
Allow deployed air bag systems to cool
after deployment.
Wear rubber gloves and safety glasses
when handling a deployed air bag.

Wash your hands and exposed skin surface
areas immediately after handling a deployed system.

Store, transport, dispose of, and recycle
deployed air bag system components in

accordance with all applicable federal,
state, and local regulations.
The air bag module may contain perchlor-
ate material: special handling may apply,

see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Keep all heavy objects in the cab secured.
Cab Amenities
Cup Holders
There are two cup holders molded into the lower part
of the auxiliary dash panel, one on either side of the
HVAC control head.
Cab Storage
There are storage bins in the dash and the overhead
console. On vehicles with optional individual drivers
and passenger seats, there is a center storage console between the seats.
There is a dash storage bin located under the cup
holders on the center panel. The bin has a hinged
5.10
Cab Features
cover and can be used to store sunglasses. There is

also a small storage pocket above the radio.
Overhead Storage
Vehicles without an overhead console have two storage bins located above the windshield.
On vehicles equipped with an overhead console,
most vehicles have a storage bin located in the overhead console. See Fig. 5.21. The overhead storage
bin is often removed and replaced with a CB radio.
Two map holders with netted openings are located
overhead, one on either side of the overhead
console.
1
2
3
f680027
10/08/2001
1. Overhead Storage Bin
2. Overhead Console
Fig. 5.21, Overhead Storage
Center Storage Console (optional)

On vehicles with individual drivers and passengers
seats, a center storage console can be installed between the seats.
The center storage console has a table top that can
be lifted up to deploy a writing surface. See
Fig. 5.22.
In another version, the center storage console has a
printer top with a paper slot in it. See Fig. 5.23.
Windshield Washer Reservoir

The standard location for the windshield washer reservoir is on the right-hand side of the cab underneath
the door, just above the trailing edge of the top cab
step. See Fig. 5.24.
5.11
3. Map Holder Netting
Cab Features
10/08/2001
f820378a
1. Cab
2. Washer Reservoir Fill Cap
3. Top Step
Fig. 5.24, Windshield Washer Reservoir
10/08/2001
1.
2.
3.
4.
f680026
Table Top
Storage Console Cover
Storage Area
Storage Console Base
Fig. 5.22, Center Storage Console (with writing surface)
10/08/2001
1. Printer Top
2. Printer/Paper Area
f680025
3. Storage Console Base
Fig. 5.23, Center Storage Console (printer option)
5.12
6
Heater, Ventilator and Air
Conditioner
Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Heater, Ventilator and Air Conditioner
Climate Control Panel

The climate control panel allows you to control the
heating, ventilating, defrosting, and air conditioning
functions. The climate control panel without air conditioning is shown in Fig. 6.1. The climate control
panel with air conditioning is shown in Fig. 6.2.
Fan Switch
The fan switch controls the fan speed and forces
fresh or recirculated air through the air outlets. The
fan switch has eight fan speeds and an off position.
To increase airflow, turn the fan switch to the right or

to a higher number. To decrease the airflow, turn the
switch to the left or to a lower number.
Air Selection Switch

The air selection switch allows you to control the flow
of air through the face outlets, the floor outlets, the
defrost (windshield) outlets, or a combination of
these outlets to give you nine air selection modes on
a system without air conditioning. See Fig. 6.3. A
system with air conditioning has 11 air selection
2
1
06/17/2003
f831452a
1. Fan Switch
Fig. 6.1, Climate Control Panel Without Air Conditioning
2
3
1
0
06/18/2003
1. Fan Switch
4
4. Recirculation Button
f831453a
5. Recirculation Indicator
Fig. 6.2, Climate Control Panel With Air Conditioning
6.1
modes, four of which are air conditioning modes. See

Fig. 6.4.
6
5
4
3
10
A
1
8
06/18/2003
9
06/17/2003
f831455
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Face Mode
Selection Between Face Mode and Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Selection Between Bi-Level Mode and Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Selection Between Floor Mode and Floor/Defrost
Mode
7. Floor/Defrost Mode
8. Selection Between Floor/Defrost Mode and Defrost
Mode
9. Defrost Mode
Fig. 6.3, Air Selection Switch Without Air Conditioning
2.
3.
4.
Face Mode: Directs all airflow through the face

or instrument panel outlets.
f831462
A. Air Conditioning Modes

1. Air Conditioning Face Mode
2. Selection Between Air Conditioning Face Mode and
Air Conditioning Bi-Level Mode
3. Air Conditioning Bi-Level Mode
4. Selection Between Air Conditioning Bi-Level Mode
and Face Mode
5. Face Mode
6. Selection Between Face Mode and Floor Mode
7. Floor Mode
8. Selection between Floor Mode and Floor/Defrost
Mode
9. Floor/Defrost Mode
10. Selection between Floor/Defrost Mode and Defrost
Mode
11. Defrost Mode
Fig. 6.4, Air Selection Switch With Air Conditioning
Air Selection Switch Without Air

Conditioning
1.
11
through the floor outlets and 25 percent through

the defrost outlets.
7.
Floor/Defrost Mode: Directs the airflow equally

to the floor outlets and the defrost outlets.
8.
Bi-Level Mode: Directs the airflow equally to the

face outlets and the floor outlets.
Selection between Floor/Defrost Mode and

Defrost Mode: Directs 75 percent of the airflow
through the defrost outlets and 25 percent
through the floor outlets.
9.
Selection between Bi-Level Mode and Floor

Mode: Directs 25 percent of the airflow through
the face outlets and 75 percent through the floor
outlets.
Defrost Mode: Directs all airflow through the

defrost outlets.
Air Selection Switch With Air

Conditioning
Selection between Face Mode and Bi-Level

Mode: Directs 75 percent of the airflow through
the face outlets and 25 percent through the floor
outlets.
5.
Floor Mode: Directs all airflow through the floor

outlets.
1.
Air Conditioning Face Mode: Directs all airflow

through the face or instrument panel outlets.
6.
Selection between Floor Mode and Floor/

2.
Selection between the Air Conditioning Face

Mode and the Air Conditioning Bi-Level
6.2
Mode: Directs 75 percent of the airflow to the

face outlets and 25 percent to the floor outlets.
3.
Air Conditioning Bi-Level Mode: Directs the

airflow equally to the face outlets and the floor
outlets.
4.
Selection between the Air Conditioning BiLevel Mode and the Face Mode: Directs 25
percent of the airflow to the face outlets and 75
percent to the floor outlets.
5.
Face Mode: Directs all airflow through the face

outlets.
6.
Selection between Face Mode and Floor

Mode: Directs the airflow equally through the
face outlets and the floor outlets.
7.
8.
9.
The recirculation mode is only available on vehicles

with air conditioning.
The recirculation mode limits the amount of outside
air entering the cab. Press the recirculation button to
prevent dusty or smoky air from entering the cab.
The recirculation mode can also be used to decrease
the time required to cool or heat the cab interior during extreme outside temperature conditions. When
the recirculation mode is on, the recirculation indicator will be on. See Fig. 6.2.
The recirculation mode is not available when the air
selection switch is in one of the following modes:
floor/defrost mode
Floor Mode: Directs all airflow through the floor

outlets.
selection between floor/defrost mode and de-
Selection between Floor Mode and Floor/

through the floor outlets and 25 percent through
the defrost outlets.
defrost mode
Floor/Defrost Mode: Directs the airflow equally

to the floor outlets and the defrost outlets. The
recirculation button will not work in this mode.
10. Selection between Floor/Defrost Mode and

through the defrost outlets and 25 percent
through the floor outlets. The recirculation button
will not work in this mode.
11. Defrost Mode: Directs all airflow through the
defrost outlets. The recirculation button will not

work in this mode.
Temperature Control Switch

The temperature control switch is used to select the
desired temperature. Turn the switch to the left
(counterclockwise) for cool air, or to the right (clockwise) for hot air. There are 21 positions on the temperature control switch ranging from full cool air to
full hot air.
Fresh Air Mode

Fresh air, or outside air, is circulated through the
heating and air conditioning system unless the recirculation mode, if equipped, is turned on.
6.3
Recirculation Mode
frost mode
When the recirculation mode is turned on, it will stay
on for 20 minutes, or until the recirculation button is
pressed again, or the air selection switch is turned to
a defrost mode.
IMPORTANT: On vehicles built before May 2,

2003, the recirculation mode turns off after
twenty minutes and can be turned back on
when the recirculation button is pressed again.
On vehicles built from May 2, 2003, the system
enters a partial recirculation mode for five minutes after being in full recirculation mode for 20
minutes. This cycle repeats as long as the system is in recirculation mode.
NOTE: To prevent the buildup of fumes or odors
inside the cab on a vehicle built before May 2,
2003, do not use the recirculation mode for
more than 20 minutes. It is recommended that
the recirculation mode remains off for five minutes before it is turned back on.
Defrosting
Before using any of the defrost modes, clear the
screen at the base of the windshield if snow or ice is
present.
Air Conditioning, Optional

There are four air conditioning modes on the air selection switch. The air conditioning settings on the air
selection switch are blue, in addition to the selection
between the air conditioning bi-level mode and the
face mode.
IMPORTANT: Operate the air conditioner at

least five minutes each month, even during cool
weather. This helps prevent drying and cracking
of the refrigerant compressor seals and reduces
the chance of refrigerant leaks in the system.
NOTE: The heating and air conditioning system
has a brushless blower motor with a protection
or shutdown mode to prevent damage due to
overheating and overcurrent conditions. If the
brushless blower motor goes into a protection
mode, the motor will operate at a slower speed.
If the overheating or overcurrent condition continues, the motor will shut down and stop completely.
The motor will resume proper operation after the
motor has cooled or the overcurrent condition
has been resolved. It will be necessary to cycle
the fan switch off, and then on, to reset the
motor. If the problem appears repeatedly, take
the vehicle to an Freightliner dealer or authorized service outlet for repairs.
6.4
7
Engines
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank, EPA10 and Newer Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
Cold-Weather Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Starting After Extended Shutdown or Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Engine Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Cold-Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
High-Altitude Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Engine Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Exhaust Braking Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
Engines
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

IMPORTANT: Depending on local jurisdictional
guidelines, vehicles that are domiciled outside of
the U.S. and Canada may not have emissions
aftertreatment systems (ATS) that are compliant
with EPA regulations.
NOTICE
Follow these guidelines for engines that comply
with EPA07 or newer regulations, or damage may
occur to the aftertreatment device (ATD) and the
warranty may be compromised.
Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sul-
fur content or less.

Do not use fuel blended with used engine
lube oil or kerosene.

Engine lube oil must have a sulfated ash
level less than 1.0 wt %; currently referred

to as CJ-4 oil.
IMPORTANT: Using non-specification fuels or

oils can lead to shortened diesel particulate filter
(DPF) cleaning or replacement intervals. For
example, using CJ-4+ oil with 1.3% sulfated ash
(30% more ash content) may result in the need
for DPF cleaning or replacement 20 to 30%
sooner than would normally be required.
IMPORTANT: See the engine manufacturers
operation manual for complete details and operation of the ATS.
Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Fuel

Consumption Standards
Vehicles and/or engines manufactured after December 31, 2006 and domiciled in the U.S. or Canada
are required to meet all EPA and NHTSA regulations
effective as of the vehicle build date. Engines manufactured between January 1, 2007 and December 31,
2009 meet EPA07 requirements. Engines manufactured between January 1, 2010 and December 31,
2012 meet EPA10 requirements.
Model year 2013 and later vehicles meet additional
requirements as specified by GHG14 requirements.
These vehicles are equipped with components that
increase fuel efficiency and reduce GHG emissions.
7.1
Components may include, but are not limited to, lowrolling resistance tires; aerodynamic devices such as
hood, cab/sleeper extenders, and fuel tank fairings;
vehicle speed limiter; and idle shutdown timer. If replacement of any drag-reducing component is required, the replacement component must meet or
exceed the drag reduction performance of the originally installed component in order to maintain compliance with GHG14 requirements.
EPA07 Engines
Engines built between January 1, 2007 and December 31, 2009 are required to meet EPA07 guidelines
for reduced exhaust emissions of particulate matter
and nitrogen oxides (NOx). NOx is limited to just
over 1 gram per brake horsepower hour (g/bhp-hr),
and particulate matter cannot exceed 0.01 g/bhp-hr.
The EPA07 ATS varies according to engine manufacturer and vehicle configuration, but the exhaust muffler is replaced by an aftertreatment device (ATD).
Inside the ATD, the exhaust first passes over the diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC), then passes through
the diesel particulate filter (DPF), which traps soot
particles. The soot is burned to ash during a process
called regeneration (regen).
EPA10 and Newer Engines

The EPA mandates that all engines built after December 31, 2009 must reduce the level of emissions
exhausted by the engine to the following levels:
Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) 0.2 g/bhp-hr
Particulate Matter (PM) .01 g/bhp-hr
To meet EPA guidelines, engines that are compliant

with EPA10 and newer regulations use an ATS that
has, in addition to a DOC/DPF device like that used
in an EPA07 ATD, a Selective Catalytic Reduction
(SCR) device to reduce NOx downstream of the engine. After exhaust gases leave the DPF, a controlled
quantity of diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is injected into
the exhaust stream. In the presence of heat, DEF is
converted to ammonia gas, which reacts with NOx in
the selective catalyst chamber to yield nitrogen and
water vapor, which exit through the tailpipe.
Regeneration
The harder an engine works, the better it disposes of
soot. If the exhaust temperature is high enough, a
process called passive regeneration (regen) occurs
Engines
as the vehicle is driven normally. However, if the engine isnt running hot enough, the electronic controls
may initiate an active regen, whereby extra fuel is
injected into the exhaust stream to superheat and
reduce the soot trapped in the DPF to ash. Active
regen happens only when the vehicle is moving
above a certain speed, determined by the engine
manufacturer. See your engine operation manual for
complete details. Both active and passive regen happen automatically, without driver input.
NOTE: The regen switch can initiate a parked

regen only when the DPF lamp is illuminated.
WARNING
Active regeneration can occur automatically anytime the vehicle is moving. The exhaust gas temperature could reach 1500F (800C), which is hot
enough to cause a fire, heat damage to objects
or materials, or personal injury to persons near
the exhaust outlet. The exhaust temperature can
remain high even after the vehicle has stopped.
When stopping the vehicle shortly after an automatic regen, ensure the exhaust outlets are directed away from structures, trees, vegetation,
flammable materials, and anything else that may
be damaged or injured by exposure to high heat.
RGEN
f610848
03/09/2012
Fig. 7.1, Regen Request Switch
See Regen Switches, below, for instructions on

preventing automatic regen if necessary.
When operating conditions do not allow for ATD filter
cleaning by active or passive regen, the vehicle may
require a driver-activated parked regen. When this
occurs, the DPF lamp illuminates, indicating that a
regen is required. The driver must either bring the
vehicle up to highway speed to increase the load
(thus starting an active regen), or park the vehicle
and initiate a parked regen. See Regen Switches,
below, for instructions on initiating a parked regen.
Regen Switches
The regen request switch, located on the dash, is
used to initiate a parked regen. See Fig. 7.1. The
function of the switch varies by the engine make and
model in the vehicle. See the engine operation
manual for switch operation details.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a regen
request/inhibit switch. See Fig. 7.2. To stop a regen
in progress or prevent the start of a regen, press the
lower half of the switch. Regen is then delayed until
the switch is no longer active.
f610944
07/30/2009
Fig. 7.2, Regen Request/Inhibit Switch
WARNING
During parked regen, exhaust temperatures are
very high and could cause a fire, heat damage to
objects or materials, or personal injury to persons near the exhaust outlet.
Before initiating a parked regeneration, make certain the exhaust outlets are directed away from
structures, trees, vegetation, flammable materials, and anything else that may be damaged or
injured by prolonged exposure to high heat.
To initiate a parked regen, perform the following
steps.
1.
Park the vehicle away from all flammable materials,set the parking brake, and put the transmission in neutral.
7.2
Engines
2.
Start and warm the engine until the coolant temperature is at least 150F (66C).
3.
Lift the regen request switch guard and press

and hold the yellow button for five seconds. As
the regen process is initiated, engine rpm increases and the HEST lamp illuminates to indicate extremely high exhaust temperatures.
IMPORTANT: The driver must remain with the

vehicle during the entire regen cycle.
4.
5.
The regen cycle will finish after 20 to 60 minutes,

at which time engine idle speed drops to normal
and the vehicle can be driven normally. The
HEST lamp is extinguished when vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h) or the system has
cooled to normal operating temperature.
To stop a parked regen at any time during the
process:
depress the clutch pedal, brake pedal, or
accelerator pedal;
press and hold the regen inhibit switch until
idle returns to normal;

shut down the engine.
ATS Warning Lamps

There are three warning lamps that alert the driver of
high exhaust temperature, the need to perform a
parked regen or service the DPF, or of an engine
fault that affects emissions. A decal attached to the
drivers sun visor explains the ATS warning lamps.
Fig. 7.3.
See Fig. 7.4 for an explanation of the ATS warnings,
and actions required to avoid engine protection sequences.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

A steadily illuminated yellow malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) indicates an engine fault that affects
emissions. See Fig. 7.5.
DPF Status Lamp

When soot accumulates in the DPF and the DPF status lamp illuminates, see Fig. 7.6, perform a parked
regen or bring the vehicle up to highway speed to
increase the load (thus starting an active regen).
7.3
If the DPF status lamp blinks while the CHECK engine lamp is illuminated, initiate a parked regen immediately in order to prevent an engine derate.
If the red STOP engine lamp illuminates with the
blinking DPF lamp and the CHECK engine lamp,
begin a parked regen in order to prevent an engine
shutdown. Park the vehicle and perform a parked
regen.
High Exhaust System Temperature

(HEST) Lamp
Slow (10-second) flashing of the high exhaust system temperature (HEST) lamp indicates that a
parked regen is in progress, and the engines high
idle speed is being controlled by the engine software,
not the vehicle driver.
Steady illumination of the HEST lamp alerts the
driver of high exhaust temperature during the regen
process if the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/
h), or during a parked regen. See Fig. 7.7.
Maintenance
Authorized service facilities must perform any DPF
service. For warranty purposes, maintain a record
that includes:
date of cleaning or replacement;
vehicle mileage;
particulate filter part number and serial number.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank,

EPA10 and Newer Engines
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is used in the ATS to
lower NOx in the exhaust stream. DEF is colorless
and close to odorless (it may have a slightly pungent
odor similar to ammonia). It is nontoxic, nonflammable, and biodegradable. It is mildly corrosive to
aluminum, but does not affect the strength or structure of the aluminum.
White crystals may be noticeable around components that come into contact with DEF. The crystals
are easily removed with water.
DEF consumption varies depending on ambient conditions and vehicle application.
Engines
IMPORTANT
DPF Regen Needed
1
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

regeneration is needed.
If flashing, regenerate as soon as
possible. Engine derate possible.
Hot exhaust can cause fire.
Hot Exhaust
Keep flammables and people away

from exhaust.
3
DEF Refill Needed

DEF
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) level is

low. Engine derate likely.
Refill tank with certified DEF.
See operators manual for complete instructions.

11/30/2010
2401656000
f080161
Fig. 7.3, Warning Lamp Decal, Sun Visor
Freezing Conditions
DEF freezes to slush at around 12F (-11C). It is not
damaged or destroyed if frozen, and is fully usable
when thawed. The DEF in the tank is allowed to
freeze while a vehicle is non-operational. At start-up,
normal operation of the vehicle is not inhibited if the
DEF is frozen; an immersion heater with engine coolant flowing through it warms the DEF once the engine is running, allowing the SCR system to operate.
DEF supply lines are electrically-heated and are
purged when the engine is shut down; complete
purging of the DEF lines requires approximately five
minutes after the engine is shut down.
DEF Tank
Engines that are compliant with EPA10 and newer
regulations are equipped with a DEF tank located on
the drivers side of the vehicle behind the battery box
or forward of the fuel tank. See Fig. 7.8 and Fig. 7.9.
The DEF tank has a 19 mm filler neck inlet that prevents the hose from a diesel outlet from being inserted, and has a blue cap for easy identification.
Fuel/DEF Gauge
The diesel fuel and DEF levels are measured in a
dual-purpose gauge. See Fig. 7.10.
Fuel level is indicated at the top of the gauge. Below
the fuel level, a low fuel warning lamp illuminates
amber when the fuel level drops below 1/8th of the
capacity.
The lower portion of the gauge has a DEF warning
lamp that illuminates amber when the DEF tank is
near empty, and a lightbar that indicates the level of
DEF in the tank. The DEF light bar illuminates as follows:
Four bars illuminated greenBetween 75%
and 100% full
7.4
Engines
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION

WARNING
INDICATOR
LAMP(S)
CHECK
(Solid)
(Flashing)
Level 1
Level 2
(Flashing)
CHECK
STOP
(Flashing)
Level 3
Level 4
Indicator Lamp
Message(s)
Filter Regeneration
Recommended
Filter Regeneration
Necessary
Parked Regeneration
Required Engine
Derate
Parked Regeneration Required

Engine Shut Down
Diesel Particulate
Filter Condition
Filter is reaching
capacity.
Filter is now
reaching maximum
capacity.
Switch.
Filter has reached

maximum capacity.
Filter has exceeded

maximum capacity.
Required Action
Bring vehicle to
highway speeds to
allow for an Automatic
Regeneration or
perform a Parked
Regeneration.
To avoid engine
derate bring vehicle
to highway speeds
to allow for an
Automatic
Regeneration or
perform a Parked
Regeneration as
soon as possible.
Vehicle must be
parked and a Parked
Regeneration must
be performed
engine will begin
derate.
Vehicle must be parked and a

Parked Regeneration or Service
Regeneration must be performed.
Check engine operators manual
for details engine will shut down.
HEST (High Exhaust

System Temperature)
Flashing
A regeneration is in
progress.
Solid
Exhaust Components
and exhaust gas are
at high temperature.
When stationary, keep
away from people and
flammable materials
or vapors.
For a driver performed Parked Regeneration, vehicle must be equipped with a dash mounted Regeneration Switch.
See Engine Operators Manual for complete Regeneration Instructions.
2401583000B
06/29/2009
f080147
Fig. 7.4, ATS Warning Lamps
09/25/2006
f610814a
Fig. 7.5, Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Three bars illuminated greenBetween 50%
and 75% full

Two bars illuminated greenBetween 25%
and 50% full

One bar illuminated greenBetween approxi-
mately 10% and 25% full

One bar illuminated amberDEF very low, re-
fill DEF
One bar flashing redDEF empty, refill DEF
7.5
09/25/2006
f610815a
Fig. 7.6, DPF Status Lamp
DEF Warnings and Engine Limits

IMPORTANT: Ignoring the DEF warning lights
results in limited engine power, with the application of a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit after the
engine is shut down and started again.
DEF Level LowInitial Warning

When the DEF level is low, the following lamps notify
the driver. See Fig. 7.11. Refill the DEF tank in order
to cancel the warning sequence.
Engines
09/25/2006
f610816a
Fig. 7.7, HEST Lamp
1
2
f470541
07/24/2009
1. DEF Tank
2. Fuel Tank
Fig. 7.9, DEF Tank Located Forward of the Fuel Tank
Cummins engines: Power is limited with progressively harsher engine power limits applied.
DEF Tank Empty and Ignored

If the empty warning is ignored and the DEF tank is
not refilled, the red STOP engine lamp illuminates in
addition to the MIL lamp and CHECK engine lamp
(on vehicles with a Cummins ISB or ISC/L engine.)
See Fig. 7.13.
1
2
f470542
07/24/2009
1. Batteries
2. DEF Tank
Fig. 7.8, DEF Tank Located Behind the Battery Box
One bar of the DEF level indicator illuminates
amberDEF very low, refill DEF

The DEF warning lamp illuminates solid amber
DEF Empty
When the DEF level reads empty, the following
lamps notify the drive. See Fig. 7.12.
One bar of the DEF level indicator flashes
redDEF empty, refill DEF

The DEF warning lamp flashes amber
The MIL lamp illuminates
Detroit engines: Power is limited, with a 55 mph (90

km/h) speed limit.
If the DEF is not refilled, a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed

limit is applied after the next engine shutdown or if a
fuel refill is detected.
DEF Contamination or SCR Tampering
NOTICE
Once contaminated DEF or tampering has been
detected, the vehicle must be taken to an authorized service facility to check the SCR system for
damage and to deactivate the warning lights and
engine limits.
If contaminated DEF or tampering with the ATS is
detected, the DEF warning light flashes and the MIL
lamp illuminates to warn the driver. The CHECK engine lamp also illuminates on vehicles with a Cummins ISB or ISC/L engine. See Fig. 7.13.
Detroit engines: Engine power is limited with
progressively harsher limits applied. If the fault
7.6
Engines
1/2
1/2
1/2
ULTRA LOW SULFUR

DIESEL FUEL ONLY
ULTRA LOW SULFUR

DIESEL FUEL ONLY
ULTRA LOW SULFUR

DIESEL FUEL ONLY
DEF
E
DEF
F
F
DEF
F
C
11/08/2010
f611037
A. Green barsDEF level indicators

B. One bar illuminated amberDEF very low, refill DEF
1. Low Fuel Warning Lamp
C. One bar flashing redDEF empty, refill DEF

2. DEF Warning Lamp
Fig. 7.10, Fuel/DEF Gauge
07/09/2009
f470537
A. DEF Warning Lamp (illuminated)

B. DEF Lightbar (one bar amber)
Fig. 7.11, DEF Level Low Initial Warning
is not corrected, the STOP engine light illuminates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit is applied after the next engine shutdown or if a fuel
refill is detected.
Cummins engines: Engine power is limited with
progressively harsher limits applied. If the fault

is not corrected, the STOP engine light illuminates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit is applied after the next engine shutdown, or while
parked and idling.
Engine Starting
For cold-weather starting, refer to "Cold Weather
Starting" later in this chapter.
7.7
11/08/2010
f470539a
NOTE: MIL illuminates. CHECK engine lamp illuminates

if Cummins ISB or ISC/L engine. Engine power is limited.
A. DEF Warning Lamp (flashing)
B. DEF Lightbar (one bar flashing red)
Fig. 7.12, DEF Empty Warning
This engine chapter is to serve as a guide for best

practices only. Each make and model engine may
have operating characteristics that are unique to that
particular engine, and will be documented in the engine manufacturers literature. Always refer to specific
instructions and recommendations from the engine
manufacturer.
NOTE: Before starting the engine, read Chapter 3 for detailed information on how to read the
instruments and see Chapter 4 for detailed information on how to operate the controls. Read
the operating instructions in the manufacturers
Engines
DEF level indicator illuminates all seg-
ments green, then turns them off one at a

time before turning the leftmost segment
amber and then red
During cold conditions, the WAIT TO
START lamp may illuminate.

B
11/08/2010
f470540a
NOTE: STOP engine light and MIL illuminate, engine

power is limited, speed limit of 5 mph (8 km/h)
A. DEF Warning Lamp (flashing)
B. DEF Lightbar (one bar flashing red)
Fig. 7.13, DEF Empty and Ignored Warning
engine operation manual before starting the

engine.
WARNING
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
air inlet opening in the air intake in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury or property
damage.
1.
Before engine start-up, complete the pretrip inspections and maintenance procedures in Chapter 11.
2.
Set the parking brake.
3.
For manual transmissions, place the transmission in neutral and fully depress the clutch pedal.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
For automatic transmissions, put the transmission in neutral. Do depress the accelerator pedal.
NOTE: Depending on local jurisdictional emissions regulations, vehicles and/or engines that
are domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada
may not be equipped with the WAIT TO START
or START BLOCKED lamp.
4.
Turn the ignition switch to ON. See Fig. 7.14.

The following actions should occur:
electronic gauges complete a full sweep of
their dials
warning and indicator lamps illuminate,
then are extinguished
07/19/2006
f610805
Fig. 7.14, Ignition Switch
NOTE: The length of time the WAIT TO START

lamp remains illuminated depends on the ambient temperature. The lower the ambient temperature, the longer the lamp will be illuminated.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned to START
before the gauge sweep has completed or if the
starter has overheated, the START BLOCKED
lamp may illuminate. Turn the ignition switch
back to ON, wait for the lamp to go out, then
turn the ignition switch to START again.
5.
Once the gauge sweep has completed, turn the

ignition key to the START position. Release the
key the moment the engine starts.
NOTICE
Do not rev the engine if the oil pressure gauge
indicates no oil pressure. Shut down the engine
if oil pressure does not build within approximately ten seconds. Check to determine the
cause of the problem. Operating the engine with
no oil pressure will damage the engine.
6.
It is not necessary to idle the engine before engaging or starting the operation, but load should
be applied gradually during the warm-up period
until the oil temperature reaches 140F (60C).
7.8
Engines
7.
Apply load gradually during the warm-up period.
NOTICE
If the oil pressure gauge indicates no oil pressure, shut down the engine within approximately
ten seconds to avoid engine damage.
8.
Check the oil pressure gauge for any drop in lubricating oil pressure or mechanical malfunction
in the lubricating oil system. Minimum oil pressure at idle is 7 psi (50 kPa).
Cold-Weather Starting
Electronic engines do not normally require special
starting aids.
See the engine manufacturers operation manual for
starting aids that are approved for specific engines.
Starting After Extended

Shutdown or Oil Change
Before engine start-up, complete the engine pretrip
and post-trip inspections and maintenance procedures in Chapter 11.
NOTICE
Engine Operation
Safety and Environmental
Considerations
All Freightliner diesel engines comply with the requirements of the Federal (U.S.) Clean Air Act. Once
an engine is placed in service, the responsibility for
meeting local jurisdictional regulations is with the
owner/operator.
IMPORTANT: EPA emissions regulations apply

to vehicles domiciled in Canada and the U.S. at
the time of printing this manual. Vehicles that
are domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada
may not have engines with an emission aftertreatment system that is compliant with EPA
regulations, depending upon local statutory
emissions guidelines.
NOTICE
It is extremely important that the following guidelines be followed for vehicles with EPA07 or
newer engines, or damage may occur to the aftertreatment device, and the warranty may be
compromised.
Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sul-
fur content or less.
Failure to eliminate water-diluted lubricating oil

may lead to serious engine damage at startup.
Do not use fuel blended with used engine
An engine in storage for an extended period of time

(over winter, for example) may accumulate water in
the oil pan through normal condensation of moisture
on the internal surfaces of the engine. Oil diluted by
water cannot provide adequate bearing protection at
start-up. For this reason, change the engine oil and
filters after extended storage.
Use only engine lube oil with a sulfated ash
Engine Break-In
Each engine must pass a full-load operating test on
a dynamometer before shipment, thereby eliminating
the need for a break-in. Before running the engine
for the first time, follow the instructions in the engine
manufacturers operation manual specific to your engine.
7.9
lube oil or kerosene.

level less than 1.0 wt %; currently referred
to as CJ-4 oil.
Adequate maintenance of the engine and the diesel
particulate filter (DPF) are the responsibility of the
owner/operator, and are essential to keep the emission levels low. Good operating practices, regular
maintenance, and correct adjustments are factors
that will help keep emissions within the regulations.
Normal Operation
WARNING
Do not operate the engine in an area where flammable vapors such as gasoline or diesel fumes
are present. Shut off the engine when in an area
where flammable liquids or gases are being
Engines
handled. Failure to observe these precautions

could result in serious injury or death.
The following points are important to observe when

operating in cold weather:
Check for cracks in the batteries, for corrosion
Every engine has an operating range in which it performs most efficiently. The operating range extends
from maximum torque rpm at the low end, to engine
rated speed at the high end. Most engines deliver
best fuel economy when operated in the low- and
mid-speed segments of the efficiency range and produce maximum horsepower at rated speed, which is
also the recommended maximum speed of the engine. For further engine-specific information, refer to
the engine manufacturers operation manual.
of the terminals, and for tightness of the cable

clamps at the terminals.
Charge the batteries to full capacity. Replace
any battery that is damaged.

If equipped, turn off the load disconnect switch
after the engine is shut down, to prevent battery discharge.

Have the alternator output checked at an au-
Prolonged idling of engines is not recommended, and

is illegal in some states. Idling produces sulfuric acid,
that is absorbed by the lubricating oil, and eats into
bearings, rings, valve stems, and engine surfaces. If
you must idle the engine for cab heat or cooling, use
the high idle function of the cruise control switches.
An idle speed of 900 rpm should be enough to provide cab heat in above freezing ambient temperatures.
If the engine is programmed with the idle shutdown
timer, ninety seconds before the preset shutdown
time, the CHECK ENGINE light will begin to flash at
a rapid rate. If the position of the clutch pedal or service brake changes during this final ninety seconds
the idle shutdown timer will be disabled until reset.
Cold-Weather Operation
Satisfactory performance of a diesel engine operating
in low ambient temperatures requires modification of
the engine, surrounding equipment, operating practices, and maintenance procedures. The lower the
temperature, the greater the amount of modification
required. For service products approved for use in
cold weather for your engine, see the engine manufacturers engine operation manual, supplied in the
vehicle documentation package.
If satisfactory engine temperature is not maintained,
maintenance costs will increase due to greater engine wear. If the engine coolant temperature becomes too low, raw fuel will wash the lubricating oil
off the cylinder walls and dilute the crankcase oil,
causing all moving parts of the engine to suffer from
poor lubrication.
If the engine is in good mechanical condition and the
precautions necessary for cold-weather operation are
taken, ordinary cold weather will not cause difficulty
in starting or loss of efficiency.
thorized service provider.

Check the condition and tension of the drive
belts.
Refer to the engine manufacturers engine op-
eration manual for recommended heaters, lowviscosity lubricating oils, wintergrade fuels, and
approved coolants.
A winterfront may be used to improve cab heating
while idling. If a winterfront is used, at least 25% of
the grille opening should remain open in sectioned,
vertical strips. This assures even cooling across each
tube, and reduces header to tube stress, and possible failure. Winterfronts should only be used when
the ambient temperature remains below 10F
(-12C).
High-Altitude Operation
Engines lose horsepower when operated at high altitude because the air is too thin to burn as much fuel
as at sea level. This loss is about three percent for
each 1000 feet (300 m) altitude above sea level for a
naturally aspirated engine.
All Business Class M2 engines are altitudecompensated by the use of a turbocharger. This reduces smoky exhaust at high altitudes, requires less
downshifting, and allows the engine to make better
use of its fuel. Nevertheless, shift gears as needed to
avoid excessive exhaust smoke.
Engine Shutdown
1.
With the vehicle stopped, apply the parking

brake, and place the transmission in neutral.
7.10
Engines
NOTICE
Idle the engine one to two minutes before shutting it down. After hard operation, shutting down
the engine without idling may cause damage to
the turbocharger.
2.
in a temporarily uncontrolled increase in engine

speed. Transmission damage and gear stripping
could result.
Cruise control is activated by two dash-mounted
switches (Fig. 7.15).
On/Off Switchthis two-position rocker is la-
beled SPD CNTL on the lower half of the

switch. When cruise control is on, an amber
light illuminates the top part of the switch.
Allow the engine to idle one to two minutes before shutting it down. This allows the lubricating
oil and the coolant to carry heat away from the
combustion chambers, bearings, shafts, and
seals. The extreme heat may cause bearings to
seize or oil seals to leak.
Set/Resume Switchthis three-position paddle
switch is labeled RES/ACC above the paddle

and SET/CST below the paddle.
IMPORTANT: Bearings and seals in the turbocharger are subjected to the high heat of combustion exhaust gases. While the engine is running, this heat is carried away by oil circulation,
but if the engine is stopped suddenly, the turbocharger temperature may rise as much as 115F
(46C).
NOTICE
Except in an emergency, do not shut down the
engine when the coolant temperature is above
194F (90C). To do so could damage the engine.
3.
Turn off the ignition switch and shut down the

engine.
Cruise Control
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control system when driving conditions do not permit maintaining a constant speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
roads with a loose driving surface. Failure to follow this precaution could cause a collision or
loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in personal injury or property damage.
Dash-Mounted Switches
f610510
09/13/2001
To turn cruise control on, press the upper half of the On/
Off switch. To turn cruise control off, press the lower half
of the On/Off switch.
To increase cruise speed, raise and hold the paddle of
the Set/Resume switch to RES/ACC until the vehicle
accelerates to the desired speed. To decrease cruise
speed, lower and the paddle of the Set/Resume switch to
SET/CST until the vehicle decelerates to the desired
speed.
1. Cruise Control On/Off Switch
2. Cruise Control Set/Resume Switch
Fig. 7.15, Cruise Control Switches
NOTICE
When the cruise control is engaged, do not attempt to shift gears without using the clutch
pedal. Failure to follow this precaution will result
7.11
1.
To cruise at a particular speed:

1.1
Press the upper half of the On/Off switch.
Engines
1.2
Depress the accelerator pedal until the

speedometer reaches the desired speed.
1.3
Momentarily lower the paddle of the Set/

Resume switch to set the desired speed.
NOTE: The speed memory is lost whenever the

ignition switch is turned to OFF, or cruise control
is turned off.
2.
To disengage the cruise control, do one of the

following:
Press the lower half of the on/off switch
button.
Depress the brake pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal (on a manual
transmission only).
3.
Ensure the cruise control is on.
3.2
Momentarily raise the paddle of the Set/

Resume switch. Cruise will return to the
last speed selected.
NOTE: If vehicle speed drops below the

minimum cruise control speed, cruise control
will disengage. To resume to the preselected
cruise speed, increase vehicle speed to
above minimum cruise control speed and
press the ACC/RES button.
NOTE: The speed memory is lost whenever the
ignition is turned off or the cruise control switch
is toggled to Off.
4.
5.
To increase cruise speed, raise and hold the

paddle of the Set/Resume switch until the vehicle
accelerates to the desired speed.
To decrease cruise speed, lower and the paddle
of the Set/Resume switch until the vehicle decelerates to the desired speed.
Shift Knob Controls, Optional

Cruise control can also be activated by the optional
PAUSE, RESUME, and SET buttons on the transmission shift knob (Fig. 7.16).
1.
Fig. 7.16, Cruise Control Buttons on the Transmission

Shift Knob
To resume a preselected cruise speed:

3.1
To cruise at a particular speed, do these steps:

1.1
Hold the accelerator pedal down until the

speedometer reaches the desired speed.
f260316
05/23/95
1.2
2.
Push the SET button on the transmission

shift knob.
To disengage the cruise control, do these steps:

2.1
Press down the brake pedal (on automatic

and manual transmission) or
Press down the clutch pedal (on manual
transmission only)
2.2
3.
Push the PAUSE button on the transmission shift knob.
To resume a preselected cruise speed, push the

RESUME button on the transmission shift knob.
Cruise will return to the last speed selected.
NOTE: If the ignition is shut off, the speed

memory will be lost.
4.
To adjust cruise speed up, push the SET button

and hold it in until the vehicle accelerates to the
desired speed.
5.
To adjust cruise speed down, push the RESUME

button and hold it in until the vehicle decelerates
to the desired speed.
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor

Engine power takeoffs (PTO) are devices used to tap
into engine power to run auxiliary devices, such as
hydraulic pumps that power additional equipment.
The following instructions are general guidelines for
operating a PTO.
7.12
Engines
1.
2.
Set the parking brake and put the transmission in

neutral.
when driving without a trailer or pulling an
Press the dash-mounted PTO switch. Release

the switch when the amber light behind the
switch begins to blink.
if the tractor drive wheels begin to lock, or
When the light is steadily illuminated, the PTO is

engaged and ready to operate. In stationary
mode, the vehicle must remain in neutral with the
parking brake set.
3.
To activate the mobile mode, shift from neutral to

reverse, 1st, or 2nd gear. The clutch will open
and the PTO will disengage for a moment.
4.
Touch the throttle pedal to close the clutch and

engage the PTO in mobile mode. The PTO may
be operated with the transmission in reverse,
neutral, 1st, or 2nd gears only.
NOTE: Do not attempt to change gears while

the vehicle is moving. The transmission will ignore the request.
5.
To end the mobile mode, bring the vehicle to a

stop. The clutch will open and shut down power
to the PTO.
6.
To resume stationary mode, shift to neutral. The

PTO will engage.
7.
To end stationary mode, press the dash switch.

When the light in the switch goes out, power to
the PTO is shut off.
empty trailer;
there is fishtail motion after the engine
brake is activated.
Whenever vehicle braking is required on good road
conditions, the engine brake may be used in conjunction with the service brakes. There is no time
limit for operation of the engine brake. However, an
engine brake does not provide the precise control of,
and is not a substitute for, service brakes.
WARNING
Usage of the engine brake as the primary braking
system can cause unpredictable stopping distances, that could result in personal injury or
property damage. Service brakes are the primary
vehicle braking system.
Two dash-mounted switches control the engine
brake:
The On/Off switch (ENG BRK), is used to turn
the engine brake on and off. See Fig. 7.17.

When the engine brake is on, an amber light
will illuminate behind the switch.
The engine brake intensity switch (HI/MED/LO
or, in some cases, HI/LO) controls the amount

of engine braking. When the panel lights are
on, the ENG BRK legend is backlit in green.
Engine Braking
Each engine manufacturer uses a specific engine
brake for their engine. Regardless of the manufacturer, the engine brake is operated with the principles
outlined in this chapter. Refer to the engine manufacturers operation manual for details of their particular
engine brake product.
WARNING
To avoid injury from loss of vehicle control, do
not activate the engine brake system under the
following conditions:
on wet or slippery pavement, unless the
vehicle is equipped with antilock braking

system (ABS) and you have had prior experience driving under these conditions;
7.13
f610588
10/17/2001
1. Engine Brake On/Off

2. Engine Brake Intensity Switch
Fig. 7.17, Engine Brake Switches
Since the engine brake is most effective at rated engine speed, gear selection is very important. Gearing
Engines
down the vehicle within the limits of the rated engine

speed makes the engine brake more effective. Recommended engine braking speed is above 1800 rpm
and below the rated speed.
WARNING
The engine brake must be disengaged when
shifting gears using the clutch pedal. If the engine brake is engaged when the transmission is
in neutral, the braking power of the engine brake
can stall the engine, which could result in loss of
vehicle control, possibly causing personal injury
and property damage.
"Control speed" is the speed at which the engine
brake performs 100 percent of the required downhill
braking, resulting in a constant speed of descent.
The control speed varies, depending on vehicle
weight and the downhill grade.
For faster descent, select a higher gear than that
used for control speed. Service brakes must then be
used intermittently to prevent engine overspeed and
to maintain desired vehicle speed.
depending on DDEC programming. This prevents

stalling the engine.
Engine Brake Operation

Depending on the brake type, the engine brake may
be disabled when engine temperature falls below a
set level.
NOTICE
Do not allow the engine to exceed 2500 rpm. Serious engine damage could result.
To activate the engine brake after the engine is
warmed up and the vehicle is in motion:
1.
Remove your feet from both the clutch and

throttle pedals.
2.
Press the On/Off switch to toggle the engine

brake on. See Fig. 7.17. The engine brake will
engage at the rate last set on the brake intensity
switch.
3.
Move the intensity switch to the desired intensity.

On vehicles with a HI/MED/LO intensity switch,
LO will provide 1/3 of the full braking capacity of
the engine, MED will provide 2/3 of the full braking capacity, and HI will provide maximum engine
braking. On vehicles with a HI/LO intensity
switch, LO will provide of the full braking capacity of the engine; HI will provide maximum
engine braking.
For slower descent, select a lower gear, being careful not to overspeed the engine. Occasional deactivation of the engine brake may be necessary to maintain the designated road speed under these
conditions.
If the engine is equipped with both cruise control and
an engine brake, the engine brake can operate automatically while in cruise control mode. If the cruise
control/engine brake function is turned on in the
DDEC VI system programming, the engine brake will
come on low when the set road speed increases a
few mph (km/h) above the cruise set speed. The
maximum amount of braking is selected with the
dash switches. When the vehicle returns to the set
cruise speed, the engine brake will turn off.
The engine brake will only operate when the accelerator pedal is fully released. Depressing the clutch
will also prevent the engine brake from operating.
Vehicles equipped with ABS have the ability to turn
the engine brake off if wheel slip is detected. The
engine brake will automatically turn back on once
wheel slip is no longer detected.
The DDEC VI system will deactivate the engine
brake when the engine speed falls below 1000 rpm
or when the vehicle slows down to a preset speed,
4.
Use the intensity switch set at the LO position

when driving on flat, open stretches of road. If
the service brakes are still required to slow down
on a grade, switch to a higher setting on the
dash switch until there is no need for the service
brakes. Grade descent speed should be such
that the service brakes are used infrequently and
remain cool, thus retaining their effectiveness.
5.
For maximum retarding, maintain the top governed speed of the engine through the appropriate selection of gears. When shifting gears, the
engine brake will disengage when the clutch
pedal is depressed, then engage when the clutch
pedal is released.
6.
To cancel the engine brake application, toggle

the On/Off to off.
7.14
Engines
Exhaust Braking Systems

Exhaust Brake Switch
The optional exhaust brake is controlled by a dashmounted rocker switch to help slow the vehicle when
the accelerator is released.
To turn the exhaust brake on, press on the upper
part of the rocker (at the light inside the switch). The
exhaust brake turns off automatically. See Fig. 7.18
or Fig. 7.19.
11/28/2001
f610589
or long grades. The exhaust brake switch located on

the control panel, in combination with the accelerator
and clutch pedals, allows the driver to make maximum use of the exhaust brake in off-highway and
mountain driving as well as in traffic or high-speed
highway driving.
When only the exhaust brake is installed, a twoposition switch on the dash controls the engine braking system. The exhaust brake is only active when
the engine speed is between 1100 and 2700 rpm.
Depressing the accelerator or clutch pedal deactivates the exhaust brake. The ABS system, when active, also deactivates the exhaust brake.
The exhaust brake is a butterfly valve mounted in the
exhaust pipe. When the drivers foot is not on the
accelerator pedal and the upper half of the exhaust
brake switch is pressed in, with the amber light on
the switch illuminated, an air cylinder shuts the butterfly valve, which restricts the flow of exhaust gases
and retards the engine. This retarding action is carried through the engine and drivetrain, slowing the
vehicle and reducing the need for frequent service
brake applications.
Exhaust brakes are not intended for use as the primary braking system during vehicle operation.
Operating Characteristics
WARNING
Do not use the exhaust brake when driving on
slippery or low-traction road surfaces. Failure to
follow this precaution could result in a loss of
vehicle control and possible personal injury or
property damage.
03/31/2009
f610589a
When the exhaust brake switch is on, an amber LED

illuminates inside the switch. When the panel lights
are on, the EXHST BRK legend is backlit in green.
Mercedes-Benz Exhaust Brake

An exhaust brake is an optional auxiliary braking system that assists but does not replace the service
brake system. The exhaust brake can be used alone
or together with the constant-throttle valves for steep
7.15
Before starting the engine, make sure that the lower

half of the exhaust brake switch is pressed in and
the amber light is not illuminated. Do not turn the exhaust brake on until the engine has reached normal
operating temperatures.
When you remove your feet from both the accelerator and clutch pedals and the upper half of the exhaust brake switch is pressed in with the amber light
illuminated, the exhaust brake is applied. The following conditions should exist if the brake is operating
properly:
A slight change in the sound of the engine may
be noticed when the exhaust brake is applied.
Engines
Exhaust smoke should appear normal.

Engine temperature should remain in the nor-
mal operating range.

Road speed usually decreases when the ex-
haust brake is applied during a descent. When

the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or the
grade is extremely steep, you may need to
apply the service brakes occasionally.
Do not expect a retarding effect similar to sud-
den hard application of the service brakes. The

exhaust brake retards the vehicle with a
smooth braking effect.
During a descent, the tachometer usually
shows a drop in rpm, depending on the grade

and the vehicle load.
Depending on the grade and vehicle load, you
may or may not feel the retarding force acting

against your body when the brake is applied.
The retarding force of the brake may not always be noticed, but it is actually preventing
the vehicle from going much faster.
conjunction with, or independent of, the service

brakes. The amount of retarding or braking force is
controlled by the driver.
Pacbrake Operation (Caterpillar)

The Pacbrake is controlled by the exhaust brake
switch and the throttle pedal. All applications are additionally affected, controlled, or governed by engine
speed through transmission gear selection. The Allison MD3060 transmission has automatic downshifting when the exhaust brake is requested. See the
information on the "Allison World Transmission" later
in this chapter.
On some applications, when the Pacbrake is in use,
it may be necessary to check that the cruise control
is not set and that the throttle is in the idle position.
On some applications, the engine, transmission,
cruise control, and the Pacbrake exhaust brake may
electronically interact with each other, which automatically operates their functions. Following are
some examples of the programmed options that may
be available with the cruise control in the on position:
Make sure the exhaust brake is turned off before

shutting down the engine.
The coast mode engages the Pacbrake when
Driving Downhill
The latch mode engages the Pacbrake when
While approaching a steep grade, make sure that the

upper half of the exhaust brake switch is pressed in,
with the amber light illuminated. The exhaust brake
comes on as soon as you remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. While going down the grade, use
a low enough gear to safely descend with a minimum
application of the service brakes. As a general guideline, use the same gear as you would to ascend the
hill.
NOTICE
Do not allow the engine to exceed its governed
speed, or serious engine damage could result.
Apply the service brakes to reduce the engine rpm or
make a slower descent by using a lower gear.
Pacbrake Exhaust Brake

The Pacbrake exhaust brake is intended as a
supplement to the service brakes and will not bring
the vehicle to a complete stop. The Pacbrake will
assist in the control or reduction of road speed in
the service brake is applied and disengages

when the service brake is released.
the service brake is applied and the Pacbrake
remains on after the service brake is released.
The Pacbrake is disengaged when another
input (depressing the throttle or clutch, engine
speed drops below 800 rpm, or the exhaust
brake switch is turned off) is supplied.
The manual mode does not require the cruise
control switch to be on, and operates the

Pacbrake manually at the drivers discretion.
The amount of braking power the engine will develop
is related to the speed (rpm) of the engine. The
higher the engine rpm, the greater the retarding
power.
Certain conditions may require that the transmission
be downshifted in order to generate adequate rpm
for the amount of retarding power required. Pacbrake
exhaust brakes are designed and approved for safe
use at 300 rpm above the engines maximum governed rpm. Refer to individual engine manufacturers
specifications.
7.16
Engines
The Pacbrake will function best if it is used all of the

time. However, if the vehicle is used inconsistently or
seasonally, it may be necessary to perform a preventive maintenance procedure.
1.
With the engine shut down, use any oil-free or

nonpetroleum-based high-heat lubricant, and
spray or coat a sufficient amount on the restricter
valve shaft and the attaching locations at each
end of the actuation cylinder. See Fig. 7.20.
A
03/06/2000
f490228
A. Lubrication Point
Fig. 7.20, Pacbrake Exhaust Brake and Air Cylinder
2.
With your hands or a pair of pliers, motion the

valve several times to distribute the lubricant
down the shaft and the attaching locations.
NOTE: Starting the engine and idling for short

periods of time is not recommended. During a
cold engine start-up, enough moisture is developed within the engine and the exhaust system
to create a corrosion hazard that could affect
the future operation of the Pacbrake. The brake
housing may trap water in the valve shaft bore
causing corrosion in an improperly functioning
or nonfunctioning brake. If it is necessary to periodically start the engine, it is recommended
that normal operating temperatures be attained
before shutting down the engine.
Allison World Transmission

Pacbrake exhaust brakes used with the Allison World
Transmission MD series, are interfaced with the
transmission electronic control module (ECM). An
exhaust-brake-enabled transmission ECM will usually
provide converter lockup in gears two through six.
7.17
Effective exhaust braking begins when the transmission automatically downshifts into fifth gear (62 mph
or less). Once on, the Pacbrake exhaust brake will
control road speed and/or slow the vehicle sufficiently that the transmission will automatically downshift, if necessary, to Allisons preselect mode.
The preselect mode is normally assigned to second
gear; however, the transmission can be reprogrammed by an Allison Transmission Distributor to
third or fourth gear, should the operator desire. If additional retarding power is required before the automatic downshifting occurs, you can select a lower
transmission gear on the Allison shift selector.
8
Drivetrain
Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Allison On-Highway Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Allison MD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Eaton Fuller Straight-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
Eaton Fuller Range-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
Eaton Fuller AutoShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.12
Freightliner SmartShift Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
Eaton Fuller UltraShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
Mercedes-Benz Manual Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.22
Mercedes-Benz Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.22
Meritor Drive Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26
Drivetrain
Clutches
Clutch Operation
Applying the Clutch Brake
The purpose of the clutch brake is to stop the transmission gears from rotating in order to engage the
transmission gears quickly in making an initial start.
To apply the clutch brake, put the transmission in
neutral and press the clutch pedal to the floor.
CAUTION
Never apply the clutch brake while the vehicle is
moving. The clutch pedal should never be
pressed down fully before putting the transmission in neutral. Considerable heat will be generated, which will be detrimental to the friction
discs, release bearings, and transmission front
bearings.
Applying the clutch brake with the transmission still in
gear puts a reverse load on the gear. At the same
time, it will have the effect of trying to stop or decelerate the vehicle with the clutch brake. Rapid wear of
friction discs will take place necessitating frequent replacement.
Vehicle Overload, or Overloading the

Clutch
CAUTION
Overloading will not only result in damage to the
clutch, but also to the entire powertrain.
Clutches are designed for specific vehicle applications and loads. These limitations should not be exceeded.
Riding the Clutch Pedal

Riding the clutch pedal is destructive to the clutch.
Partial clutch engagement permits slippage, and generates excessive heat. Riding the clutch pedal will
also put a constant thrust load on the release bearing, which can thin out the lubricant. Release bearing
failures can be attributed to this type of misuse.
8.1
Holding the Vehicle on an Incline With a

Slipping Clutch
A slipping clutch accumulates heat faster than it can
be dissipated, resulting in early clutch failures. Never
use the clutch to hold a vehicle on a hill.
Coasting With the Clutch Released

(pedal down) and the Transmission in
Gear
WARNING
Do not coast with the clutch released (pedal depressed) and the transmission in gear. High
driven-disc rpm could cause the clutch facing to
be thrown off the disc. Flying debris could cause
injury to persons in the cab.
If the transmission remains in a low gear and the vehicle gains speed, as may occur on a downgrade,
the input shaft and clutch driven disc will turn at
speeds that are higher than normal. This occurs because the rear wheels and the driveline become the
input for the transmission, and a higher-than-normal
speed for a given transmission gear translates to a
higher rpm value for the clutch driven disc.
Clutch driven discs are designed to allow for some
amount of excess rotational speed, but the facing
has a limited burst strength. If the clutch driven disc
rpm increases too much, the clutch facing can be
thrown off the disc(s).
Engaging the Clutch While Coasting

Engaging the clutch while coasting can result in tremendous shock loads and possible damage to the
clutch as well as to the entire drivetrain.
Report Erratic Clutch Operation Promptly

Reporting erratic clutch operation as soon as possible will give maintenance personnel a chance to
inspect the clutch components.
CAUTION
Operating the vehicle with incorrect clutch pedal
free-travel could result in clutch damage. See
Group 25 of the Business Class M2 Workshop
Manual for free-pedal adjustment procedures and
specifications.
Drivetrain
On mechanical clutch linkages, free-pedal travel

should be included and commented on daily in the
drivers report, since clutch free-pedal travel is the
best guide to the condition of the clutch and the release mechanism.
Clutch Lubrication
The release bearing should be lubricated at frequent
intervals. See Group 25 of the Business Class M2
Maintenance Manual for intervals and procedures.
Clutch Wear
CAUTION
The major reason clutches wear out too soon is excessive heat. Clutches are designed to absorb and
dissipate more heat than encountered in typical operation. The temperatures developed in typical operation will not break down the clutch friction surfaces. However, if a clutch is slipped excessively or
required to do the job of a fluid coupling, high temperatures develop quickly and destroy the clutch.
Temperatures generated between the flywheel,
driven discs, and pressure plates can be high
enough to cause the metal to flow and the friction
facing material to char and burn.
CAUTION
Do not allow sustained slippage of the clutch;
this could severely damage the clutch disc, pressure plate, or flywheel. Damage caused by clutch
slippage due to improper break-in is not warrantable.
Slipping and excessive heat are practically nonexistent when a clutch is fully engaged. But during the
moment of engagement, when the clutch is picking
up the load, it generates considerable heat. An incorrectly adjusted or slipping clutch will rapidly generate
sufficient heat to destroy itself.
The most important items that a driver should be
aware of to ensure long service life of the clutch include: starting in the right gear, recognizing clutch
malfunctions, and knowing when to adjust a clutch.
Clutch Adjustments
Some clutches have an internal adjustment. See the
applicable section in Group 25 of the Business
Class M2 Workshop Manual for clutch adjustment
procedures and specifications.
CAUTION
Operating the vehicle with the clutch incorrectly
adjusted could result in clutch or clutch brake
failure.
Failure to lubricate the release bearing as recommended could result in release bearing damage
and damage to the clutch.
NOTE: The Sachs hydraulic clutch does not require lubrication of the release bearing.
Sachs Hydraulic Clutch

The Sachs hydraulic clutch is a 14.5-inch (365 mm)
push-type clutch that is used with the MercedesBenz medium-duty transmissions, models MBT520
and MBT660.
NOTE: All Mercedes-Benz transmission models

require a hydraulic clutch system. For more information on the Mercedes-Benz transmissions,
see under the heading "Mercedes-Benz Manual
Transmissions."
The clutch hydraulic system consists of three main
components:
A pedal unit, including the pedal, master cylin-
der and fluid reservoir,

A slave cylinder at the clutch,
A hydraulic hose that connects the master and
slave cylinders.
Keep the clutch fluid reservoir full to the MAX mark.
If fluid level falls below the MIN mark, have the hydraulic system checked for leaks at an authorized
Freightliner service facility. Use only DOT 4 brake
fluid to fill the reservoir.
The hydraulic clutch provides smooth, quiet, and reliable clutch actuation with a minimum of maintenance.
Pressure builds up in the master cylinder when the
clutch pedal is pressed. This pressure is transmitted
through the brake fluid in the hose to the slave cylinder, where it acts directly on the clutch release fork.
8.2
Drivetrain
Allison On-Highway
Transmissions
The Allison on-highway transmissions are fully automatic and include the 1000 Series, 2000 Series,
and 2400 Series. Refer to the Allison website for
additional information, www.allisontransmission.com.
Safety Precautions
WARNING
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running. If you leave the vehicle and the engine is running, the vehicle can move suddenly,
which could result in personal injury or property
damage.
1000 Series
On vehicles with Allison 1000 series transmissions,
do the following steps if you have to leave the cab
with the engine running (for example, when checking
the transmission fluid):
Without Park Position
6.
Chock the rear tires and take any other steps

necessary to keep the vehicle from moving.
2000 Series
On vehicles with Allison 2000 series transmissions,
do the following steps if you have to leave the cab
with the engine running (for example, when checking
the transmission fluid):
Without Auto-Apply Parking Brake

Follow the instructions for vehicles with 1000 series
transmissions, under the heading "Without Park Position."
With Auto-Apply Parking Brake

1.
Bring the vehicle to a complete stop using the

service brake.
2.
Ensure that the engine is at low idle rpm.
3.
Put the transmission in PB (auto-apply parking

brake).
4.
Apply the parking brake (if equipped), and make

sure it is properly engaged.
5.

1.

service brake.
2400 Series
2.
3.
Put the transmission in neutral.
On vehicles with 2400 series transmissions, follow

the instructions for vehicles with 1000 series transmissions.
4.
Apply the parking brake, and make sure it is

properly engaged.
5.

With Park Position

1.

service brake.
2.
3.
Put the transmission in P (park).
4.
Apply the parking brake (if equipped), and make

sure it is properly engaged.
5.
Engage the park range by slowly releasing the

service brake.
8.3
Range Inhibit Indicator, 2000 and

2400 Series
A RANGE INHIBIT indicator is a standard feature of
the 2000 series and 2400 series transmissions. The
RANGE INHIBIT indicator comes on to alert the
driver that transmission operation is being inhibited
and that the range shifts being requested by the
driver may not occur. When certain operating conditions are detected by the TCM (transmission control
module), the controls will lock the transmission in the
current operating range.
Shift inhibits occur under the following conditions:
Shifts from neutral to reverse or from neutral to
a forward range when the engine is above idle,

greater than 900 rpm.
Drivetrain
Forward/reverse directional shifts are typically
not permitted if appreciable output shaft speed

is detected.
When some types of unusual transmission op-
erating conditions are detected by the TCM,

the TCM temporarily limits transmission operation until the vehicle can be driven to a service
location. When this type of situation is detected, the TCM will lock the transmission in a
safe gear range.
The TCM will prevent shifts from park or neu-
tral to range when auxiliary equipment, such as

a power takeoff unit (PTO), is in operation.
Operating Instructions, On-Highway

Transmissions
Allison automatic transmissions are electronically
controlled. The shift selector provides five or six forward ranges and one reverse range.
P (Park, optional on 1000 and 2400

Series)
Use park when turning the engine on or off, to check
vehicle accessories, to operate the engine in idle for
longer than 5 minutes, and for stationary operation of
the power takeoff, if equipped. This position places
the transmission in neutral and engages the park
pawl of the transmission.
NOTE: This does not apply the parking brake.
PB (Auto-Apply Parking Brake, optional

on 2000 Series)
Do not idle in reverse for more than 5 minutes. Select P (park), PB (auto-apply parking brake), or N
(neutral) when time at idle exceeds 5 minutes.
NOTE: The shift into reverse may not succeed if

a range inhibitor is active. Check for illumination
of the RANGE INHIBIT indicator.
N (Neutral)
The neutral position places the transmission in neutral. This position is used when starting the engine
and for stationary operation.
WARNING
Failure to apply the vehicle parking brakes when
the transmission is in neutral may allow the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly causing
property damage or personal injury.
When neutral is selected, the vehicle service brakes,
parking brake, or emergency brake must be applied.
Selecting neutral does not apply vehicle brakes unless an auxiliary system to apply the parking brake is
installed.
WARNING
Do not coast in neutral. Coasting in neutral can
cause an accident, possibly resulting in severe
personal injury or death.
Do not let the vehicle coast in neutral. If the vehicle
is allowed to coast in neutral, the engine brake will
not work and you could lose control of the vehicle.
CAUTION
The auto-apply parking brake places the transmission in neutral and applies the parking brake.
Coasting in neutral can cause severe transmission damage.
R (Reverse)
Reverse is used to back the vehicle. When the selector is in reverse, the reverse warning signal will
sound. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop
before shifting from a forward range to reverse, or
from reverse to a forward range.
CAUTION
Extended idling in reverse may cause transmission overheating and damage.
D (Drive)
WARNING
When going downhill, use a combination of
downshifting, braking, and other retarding devices to control vehicle speed and the engines
rated governed speed. Failure to do so could reduce vehicle braking, possibly causing loss of
vehicle control and resulting in personal injury or
property damage.
8.4
Drivetrain
In the drive position, the transmission will initially go

into first range when drive is selected. As vehicle
speed increases, the transmission will upshift automatically through each available range up to fourth
range or fifth range. As the vehicle slows, the transmission will downshift automatically.
When going downhill, downshift to a lower transmission range to increase engine braking and to help
maintain control. The transmission has a feature to
prevent automatic upshifting above the lower range
selected. However, during downhill operation, the
transmission may upshift to the next higher range, if
the engine is exceeding its governed speed in the
lower range.
CAUTION
Do not idle in drive for more than 5 minutes. Extended idling in drive may cause transmission
overheating and damage. Always select PB (autoapply parking brake) or P (park) if time at idle is
longer than 5 minutes.
NOTE: The shift into drive may not succeed if a

range inhibitor is active. Check for illumination
of the RANGE INHIBIT indicator.
4 and 3 (Fourth and Third Ranges,

optional)
Use the fourth or third range for city traffic and for
braking on steep downgrades.
3 and 2 (Third and Second Ranges,

standard)
Use the third or second range for heavy city traffic
and for braking on steeper downgrades.
1 (First Range)
Use first range when pulling through mud or deep
snow, when maneuvering in tight spaces, or when
driving up or down very steep grades. First range
provides the vehicle with its maximum driving torque
and maximum engine braking effect.
NOTE: To have the transmission select these

ranges automatically, leave the selector lever in
D (drive).
8.5
Allison MD Series
Refer to the Allison website for additional information,
www.allisontransmission.com.
Safety Precautions
WARNING
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running. If you leave the vehicle and the engine is running, the vehicle can move suddenly,
which could result in personal injury or property
damage.
On vehicles with MD series transmissions, do the
following steps if you have to leave the cab with the
engine running (for example, when checking the
transmission fluid):
1.

service brake.
2.
Put the transmission in N (neutral).
3.
Ensure that the engine is at low idle (500 to 800

rpm).
4.
Apply the parking brake and emergency brakes,

and make sure they are properly engaged.
5.

Operating Instructions, MD Series

The Allison MD transmission is electronically controlled and comes with a push-button shift control
that provides five or six forward ranges and one reverse range. The push-button shift selector has an R
(reverse), an N (neutral), a D (drive), an up arrow, a
down arrow, a mode button, and a digital display.
New shift controls known as "fourth generation"
were introduced in mid-2006. They replaced the previous units that are commonly referred to as "WTEC
III". See Fig. 8.1 and Fig. 8.2.
R (Reverse)
Press the R button to select reverse. The digital display will show R when reverse is selected. Always
bring the vehicle to a complete stop and let the engine return to idle before shifting from a forward
range to reverse, or from reverse to a forward range.
Drivetrain
NOTE: The shift into reverse may not succeed if

a range inhibitor is active. When reverse is selected, always be sure that R is not flashing.
N (Neutral)
WARNING
N
D
f270113
07/27/2006
1. Digital Display
2. Mode Identification
Label
3. Mode Indicator LED

4. Mode Button
Fig. 8.1, WTEC III Push-Button Shift Selector
When starting the engine, make sure that the service brakes are applied. Failure to apply the service brakes may result in unexpected vehicle
movement, which could cause severe personal
injury or death. Failure to apply the vehicle parking brakes when the transmission is in neutral
may allow the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly causing property damage or personal injury.
Press the N button to select neutral. The digital display will display N when neutral is selected. It is not
necessary to press neutral before starting the vehicle. The ECU (electronic control unit) or TCM
(transmission control module) automatically places
the transmission in neutral at start-up.
WARNING
2
3
Failure to apply the vehicle parking brakes when

the transmission is in neutral may allow the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly causing
property damage or personal injury.
When neutral is selected, the vehicle service brakes,

parking brake, or emergency brake must be applied.
Selecting neutral does not apply vehicle brakes unless an auxiliary system to apply the parking brake is
installed.
f610804
07/27/2006
1. Digital Display
2. Mode Identification
Label
3. Mode Indicator LED

4. Mode Button
Fig. 8.2, Fourth Generation Push-Button Shift Selector
CAUTION
Extended idling in reverse may cause transmission overheating and damage.
Do not idle in reverse for more than 5 minutes. Select neutral when time at idle exceeds 5 minutes.
WARNING
Do not let the vehicle coast in neutral. If the vehicle
is allowed to coast in neutral, the engine brake will
not work and you could lose control of the vehicle.
Always select neutral before turning off the engine.
Neutral is also used during stationary operation of
the power takeoff if your vehicle is equipped with a
PTO.
8.6
Drivetrain
D (Drive)
When the D button is pushed, the highest forward
range will appear in the display. The transmission will
normally go into first range when drive is selected
(except for those units programmed to start in second range). As vehicle speed increases, the transmission will upshift automatically through each range.
As the vehicle slows, the transmission will downshift
automatically.
CAUTION
Do not idle in drive for more than 5 minutes. Extended idling in drive may cause transmission
overheating and damage. Always select neutral if
time at idle is longer than 5 minutes.
NOTE: The shift into drive may not succeed if a

range inhibitor is active. When drive is selected,
always be sure that D is not flashing.
5, 4, 3, and 2 (Fifth, Fourth, Third, and

Second Ranges)
Occasionally, road conditions, load, or traffic conditions will make it desirable to restrict automatic shifting to a lower range. Lower ranges provide greater
braking for going down grades. The lower the range,
the greater the braking effect.
Push the up or down arrows on the push-button shift
selector to select individual forward ranges. The digital display will display your choice of range. When a
lower range is selected, the transmission may not
downshift until the vehicle speed or engine RPM (engine governed speed) is reduced.
WARNING
When going downhill, use a combination of
downshifting, braking, and other retarding devices to control vehicle speed and the engines
rated governed speed. Failure to do so could reduce vehicle braking, possibly causing loss of
vehicle control and resulting in personal injury or
property damage.
When going downhill, downshift to a lower transmission range to increase engine braking and to help
maintain control. The transmission has a feature to
prevent automatic upshifting above the lower range
selected. However, during downhill operation, if the
8.7
engine governed speed is exceeded in the lower

range, the transmission may upshift to the next
higher range.
1 (First Range)
Use the first range when pulling through mud or
deep snow, when maneuvering in tight spaces, or
when driving up or down steep grades. First range
provides the vehicle with its maximum driving torque
and maximum engine braking effect. Push the down
arrow until the first range appears on the display.
Up and Down Arrows

When a lower range is desired, after D has been
pressed, press the down arrow until the desired
range is shown on the display. Pressing the down
arrow continuously causes the range position to continue to go down until the button is released or the
lowest range is attained.
When the transmission is in drive and the down
arrow has the transmission in a lower range position,
press the up arrow to shift to a higher selector position. Pressing the up arrow continuously causes the
range position to continue to rise until the button is
released or the highest available position is attained.
Pressing the up or down arrows does not override
the transmission automatic shifting operation. If a
higher or lower position is selected, the transmission
continues shifting through the ranges according to
the vehicle operating characteristics until the highest
or lowest selected position is reached.
Mode Button
The MODE button starts a specialized input or output
function that has been previously programmed into
the ECU or TCM. Pressing the MODE button
changes transmission operation for a specific function.
Mode Indicator LED

When the MODE button is pressed, the mode indicator LED illuminates. A mode identification label, located above the MODE button, identifies the function
associated with a mode change.
Drivetrain
Digital Display
General Information, Straight-Shift
The dual digital display shows both the selected

range (SELECT) and actual range attained (MONITOR). The single digital display shows the selected
range.
Eaton Fuller 5-speed FS models are fully synchronized. They have five forward speeds and one reverse. See Fig. 8.3 for the shift pattern.
Oil Level Sensor

R
Allison MD Series transmissions have an electronic

oil level sensor to read fluid level information. The
fluid level diagnostic will display whether the oil level
is OK, too low, or too high. It will also display a default code and indicate if the preconditions (of receiving the fluid level information) are not met.
IMPORTANT: Maintain the the proper fluid level

at all times. If the fluid level is too low, the converter and clutch do not receive an adequate
supply of fluid. If the level is too high, the transmission may shift erratically or overheat.
To access the oil level display mode, park the vehicle
on a level surface, shift to N (Neutral), apply the
parking brake, and idle the engine. Then simultaneously press both the up and down arrows once.
The oil level will display at the end of a two-minute
countdown.
NOTE: During normal operation, an illuminated

mode indicator LED signifies the specialized
mode operation is in use.
To enter diagnostics mode, first park the vehicle and
apply the parking brake. Then simultaneously press
both the up and down arrows twice.
Eaton Fuller Straight-Shift

Transmissions
Refer to the Eaton website for additional information,
www.roadranger.com.
5
f261049
05/21/2008
Fig. 8.3, Shift Pattern, 5-Speed FS Models
Eaton Fuller 6-speed FS and FSO models are fully

synchronized. They have six forward speeds and one
reverse. See Fig. 8.4 for the shift pattern.
Diagnostic Codes
Diagnostic codes are numerical indications relating to
a malfunction in transmission operation. These codes
are logged in the TCM/ECU memory. The most severe or most recent code is listed first. A maximum of
five codes (numbered d1-d5) may be listed in
memory at one time. If the mode indicator LED is
illuminated, the displayed code is active. If it is not
illuminated, the displayed code is not active.
N
2
05/21/2008
f261048
Fig. 8.4, Shift Pattern, 6-Speed FS and FSO Models
Eaton Fuller 7-speed T models are not synchronized.

They have seven forward speeds and one reverse.
See Fig. 8.5 for the shift pattern.
These transmissions are designed for use with onhighway, fuel economy engines where a minimum of
shifting is desired and less gear reduction is acceptable.
Operation, Straight-Shift
1.
Always use first gear when starting to move the

vehicle forward.
IMPORTANT: Do not rest your foot on the clutch

pedal while driving. This causes partial clutch
8.8
Drivetrain
4.2
On synchronized models, disengage the

clutch and move the shift lever to the next
lower gear.
On unsynchronized models, disengage the

clutch and move the shift lever to neutral.
Engage the clutch again. With the shift
lever in neutral, disengage the clutch and
move the shift lever to the next lowest
gear.
N
1
f261051
05/21/2008
Fig. 8.5, Shift Pattern, 7-Speed T Models
disengagement which could cause premature

clutch wear.
2.
Use the sequence described above to

shift progressively down through each
successive lower gear, as driving conditions require.
On unsynchronized models, press the clutch

pedal to the floor to contact the clutch brake only
when engaging the first or reverse gears.

www.roadranger.com.
To upshift, do the following steps:

3.1
Accelerate to engine governed speed.
3.2
On synchronized models, disengage the

clutch and move the shift lever to second
gear.
3.3
3.4
Engage the clutch and note the drop in

engine rpm before accelerating up to engine governed speed again.
Continue upshifting using the same sequence described in the previous step.
Follow the pattern on the shift lever.
To downshift, do the following steps:

4.1
8.9
4.4
Eaton Fuller Range-Shift

Transmissions
On unsynchronized models, disengage the

clutch and move the shift lever to neutral.
Engage the clutch again. With the shift
lever in neutral, disengage the clutch and
move the shift lever to second gear.
4.
Engage the clutch smoothly.
On synchronized models, press the clutch pedal

to the floor when shifting gears. Double-clutching
is unnecessary.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving when shifting,

press the clutch pedal just far enough to disengage the clutch. Pressing it to the floor will engage the clutch brake, if so equipped, causing
premature clutch brake wear.
3.
4.3
Wait until the engine speed drops to the

rpm noted immediately after the upshift.
General Information, Range-Shift

Eaton Fuller 9-Speed Models
Eaton Fuller 9-speed range-shift models are not synchronized. They have nine forward speeds and two
reverse speeds. The shift lever controls five forward
gears and one reverse gear in the transmission front
section, and the range lever controls a LO and HI
range in the two-speed auxiliary section. The first
position in the front section is used only as a starting
gear. The other four ratios are used once in LO
range and once again in HI range. See Fig. 8.6 for
the shift patterns.
After shifting out of the first gear position, use the
Roadranger "repeat H" shift pattern. Select both LO
range and HI range with the range lever (range
knob). It is used once during the upshift sequence
and once during the downshift sequence.
Always preselect the range shift. After preselection,
the transmission will automatically make the synchronizer range shift as the shift lever passes through
neutral.
Eaton Fuller 10-Speed Models

Eaton Fuller 10-speed range-shift models are not
synchronized. They have ten forward speeds and
Drivetrain
HI
7
3
5
1
LO
9-Speed
Direct or
Overdrive
11/23/99
Move the range lever up for HI range, down for LO

range.
7
2
9
4
A
N
6
1
8
3
10
5
f260323
f260329
4
5
f260324
7
8
f260329
9
10
f260330
When downshifting, the driver preselects the range

lever for LO range and the range shift occurs automatically during the shift lever movement to the next
gear position.
Eaton Fuller Deep-Reduction Models

Eaton Fuller deep-reduction models are not synchronized. They have a five-speed front section and a
two-speed auxiliary section which has an extra deep
reduction gear. The LO gear in the front section is
used only as a starting gear. The other four ratios
are used once in LOW RANGE and once in HIGH
RANGE giving eight highway ratios. LO-LO is selected by the DEEP REDUCTION lever on the dashboard. See Fig. 8.8 for the shift pattern.
R R
R
f261053
12/15/1999
A. HI Range
Table 8.1, Eaton Fuller Shift Progressions
two reverse speeds. The shift lever controls five forward gears and one reverse gear in the transmission
front section, and the range lever controls a LO and
HI range in the two-speed auxiliary section. The five
forward gears selected in LO range are used again
in HI range to provide the 10 progressive forward
gears. See Fig. 8.7 for the shift patterns. See
Table 8.1 for the shift progressions.
HI
10-Speed
Direct or
Overdrive
B. LO Range
Fig. 8.6, Shift Pattern, 9-Speed Models
LO
LOW
f260322
f261047
A. HI Range
8
4
6
2
LO
Model
Eaton Fuller Shift Progressions

LO Range
HI Range
Off-Highway On-Highway
7
3
B. LO Range
LO
Fig. 8.7, Shift Pattern, 10-Speed Models
LOLO
Once the highest shift lever position (fifth gear) is

reached in LO range, the driver preselects the range
shift lever for HI range. The range shift occurs automatically as the shift lever is moved from fifth gear
position to the sixth gear position.
5
1
6
2
8
4
f260123a
03/12/96
Fig. 8.8, Shift Pattern, Deep Reduction
Operation, Range-Shift
1.
When operating off-highway or under adverse

conditions, always use low gear when starting to
move the vehicle.
8.10
Drivetrain
When operating on-highway, with no load or

under ideal conditions, use first gear when starting to move the vehicle.
5.
While in the top gear of the low-range shift pattern and ready for the next upshift, flip the range
preselection lever up into high range. Doubleclutch through neutral and shift into the bottom
gear in high range. As the shift lever passes
through neutral, the transmission will automatically shift from low range to high range.
6.
With the transmission in high range, shift progressively up through each of the high range
gears, double-clutching between shifts.
For all conditions, use the highest gear that is

still low enough to start the vehicle moving with
the engine idling and without excessively slipping
the clutch.
2.
Use the clutch brake to stop gear rotation when

shifting into low (or first) or reverse when the vehicle is stationary. The clutch brake is applied by
pressing the clutch pedal all the way to the floor.
Downshifting
For normal upshifts and downshifts, only a partial

disengagement of the clutch is necessary to
break engine torque.
1.
With the transmission in high range, shift progressively down to the bottom gear in high
range, double-clutching between shifts.
3.
Do not make range shifts with the vehicle moving

in reverse gear.
2.
4.
Never attempt to move the range preselection

lever with the gear shift lever in neutral while the
vehicle is moving. Preselection with the range
preselection lever must be made prior to moving
the shift lever out of gear into neutral.
5.
Do not shift from high range to low range at high

vehicle speeds.
When in the bottom gear of the high-range shift

pattern and ready for the next downshift, push
the range preselection lever down into low range.
Double-clutch through neutral and shift into the
top gear of the low-range shift pattern. As the
shift lever passes through neutral, the transmission will automatically shift from high range to
low range.
3.
With the transmission in low range, downshift

through the low range gears as conditions require.
6.
Use double-clutching between all upshifts and

downshifts.
7.
After your shifting ability improves, you may want

to skip some of the ratios. This may be done
only when operating conditions such as load,
grade, and road speed permit.
Upshifting
Never use the clutch brake when downshifting or

as a brake to slow the vehicle.
Operation, Deep-Reduction Models

Upshifting
1.
Position the gear shift lever in neutral. See

Fig. 8.8 for the shift pattern. Start the engine,
and bring the air system pressure up to 95 to
125 psi (655 to 862 kPa).
Position the range preselection lever down into

low range.
2.
Position the range preselection lever down, into

low range.
3.
Press the clutch pedal to the floor. Shift into low

or first gear, then engage the clutch with the engine at or near idle speed to start the vehicle
moving. Accelerate to 80 percent of engine governed speed.
NOTE: If conditions are difficult, start out in LOLO. Move the DEEP REDUCTION lever on the
dashboard to the IN position. Otherwise start
out in LO with the DEEP REDUCTION lever in
the OUT position.
4.
Shift progressively up from low or 1st gear to the

top gear in low range, double-clutching between
shifts and accelerating to 80 percent of engine
governed speed.
1.
Position the gear shift lever in neutral. Start the

engine and bring the air system pressure up to
100 to 120 psi (689 to 827 kPa).
2.
8.11
Drivetrain
3.
Depress the clutch pedal to the floor. Shift into

LO gear; then, engage the clutch, with the engine at or near idle rpm to start the vehicle moving. The vehicle will start in LO or LO-LO depending on the DEEP REDUCTION lever
position.
4.
To upshift if in LO-LO, move the DEEP REDUCTION lever to the OUT position and immediately
release the accelerator, depress the clutch pedal
once to break torque, and reengage the clutch.
The auxiliary section will shift from LO-LO to LO
when the gears reach the same speed.
5.
6.
Shift progressively upward from LO through 1st,

2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears while the range preselection lever is in LO. Always double-clutch between gears.
When in 4th gear and ready for the next upshift,
pull up the range preselection lever and move
the shift lever, double-clutching, to the 5th gear
position. As the shift lever passes through neutral, the auxiliary section will automatically shift
from low to high range.
CAUTION
Never move the shift lever into the LO gear position after high range preselection or anytime the
auxiliary section is in high range. Transmission
damage could result.
7.
Continue upshifting from 5th gear through 8th

gear, always double-clutching between gears.
Downshifting
1.
While in high range, move the gear shift lever

from 8th gear through 5th gear as conditions require, always double-clutching between gears.
2.
When in 5th gear and ready for the next downshift, push down the range preselection lever and
move the shift lever to the 4th gear position,
being sure to double-clutch. As the shift lever
passes through neutral, the auxiliary section will
automatically shift from high to low range.
3.
4.
While in the low range, continue downshifting

from 4th through LO as conditions require, always double-clutching between gears.
Do not downshift into LO-LO from LO unless operating conditions make it necessary. If it is necessary, make sure that the shift lever is in the LO
gear position and the auxiliary section is in the

low range. Then, move the DEEP REDUCTION
lever on the dashboard to the IN position. Immediately release the accelerator, depress the
clutch pedal once to break torque, engage the
clutch, and accelerate. The auxiliary section will
automatically shift from LO to LO-LO when the
gears reach the same speed.
CAUTION
Never use the clutch brake when downshifting, or
as a brake to slow the vehicle. This will cause
premature clutch brake wear.
Eaton Fuller AutoShift

www.roadranger.com.
IMPORTANT: Before starting the vehicle, always

do the following:
Be seated in the drivers seat.
Place the transmission in neutral.
Set the parking brakes.
Press the clutch pedal (if equipped) down to
the floor.
The AutoShift ASW is an automated 6-speed Eaton
Fuller transmission. No clutch is necessary to operate the vehicle.
The AutoShift AS2 is a partially automated 10-speed
Eaton Fuller transmission. The driver must use the
clutch and put the transmission in neutral to start and
stop the vehicle. A push-button shift selector
(Fig. 8.9) is used with AutoShift AS2 and ASW
transmissions.
IMPORTANT: If you have to leave the cab with

the engine running:
Chock the tires.
Push-Button Shift Selector

Gear information is presented to the driver on the
push-button shift selector, usually mounted on the
8.12
Drivetrain
To select low gear, press the LOW button.
When low is engaged, the telltale LED will light

up next to the LOW button.
10
9
2
To change gears manually, press the MANUAL
button. When the manual mode is engaged,

the telltale LED will light up next to the
MANUAL button.
Use the shift buttons (upshift/downshift) to
change the current starting gear selection in R,

D, and LOW. In MANUAL, the shift buttons can
be used to select gears.
In automatic mode, the number of the forward
5
7
6
11/14/2001
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Not Used
R (reverse)
N (neutral)
D (drive)
MANUAL Mode
Low Gear Hold
If the SERVICE indicator illuminates, take the
vehicle as soon as possible to an authorized

Freightliner service facility.
The mode button is reserved for future use.
IMPORTANT: To prevent engine overspeed, the

transmission software will override both
MANUAL and LOW if necessary. The system
will not respond to gear selection requests that
will either overspeed or excessively lug the
engine.
f261145
7. Upshift/Downshift
Arrows
8. SERVICE Light
9. Mode Indicator
10. Mode Button
Fig. 8.9, Eaton Push-Button Shift Selector
right-hand control panel. On this display, the information is presented as follows:

To select neutral, press the N button. When
neutral is engaged, the telltale LED will light up

next to the N button.
To select reverse, press the R button. When
reverse is engaged, the telltale LED will light

up next to the R button.
To select drive, press the D button. When drive
is engaged, the telltale LED will light up next to

the D button.
8.13
gear currently engaged appears continually on

the mode indicator when in drive. In MANUAL,
the last gear selected appears on the mode
indicator.
Automatic Mode
The AutoShift AS2 transmission is normally operated
in an automatic mode. To select MANUAL mode,
press the MANUAL button on the push-button shift
selector.
When the transmission is in automatic mode, the
transmission automatically selects and engages the
gears, although the transmission will respond to upshift and downshift requests as though in manual
mode. See the instructions for shifting under heading
"Manual Mode" below.
Manual Mode
When the transmission is in manual mode, the driver
must select the appropriate gear, using the shift buttons on the push-button shift selector.
Drivetrain
To upshift in MANUAL, press the upshift button (up

arrow), and release. The number of the gear will appear on the mode indicator. If the requested gear is
available, the transmission will shift up.
NOTE: Neutral is always available during vehicle operation. When in neutral, requests to
upshift or to downshift are ignored.
D (Drive)
CAUTION
Do not attempt to upshift until the vehicle has
reached a sufficient speed. The clutch absorbs
the speed difference by generating heat, which
causes the clutch to wear out too soon.
Many drivers upshift into the next gear or even skipshift into a higher gear before the vehicle has
reached the correct speed. This type of shifting is
almost as bad as starting off in a gear that is too
high. When the engine speed (rpm) and the vehicle
speed (mph or km/h) are too far apart, the clutch
must absorb the difference in speed by generating
heat.
To downshift in MANUAL, press the downshift button
(down arrow), and release. The number of the gear
will appear on the mode indicator. If the requested
gear is available, the transmission will shift down.
If any requested gear is not available, an audible
warning will sound and the digital display will indicate
that the gear is not available.
Selecting Gears
R (Reverse)
Reverse (R) is used to back the vehicle. Make sure
the vehicle comes to a full stop and the clutch pedal
has been pressed before shifting into reverse.
Drive (D) is used for normal highway driving. In drive,

the transmission shifts into the proper gear for starting, and then automatically selects additional gears
as needed, in a range between the starting gear and
the highest gear.
To select drive, press the clutch pedal to the floor.
Then press the D button. Slowly release the clutch
pedal and drive the vehicle.
To start up in a gear other than the normal starting
gear, push the upshift arrow with D selected, and
while the vehicle is stopped.
IMPORTANT: AutoShift will not start up in any

gear higher than third gear.
The number of the gear selected will flash on the
auxiliary display until the driver presses the clutch
pedal. This gear will be stored in memory as the default starting gear until a different starting gear is selected by the driver, or until the engine is shut down.
NOTE: The transmission may be programmed

so that it is not possible to select a starting gear
other than the preprogrammed starting gear.
L (Low)
N (Neutral)
LOW is used to hold the transmission in low gear

when descending steep hills. If LOW is selected
when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission remains in low gear until drive is selected. If LOW is
selected while the vehicle is moving, the transmission downshifts at a higher engine speed than normal, in order to maximize the engine braking effect.
Neutral (N) is used for starting, parking, or any stationary operation. No gear is selected. The transmission must be in neutral to start the engine.
To select LOW, press the clutch pedal to the floor.

Then press the LOW button. Slowly release the
clutch pedal and drive the vehicle.
IMPORTANT: If the vehicle starts up in any gear

but neutral, bring the vehicle to an authorized
Freightliner service facility as soon as possible.
IMPORTANT: Before parking the vehicle, always

do the following:
To select reverse, press the clutch pedal to the floor.

Then press the R button.
To select neutral, press the clutch pedal to the floor.

Then press the N button. Set the parking brakes and
slowly release the clutch pedal.

Chock the tires, if parking on an incline.
8.14
Drivetrain
Freightliner SmartShift Shift

Control
The SmartShift transmission control is an electronic

transmission control device. It is installed with the
following transmissions:
Eaton Fuller UltraShift
SmartShift accepts driver requests for transmission

functions and transmits them through hard wiring to
the transmission control unit (TCU). SmartShift is a
true shift-by-wire system.
SmartShift offers two main advantages over conventional transmission control devices. Without a floormounted shift control, usable cab space is increased.
The SmartShift control mounts to the right-hand side
of the steering column and is operated by the fingers
of the drivers right hand, allowing both hands to remain on the steering wheel.
A two-position slide switch (Fig. 8.10) is mounted on
the body of the control lever just before the paddle
widens out. The slide switch allows the driver to
choose automatic (AUTO) or manual (MAN) mode.
In AUTO mode, gears shift automatically, without
driver interaction. Manual gearshifts are accomplished by a momentary pull or push on the control in
the plane perpendicular to the steering wheel. Pull
upward (toward you) on the control to upshift and
push downward (away from you) to downshift. The
control is spring-loaded and returns to mid-position
when released after an upshift or downshift.
For Eaton Fuller UltraShift (Fig. 8.10), a four-position
(R, N, D, L) selector switch is located at the end of
the lever. For the Mercedes-Benz AGS (Fig. 8.11), a
three-position (R, N, D) selector switch is located at
the end of the lever.
Embedded in the selector switch is a small neutral
lock button to prevent accidental shifts into gear from
neutral. Any time you shift through N, press down on
the neutral lock button to move the switch from neutral (N) to another gear, such as drive (D), low (L), or
reverse (R). When shifting to N, it is not necessary to
press the neutral lock button.
8.15
9
2
10
11
Mercedes-Benz Automated Gear Shift (AGS)
It replaces the typical floor-mounted shift lever or

dash-mounted push button control.
General Information, SmartShift
01/24/2003
12
f270120
To upshift manually, pull the lever up (towards you). To

downshift manually, push the lever down (away from
you).
1. SmartShift Control Lever
2. Slide Switch (forward driving mode switch)
3. MAN Mode (of slide switch)
4. AUTO Mode (of slide switch)
5. Upshift Direction
6. Reverse Position (of selector switch)
7. Selector Switch
8. Neutral Lock Button
9. Neutral Position (of selector switch)
10. Drive Position (of selector switch)
11. Low Position (of selector switch)
12. Downshift Direction
Fig. 8.10, SmartShift Control (with Eaton Fuller
UltraShift)
Eaton Fuller UltraShift

The Eaton Fuller UltraShift transmission uses the
four-position SmartShift control lever on the steering
column to change gears, combined with a gear indicator on the right-hand control panel as shown in
Fig. 8.12. All forward shifts can be made either
manually or automatically, at the drivers choice. No
clutch pedal is required to operate the vehicle.
General Information, UltraShift ASW

UltraShift ASW is a six-speed medium-duty fully automated transmission used on the M106 only. Sixspeed UltraShift ASW uses a "wet" clutch system in
which the drive and driven discs rotate in a bath of
transmission fluid (Dexron III).
General Information, UltraShift DM

UltraShift DM is a ten-speed heavy-duty fullyautomated transmission used on the M112 only. Tenspeed UltraShift DM uses a dry clutch system which
Drivetrain
is offered only on this automated transmission system.
Operation, UltraShift
Power Up
9
2
10
11
11/11/2002
f270080
To upshift manually, pull the lever up (towards you). To

downshift manually, push the lever down (away from
you).
1. SmartShift Control Lever
2. Slide Switch
3. MAN Position (of slide switch)
4. AUTO Position (of slide switch)
5. Upshift Direction
6. Reverse Position (of selector switch)
7. Selector Switch
8. Neutral Lock Button
9. Neutral Position (of selector switch)
10. Drive Position (of selector switch)
11. Downshift Direction
NOTE: These operating instructions apply

equally to six-speed UltraShift ASW and tenspeed UltraShift DM, with the exceptions explained below.
1.
With the parking brake set, select neutral (N) by

moving the selector switch to the N position.
2.
With the transmission in neutral, turn on the ignition switch. The "CHECK TRANS" and "TRANS
TEMP" telltale lights come on and go out again
(bulb check). See Fig. 8.13.
1
CHECK
TRANS
TRANS
TEMP
BRAKE
Fig. 8.11, SmartShift Control (with Mercedes-Benz AGS)
1
10/27/2003
f610677
1. "CHECK TRANS" Light

2. "TRANS TEMP" Light
Fig. 8.13, Telltale Lights, UltraShift Transmission
10/13/2003
3.
After the ignition is turned on, the current gear

indicator shows the dot display, arranged in a
square pattern. All dots in the pattern should light
up, without gaps or spaces. See Fig. 8.14.
4.
Wait for the current gear indicator to show a solid

"N." When the "N" is solid, rather than flashing,
the UltraShift transmission control unit (TCU) is
powered up. Apply the service brake and start
the engine.
5.
Select drive (D) by pressing in the neutral lock

button and moving the selector switch downward
to the position below neutral. Release the parking brake. The gear is displayed on the current
gear indicator.
f270079
To know what gear the transmission is in, look at the

current gear indicator.
1. Gear Indicator
2. SmartShift Control
Fig. 8.12, Shift Controls and Indicators, UltraShift
Transmissions
8.16
Drivetrain
On steep hills, set the parking brake.

When parking, chock the tires, front and/or
rear. Never hold a hill with the throttle
pedal. This will cause the clutch to overheat.
Power Down
f610678
10/13/2003
Fig. 8.14, Power-Up Dot Display
NOTE: When D is selected, the transmission

controller starts up in second gear. On both sixspeed Ultrashift ASW and ten-speed Ultrashift
DM, the driver can select to start up in first. No
other start gear is available.
6.
On a level grade, release the service brake and

press down on the throttle pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward.
1.
Apply the service brake.
2.
Select neutral (N) by moving the selector switch

to the N position. When the "N" on the gear indicator is solid, rather than flashing, the UltraShift
TCU is ready to power down. See Fig. 8.13.
3.
With the transmission in neutral, set the parking

brake.
4.
Turn off the ignition key and shut down the engine.
Automatic and Manual Modes

The SmartShift control has a slide switch located on
the body of the control lever just before the paddle
widens out. See Fig. 8.15. The slide switch controls
the forward driving mode, automatic or manual.
WARNING
When starting or stopping on hills and grades,
use extra care to prevent the vehicle from rolling
back. A rollback accident could cause death, serious personal injury, or property damage.
7.
7.1
8.17
To start from a full stop on a hill or grade,

quickly move your foot from the brake
pedal and press firmly on the throttle
pedal.
On steep hills, set the parking brake and
release it only when there is enough engine power to prevent rollback.
7.2
Prevent the vehicle from rolling backward when

stopped on a hill or grade, or when the vehicle is
starting from a stop on a hill or grade.
To stop on a hill or grade, press and hold

the brake pedal to keep the vehicle from
moving.
01/21/2004
f270079c
1. Slide Switch (controls forward driving mode)

2. Selector Switch (controls gear selection)
3. Neutral Lock Button (prevents accidental shift into
gear)
Fig. 8.15, Switches, Ultrashift Transmission
Drivetrain
To change mode at any time, move the slide switch

in the desired direction. This allows the driver to respond to a wide range of driving conditions, such as
blind corners, tight curves, and steep hills.
IMPORTANT: Whatever the mode, it is always

possible to shift manually by moving the lever
up or down as needed. When the engine speed
is within 75 revolutions per minute (rpm) of the
load-based shift point for an automatic shift, the
UltraShift TCU will advance the shift.
In either mode, the gear indicator displays the current gear. See Fig. 8.16.
shift if the engine speed is within 75 rpm of the loadbased shift point for that gear.
If the driver presses down on the throttle pedal after
a manual downshift in automatic mode, the transmission will upshift again if the UltraShift TCU requires
it.
Manual Mode (MAN)

In manual drive mode (MAN), upshifts and downshifts are made by the driver:
To shift up, pull the lever up (towards you).
To shift down, push the lever down (away from
you).
The system will hold the current gear until the driver
requests a shift. In downhill situations in particular,
the driver must be alert to vehicle speed by downshifting and/or using the service brake.
A shift request will still be refused if the selected gear
would cause engine overspeed or excessive lugging.
Selecting Gears
Reverse
f610680
10/13/2003
NOTE: The gear indicator displays the current gear. In

this example, it displays first gear.
Fig. 8.16, Current Gear Display
At the start of a shift, the current gear continues to

display until the transmission has been pulled into
neutral. At this point, as the transmission is synchronizing for the new (target) gear, the gear indicator
flashes the number of the new gear.
Reverse (R) is at the upper end of the four-position

selector switch located at the end of the SmartShift
control lever. To select R, press in the neutral lock
button and move the selector switch upward to the
position above neutral.
Six-speed UltraShift ASW has one reverse gear.
When reverse is selected, the letter "R" displays on
the gear indicator. See Fig. 8.17.
When the shift is complete, the new gear displays

solid, without flashing.
Automatic Mode (AUTO)

In automatic drive mode (AUTO), upshifts and downshifts are made by the transmission without driver
intervention. Press in the neutral lock button, move
the selector switch to drive (D), and press down on
the throttle pedal. The transmission will shift automatically.
If driving conditions require, it is still possible to request a manual shift. The transmission will make the
f610681
10/14/2003
Fig. 8.17, Reverse Gear Display
8.18
Drivetrain
Ten-speed UltraShift DM has two reverse gears, reverse low and reverse high. To shift manually between them, use the shift lever as described for MAN
mode. There is no AUTO mode for reverse.
When reverse low is selected, the letter "R" displays
on the current gear indicator. When reverse high is
selected, the letter "H" displays on the current gear
indicator.
IMPORTANT: Under normal conditions, do not

select reverse with the vehicle moving forward.
The vehicle must be moving at less than two miles
per hour (3 km/h) before selecting reverse. If reverse
is selected when the vehicle is moving faster, an audible alert will sound and continue sounding at threesecond intervals until the control lever is returned to
the D position. When the vehicle is moving at the
proper speed, reverse can be engaged.
On ten-speed UltraShift DM only, if necessary to rock
the vehicle, use the selector switch to shift back and
forth at low speed between reverse and drive.
Neutral
IMPORTANT: Always start the engine with the
transmission in neutral, the parking brake set,
and the service brakes applied.
Neutral (N) is directly below R on the four-position
control lever. To select N, move the selector switch to
the position below R. When neutral is selected, the
letter "N" displays on the gear indicator. See
Fig. 8.18.
WARNING
Neutral is always available during operation, whatever the vehicle speed. When in neutral, requests to
upshift or downshift are ignored. If the selector switch
is moved from neutral to drive while the vehicle is
moving, the transmission will shift into a gear within
the engines operating speed range.
When shifting from neutral, always press on the
brake pedal. If the brake pedal is not pressed, the
transmission will not shift, the current gear display
will flash "N," and an audible alert will sound.
NOTE: To reset the transmission, return the selector switch on the SmartShift lever to N and
attempt the shift again, this time with the brake
pedal pressed.
Before shutting down the engine, return the selector
switch to "N." When the ignition is turned off, the
transmission will reset to neutral in a few minutes
regardless of the position of the shift lever.
Drive
Drive (D) is directly below N on the four-position selector switch located at the end of the SmartShift
control lever. To select D, press in the neutral lock
button and move the selector switch to the position
below N. When drive is selected, the number of the
currently selected forward gear (1 through 6 on sixspeed UltraShift ASW; 1 through 10 on ten-speed
UltraShift DM) displays on the gear indicator. See
Fig. 8.16.
When in drive, requests to upshift or downshift are
enabled. Either manual or automatic mode can be
selected on the slide switch.
Two starting gears are available, first and second.
The default starting gear is second, but first can be
selected by the driver, if desired. To change the starting gear, press the brake pedal and select D with the
vehicle stopped. The current gear indicator will display the starting gear. Move the shift lever up or
down until the desired starting gear is displayed.
f610679
10/13/2003
Fig. 8.18, Neutral Display
8.19
The UltraShift TCU adapts to the working conditions

of each vehicle and its driver. After power-up or a
load change, it needs to learn the new conditions.
Drivetrain
While learning, it may hold a gear too long before

upshifting. Start the upshift manually. It may take
three or four shifts before UltraShift succeeds in
learning the new load-based shift points, but after
that it will handle the shifting automatically.
Low
Low (L) is located at the lower end of the fourposition selector switch located at the end of the
SmartShift control lever. To select L, press in the
neutral lock button and move the selector switch to
the position below D.
When in low, the current gear is maintained. Requests to upshift are not enabled.
IMPORTANT: If the engine is approaching overspeed, the UltraShift TCU will override the current gear setting and upshift to prevent engine
damage.
To enhance engine braking, downshifts are performed at higher rpm than normal.
If L is selected from neutral while stopped, the vehicle starts up in first gear and stays there until the
engine approaches overspeed.
Upshifting
To request an upshift with the transmission in drive,
pull the control lever up (towards you). If the gear is
available, the transmission upshifts and the new gear
displays on the gear indicator. No skip shifts are
available while upshifting.
No upshifts are available in low, except to prevent
engine overspeed.
If the transmission does not upshift quickly enough
after power-up or a load change, begin the shift
manually. The UltraShift TCU will learn the new loadbased shift conditions after three or four shifts.
If the gear requested is unavailable, a tone will
sound. An unavailable request to upshift is not stored
in memory. The upshift must be requested again.
Downshifting
NOTE: The driver can manually downshift at
any time, even when the slide switch is set to
AUTO mode.
If the gear is available, the transmission downshifts

and the new gear displays on the gear indicator. Skip
shifts are available while downshifting.
For best engine braking, select low while moving. In
low, downshifts are performed at higher rpm than in
drive.
IMPORTANT: If the engine is approaching overspeed, the UltraShift TCU will override the current gear setting and upshift to prevent engine
damage.
If the gear requested is unavailable, a tone will
sound. An unavailable request to downshift is not
stored in memory. The downshift must be requested
again.
When coasting to a stop, the UltraShift TCU may not
finish the downshift until the driver presses down on
the throttle pedal again.
IMPORTANT: A downshift request can never

result in a shift into neutral, even if the vehicle is
in the drive position in the lowest possible gear.
Before starting down a hill, slow down. Downshift to
a speed that you can control without hard pressure
on the service brakes.
Before entering a curve, slow down to a safe speed.
Downshift if necessary. This lets you use some
power through the curve to help the vehicle be more
stable on the turn. It also allows you to regain speed
faster as you come out of the curve.
UltraShift Diagnostics
Clutch Calibration
NOTE: Clutch calibration only occurs on sixspeed UltraShift ASW.
The UltraShift TCU automatically adjusts for clutch
wear. The calibration takes place whenever the following conditions are met:
The engine is at normal operating temperature
The vehicle is stopped
The engine is at idle speed
The selector switch on the control lever is in
neutral
To request a downshift with the transmission in drive

or low, push the control lever down (away from you).
8.20
Drivetrain
Calibration may take up to two minutes to complete.

The engine may slow and return to normal idle several times during calibration.
To stop calibration at any time, select one of the
drive positions on the selector switch (R, D, or L).
Clutch Protection Fault

Excessive clutch slippage creates heat and reduces
the life of the clutch. These are some conditions
which lead to clutch abuse:
Using the throttle to hold the vehicle on a
grade
Starting the vehicle in too high a gear
Overloading the vehicle
Using high idle with the vehicle in gear
The UltraShift TCU is programmed to prevent clutch

abuse. When the clutch overheats, the following
alerts take place:
The "TRANS TEMP" light comes on
The gear indicator displays "CA"
A warning tone sounds at one second intervals
The alerts continue until the clutch cools, the throttle

is released, or the clutch is fully engaged.
4.
Wait at least two minutes with the engine shut

down.
5.
Restart the engine.
If the problem continues, contact an authorized

Freightliner or Eaton service facility.
Locked In Gear
If the transmission becomes locked in gear, a dash
() will appear on the gear indicator when the vehicle
is restarted during the reset procedure.
NOTE: If the transmission becomes locked in

gear while the vehicle is moving, increased
braking effort may be required to stop the vehicle.
If the current gear indicator displays a dash during
power-up with the selector switch in neutral, do the
following steps:
1.
Make sure the parking brake is set.
2.
Turn off the ignition and wait at least two minutes.
3.
Apply the service brakes.
4.
With the service brakes applied, release the

parking brake.
5.
Make sure the selector switch is in neutral and

turn on the ignition key. Do not attempt to start
the engine at this time.
6.
If necessary to get the transmission to shift into

neutral, release the pressure on the brake pedal
slightly.
Once the UltraShift TCU reaches neutral, a solid
"N" will appear on the current gear indicator and
the vehicle will start. Make sure the service
brakes are applied and the parking brake is set.
System Problem
In the event of a problem, do the following steps:
1.
Note the driving conditions at the time the problem occurred.
2.
Record the status of the transmission at the time

of the problem (AUTO or MAN mode, gear setting R, N, D, or L, current gear, engine speed,
etc.)
7.
3.
Reset the system, using the procedure below.
If the gear indicator continues to display a dash, contact an authorized Freightliner or Eaton service facility.
Reset Procedure
Transmission operation can sometimes be restored
by doing the following reset procedure:
1.
Stop the vehicle when it is safe to do so.
2.
Place the selector switch in neutral and turn off

the ignition.
3.
Check all harness connectors as described in

Chapter 11.
8.21
Drivetrain
Mercedes-Benz Manual
Transmissions
When shifting, always press the clutch pedal all the

way down. Do not force the gear lever.
Before shifting into reverse, be sure the engine is
idling and the vehicle is not moving.
CAUTION
Operating a manual transmission with the fluid
level higher or lower than recommended can result in transmission damage.
Mercedes-Benz transmissions use a simple 6-speed
gear pattern as shown in Fig. 8.19.
N
R
05/03/2001
6
f261098
Fig. 8.19, Shift Pattern, M-B Transmissions
Always use first gear when starting to move the vehicle forward.
IMPORTANT: Do not rest your foot on the clutch

pedal while driving. This causes partial clutch
disengagement which could cause premature
clutch wear.
While traveling, check the tachometer regularly to be
sure the engine speed is within the most economical
range (1400 to 2000 rpm).
On level roads, drive in the highest usable gear,
keeping engine speed down.
CAUTION
Do not rest your hand on the gear shift lever
while driving. This can cause synchronizer damage.
When approaching an uphill grade, shift down ahead
of time to prevent loss of engine rpm. When approaching a downhill grade, shift down ahead of time
to prevent runaway speed. For information about
shift points and "progressive shifting," see Chapter 7.
CAUTION
If the transmission locks up while driving, making further shifting impossible, continue driving
in the gear already selected to reach service assistance, as circumstances allow. Or, safely park
the vehicle off the roadway and contact your
nearest Freightliner dealer or other qualified service provider for roadside assistance. To prevent
further transmission damage, do not move the
vehicle from a standing start unless this can be
accomplished safely, taking into account the gear
that is engaged and the load on the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz Automated
Transmissions
General Information, AGS
The AGS Automated Gear Shift is a fully automated
6-speed medium-duty transmission. The clutch is activated by a hydraulic system that is integral to the
transmission. No clutch pedal is needed to operate
the vehicle.
AGS transmissions use the SmartShift control lever
on the steering column to select gears. A manual
shift is possible at any time by moving the SmartShift
lever up or down as needed.
The transmission control unit (TCU) can direct all
forward shifts in response to driving conditions and
the drivers pressure on the brake and throttle pedals. To know which gear the transmission is in, look
at the round current gear indicator on the right-hand
control panel as shown in Fig. 8.12.
The TCU always selects first gear to start the vehicle
in motion. It is possible, in manual mode, to start an
unloaded or lightly loaded vehicle in second gear. In
most cases, second gear is acceptable for downhill
starts. In other situations, for best results always start
moving in first gear. Loaded vehicles, or vehicles on
substantial grades, must start moving only in first
gear.
Change gears only when absolutely necessary. Skip

gears if needed.
8.22
Drivetrain
WARNING
CAUTION
At the first sign of a transmission malfunction,
take the vehicle out of service immediately. Depending on the type of problem, further shifting
may not be possible, and driveline torque may be
interrupted.
When starting or stopping on hills and grades,

use extra care to prevent the vehicle from rolling
back. A rollback accident could cause death, serious personal injury, or property damage.
7.
Operation, AGS
Prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when

stopped on a hill or grade, or when the vehicle is
starting from a stop on a hill or grade.
Power Up
7.1
1.
With the parking brake set and/or the brake

pedal pressed down, select neutral (N) by moving the selector switch to the center position.
2.
With the transmission in neutral, turn on the ignition switch. The "CHECK TRANS" and "TRANS
TEMP" telltale lights come on and go out again
(bulb check). See Fig. 8.13.
3.
4.
NOTE: No matter what the circumstances, do

not start the engine unless the current gear indicator shows "N." See Chapter 13 for jump starting information.
5.
On steep hills, set the parking brake and

release it only when there is enough engine power to prevent rollback.
7.2
On power up, the current gear indicator shows

the dot display, arranged in a square pattern. All
dots in the pattern should light up, without gaps
or spaces. See Fig. 8.14.
When the current gear indicator shows "N," start
the engine.
Select drive (D) by pressing in the neutral lock

button and moving the selector switch downward
to the position below neutral. Release the parking brake and/or service brake pedal. The gear is
displayed on the current gear indicator.
To start from a full stop on a hill or grade,

quickly move your foot from the brake
pedal and press firmly on the throttle
pedal.
To stop on a hill or grade, press and hold

the brake pedal to keep the vehicle from
moving.
On steep hills, set the parking brake.
Never hold a hill with the throttle pedal.
This will cause the clutch to overheat.
Power Down
1.
Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2.
3.
Move the selector switch to N. Wait until "N" appears on the current gear indicator.
WARNING
NOTE: When D is selected, the transmission

starts up in first gear. To start up in second gear
(downhill start, vehicle unloaded or lightly
loaded), pull up on the SmartShift lever when
the current gear indicator displays "1."
Always apply the parking brake before shutting

down the engine. AGS will shift into neutral after
shutdown, regardless of the position of the shift
lever. If you do not set the parking brake, the vehicle could roll and cause an accident resulting
in death, serious personal injury, or property
damage.
6.
4.
Turn the ignition switch off and shut down the

engine.
5.
If the current gear indicator flashes "PB" when

the engine is shut down, set the parking brake
and move the selector switch to "N."
8.23
On a level grade, press down on the throttle

pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward. The
vehicle will not move until the pedal is depressed.
Drivetrain
Automatic and Manual Modes

The SmartShift control has a slide switch located on
the body of the lever just before the paddle widens
out. See Fig. 8.20. The slide switch controls the forward driving mode, automatic or manual.
If driving conditions require, it is still possible to request a manual shift. The transmission will make the
shift unless the selected gear would cause engine
overspeed.
If the driver presses down on the throttle pedal after
a manual downshift in automatic mode, the transmission will upshift again if the TCU requires it.
On downgrades, the transmission holds the current
gear until the driver requests a shift, or presses the
throttle pedal.
WARNING
2
01/19/2004
f270079b
1. Slide Switch (controls forward driving mode)

2. Selector Switch (controls gear selection)
3. Neutral Lock Button (prevents accidental shift into
gear)
Fig. 8.20, Switches, AGS Transmissions
To change mode at any time, move the slide switch

in the desired direction. This allows the driver to respond to a wide range of driving conditions, such as
blind corners, tight curves, and steep hills.
IMPORTANT: Whatever the mode, it is always

possible to shift manually by moving the lever
up or down as needed.
In either mode, the gear indicator displays the current gear. See Fig. 8.16.
While driving off-road or with locked differential

in AUTO mode, use extra caution. Shifts of the
AGS could interrupt power to the drive wheels,
causing a rollback accident while climbing steep
grades at low speeds. A rollback accident could
cause death, serious personal injury, or property
damage.
Manual Mode (MAN)

Manual mode may be required under certain conditions, such as:
In difficult or slippery conditions
On hills, steep grades, or other situations
where driveline torque interruption is not desirable

During off-road driving or driving with a locked
differential
In downhill driving where control of engine
braking is needed
If necessary to hold a specific gear on a down-
grade
In manual drive mode (MAN), upshifts and downshifts are made by the driver:
Automatic Mode (AUTO)
To shift up, pull the lever up (towards you).
Automatic drive mode (AUTO) is recommended for

most driving conditions. For the best fuel economy,
always use AUTO mode.
To shift down, push the lever down (away from
In AUTO mode, upshifts and downshifts are made by

the transmission without driver intervention. Press in
the neutral lock button, move the selector switch to
drive (D), and press down on the throttle pedal. The
transmission will shift automatically through the forward gears.
you).
The system will hold the current gear until the driver
requests a shift. In downhill situations in particular,
the driver must be alert to vehicle speed and maintain vehicle control by downshifting and/or using the
service brakes as needed.
8.24
Drivetrain
When braking or slowing in MAN, downshift as necessary to prevent lugging the engine when speed is
resumed. If the vehicle comes to a complete stop,
the TCU resets the transmission to neutral.
NOTE: A downshift request will be refused if the

selected gear would cause engine overspeed.
Cruise Control
Cruise control is fully functional with AGS transmission in either AUTO or MAN mode.
In AUTO, the TCU will adjust the gear selections to
maintain the speed settings as desired. No driver
action is necessary.
In MAN, the vehicle speed settings must be within
the engine speed range for the gear selected. If the
engine cannot maintain set speed due to changes in
road grade, the driver must downshift or upshift as
necessary.
For vehicles equipped with a power take-off (PTO)
unit, two modes of operation are possible, stationary
and mobile. For PTO operation, see Chapter 7.
Selecting Gears
Reverse
Reverse (R) is at the upper end of the three-position
control lever. To select reverse (R), press in the neutral lock button and move the selector switch upward
to the position above neutral. When reverse is selected, the letter "R" displays on the gear indicator.
See Fig. 8.17.
IMPORTANT: The vehicle must come to a complete stop before selecting reverse. If reverse is
selected with the vehicle moving forward, an
audible alert will sound and continue sounding
at three-second intervals until the selector
switch is returned to N or D.
Once the vehicle has come to a complete stop, reverse can be engaged.
Neutral
Neutral (N) is in the center of the three-position selector switch located at the end of the SmartShift
control lever. Always start the engine in neutral. To
select neutral, move the selector switch to the center
position. When neutral is selected, the letter "N" displays on the gear indicator. See Fig. 8.18.
8.25
WARNING
Neutral is always available during operation, whatever the vehicle speed. When in neutral, requests to
upshift or downshift are ignored. If the selector switch
is moved from neutral to drive while the vehicle is
moving, the transmission will shift into a gear within
the operating torque range of the engine.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake before shutting
down the engine. AGS will shift into neutral after
shutdown, regardless of the position of the shift
lever. If you do not set the parking brake, the vehicle could roll and cause an accident resulting
in death, serious personal injury, or property
damage.
Before shutting down the engine, return the selector
switch to "N." When the ignition is turned off, the
transmission will reset to neutral during power down.
Drive
IMPORTANT: The vehicle must come to a complete stop before selecting drive. If drive is selected with the vehicle moving in reverse, an
audible alert will sound and continue sounding
at three-second intervals until the selector
switch is returned to N or R.
Drive (D) is at the lower end of the three-position selector switch located at the end of the SmartShift
control lever. To select drive, press in the neutral lock
button and move the selector switch to the position
below neutral. When drive is selected, the number of
the currently selected forward gear (1, 2, 3, 4 , 5, or
6) displays on the gear indicator.
Upshifting
NOTE: The driver can manually upshift at any
time, even when the slide switch is set to AUTO
mode.
To request an upshift with the transmission in drive,
pull the control lever up (towards you). If the gear is
Drivetrain
available, the transmission upshifts and the new gear

displays on the gear indicator.
As in a manual transmission, upshifting too early
causes engine lugging and uneven operation.
To achieve smooth operation in MAN mode, upshift
when the engine speed reaches approximately 2000
revolutions per minute (rpm). Heavy loads or steep
grades require higher rpm; lighter loads require lower
rpm.
An unavailable request to upshift is not stored in
memory. The upshift must be requested again.
Downshifting
NOTE: The driver can manually downshift at
any time, even when the slide switch is set to
AUTO mode.
To request a downshift with the transmission in drive,
push the control lever down (away from you). If the
gear is available, the transmission downshifts and
the new gear displays on the gear indicator.
Downshifts are not available if the engine speed after
the shift would exceed 2700 rpm. If the gear requested is unavailable, an audible alert will sound.
An unavailable request to downshift is not stored in
memory. The downshift must be requested again.
System Malfunction
If the "CHECK TRANS" telltale light comes on while
driving, the audible alert sounds, and the current
gear indicator begins to flash between the current
gear and "SM" (system malfunction), there is a problem which may or may not be apparent to the driver.
Bring the vehicle at once to a safe stopping place
and call an authorized Freightliner service facility for
assistance.
Clutch Overload
If the "TRANS TEMP" telltale light comes on while
driving and the current gear indicator begins to flash
between the current gear and "CO" (clutch overload),
the clutch has begun to overheat.
The clutch overload may have been caused by improper driving practices such as frequent and rapid
start/stop driving, or hillholding with the throttle pedal.
In this case, allow the clutch to cool, and continue
on, but cease the improper driving practices.
If the clutch overload message returns or continues,
the clutch is worn or damaged. Bring the vehicle at
once to a safe stopping place and call an authorized
Freightliner service facility for assistance.
Low Hydraulic Fluid Level
To achieve smooth operation in MAN mode, downshift when the engine speed reaches approximately
1200 rpm.
IMPORTANT: The only hydraulic fluid permitted

in this system is Pentosin CHF 11S. No other
fluid can be substituted.
Before starting down a hill, slow down. Downshift to

a speed that you can control without hard pressure
on the service brakes.
If the "CHECK TRANS" telltale light comes on while

driving and the current gear indicator begins to flash
between the current gear and "FL" (fluid level), there
has been an unusual loss of hydraulic fluid. Bring the
vehicle at once to a safe stopping place and call an
authorized Freightliner service facility for assistance.
The hydraulic reservoir holds about 1.05 quarts (one
liter) of Pentosin CHF 11S.
Before entering a curve, slow down to a safe speed.

Downshift if necessary. This lets you use some
power through the curve to help the vehicle be more
stable when turning. It also allows you to regain
speed faster as you come out of the curve.
AGS Diagnostics
CAUTION
At the first sign of a transmission malfunction,
take the vehicle out of service immediately. Depending on the type of problem, further shifting
may not be possible, and driveline torque may be
interrupted.
NOTE: After hydraulic fluid loss, a special procedure is required to fill the hydraulic reservoir.
This procedure must be carried out by an authorized Freightliner service facility.
Meritor Drive Axles

Refer to the Meritor website for additional information, www.arvinmeritor.com.
8.26
Drivetrain
Drive Axles With Differential Lock

The Meritor driver-controlled differential lock feature
(side-to-side wheel lock, traction control, or traction
equalizer) is available on single-drive or dual-drive
rear axles. It is available on both axles of a dualdrive vehicle, or on one only. It is only available on
drive axles. Differential lock must only be used under
adverse road conditions where greater traction is
needed. With differential lock on, the turning radius is
increased and vehicle handling is affected. The differential lock switch (Fig. 8.21) allows the driver to lock
the wheels on the same axle together. The red differential lock warning light illuminates on the dash message center when differential lock is engaged.
sible for some vehicles to have differential lock on

only one of the drive axles.
A two-position guarded rocker switch (Fig. 8.21) controls differential lock, causing the wheels on each
axle governed by the switch to rotate together. To
lock the wheels together, press the upper half of the
rocker momentarily (at the red LED). To unlock the
wheels, press the upper half of the rocker again.
IMPORTANT: The differential lock rocker switch

is guarded to prevent unintentional switch activation. If the LED in the switch begins to blink
during normal operation, when the switch has
not been activated, this indicates an error condition. Bring the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner service facility as soon as possible.
When the differential lock switch is pressed, three
responses are possible: a normal response, a slow
response, and an abnormal response.
10/26/2001
f610596
Fig. 8.21, Differential Lock Switch
Differential lock provides maximum traction under

slippery conditions. When the differential lock is engaged, the clutch collar completely locks the differential case, gearing, and axle shafts together, maximizing the traction of both wheels and protecting against
spinout.
Under normal traction conditions, do not use the differential lock feature.
Differential Lock Switch
CAUTION
Differential lock should only be engaged when
the vehicle is stopped or moving slowly at low
throttle. This will prevent internal axle damage.
Normally, when differential lock is available on dualdrive vehicles, one switch activates the lock on both
rear drive axles. As an option, it possible to have two
differential lock switches, one for the forward rear
and one for the rearmost drive axle. It is also pos-
8.27
Normal Response: The LED in the switch blinks until

the axle has responded to the request to lock the
wheels. At this point, the LED comes on steady and
stays illuminated. In normal operation, the wheels
may lock so quickly that the blinking of the switch is
barely noticeable.
If operation of the switch is not possible for any reason (ignition is turned off, vehicle is moving faster
than 25 mph, etc.), the LED will stop blinking and
turn off.

for any reason (vehicle moving too fast, low air pressure, etc.), the switch will continue to blink until the
wheels are able to lock. As in the normal response,
the LED comes on steady and stays illuminated once
the wheels have locked.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving too fast, let up

slightly on the accelerator. As the vehicle slows,
the wheels will lock.
30 seconds, the lock mechanism may not be fully
engaged/disengaged. Bring the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner service facility for testing.
Drivetrain
Differential Lock Operation
WARNING
Locking the wheels when the vehicle is traveling
down steep grades or when the wheels are slipping could damage the differential and/or lead to
loss of vehicle control, causing personal injury
Lock the wheels only when the vehicle is standing
still or moving at very low speed, less than 5 mph (8
km/h). Never lock the wheels when the vehicle is
traveling down steep grades or when the wheels are
slipping.
NOTE: On some vehicles, the differential lock

system is connected through the low speed
range of the transmission. If this system is used,
the transmission must be in the low speed
range for the wheels to fully lock.
WARNING
A vehicle with locked wheels can still slip sideways, causing possible loss of vehicle control,
personal injury, and property damage.
Be especially careful when driving under slippery
conditions with the wheels locked. Though forward
traction is improved, the vehicle can still slip sideways.
If the vehicle is moving, maintain a constant vehicle
speed when the differential lock is turned on. Briefly
let up on the accelerator to relieve torque on the
gearing, allowing the wheels to lock completely.
When the wheels are fully locked, the turning radius
will increase because the vehicle understeers. See
Fig. 8.22. Drive cautiously and do not exceed 25
mph (40 km/h).
To disengage differential lock after leaving poor road
conditions, operate the differential lock switch as discussed above while maintaining vehicle speed. Let
up momentarily on the accelerator to allow the
wheels to fully unlock, then resume driving at normal
speed.
NOTE: If the differential lock system is connected with the transmission in its low speed
range, shifting out of the low speed range will
also disengage the differential lock function. The
f350079a
02/09/96
A. Turning Radius When the Differential Lock is

Engaged (understeer condition)
B. Turning Radius When the Differential Lock is
Disengaged
Fig. 8.22, Turning Radii
switch will blink until the wheels unlock, and

then go out.
Tandem Drive Axles With Interaxle

Lock
CAUTION
The interaxle lock should not be engaged on a
vehicle with obviously spinning wheels. Engagement at high speed or power can damage the
axle(s).
Meritor has an interaxle lock (axle lock, interaxle differential lockout) feature that is standard on all dualdrive (tandem-drive) vehicles. Interaxle lock is recommended for use under adverse road conditions
where greater traction is needed. See the axle manufacturers manual provided with the vehicle for more
information.
The interaxle lock switch (Fig. 8.23) allows the driver
to lock both rear axles together. The red interaxle
warning light illuminates on the dash message center
when interaxle lock is engaged.
When the interaxle lock is not engaged, there is differential action between the two axles. The differential compensates for different wheel speeds and
variations in tire size. Keep the interaxle lock disengaged when driving on roads where traction is good.
When the interaxle lock is engaged, the differential
action between the two axles is locked. Both drive
axles now share the power. Both axles, and both
8.28
Drivetrain

30 seconds, the lock mechanism may not be fully
engaged/disengaged. Bring the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner service facility for testing.
Interaxle Lock Operation
10/26/2001
f610595
Fig. 8.23, Interaxle Lock Switch
sets of wheels, turn together at the same speed. The

interaxle lock should be used when the vehicle encounters poor traction conditions; however, it also
increases drivetrain and tire wear and should be
used only when improved traction is required.
Interaxle Lock Switch

A two-position guarded rocker switch (Fig. 8.23) controls interaxle lock, causing both axle shafts to rotate
together. To lock the axles together, press the upper
half of the rocker momentarily (at the red LED). To
turn off interaxle lock, press the lower half of the
rocker (at the double-axle icon).
IMPORTANT: The interaxle lock rocker switch is

When the interaxle lock switch is pressed, three responses are possible: a normal response, a slow response, and an abnormal response.

the interaxle lock is engaged. At this point, the LED
comes on steady and stays illuminated. In normal
operation, the interaxle may lock so quickly that the
blinking of the switch is barely noticeable.
To engage interaxle lock and achieve maximum pulling power in slippery or hazardous road conditions,
operate the interaxle lock switch as discussed above,
while maintaining vehicle speed. Let up momentarily
on the accelerator until the axle lock engages. Proceed over poor road conditions with caution. Do not
wait until traction is lost and the tires are spinning
before engaging the interaxle lock.
CAUTION
Do not turn on the interaxle lock switch when the
tires are slipping. Do not continuously operate
the vehicle with the interaxle lock engaged during good road conditions. To do so could result
in damage to the axle gearing and excessive tire
wear.
To disengage the interaxle lock after leaving poor
road conditions, operate the interaxle lock switch as
discussed above while maintaining vehicle speed.
Let up momentarily on the accelerator to allow the
axles to fully unlock, then resume driving at normal
speed.
Axle Shift
CAUTION
To prevent transmission and axle damage, make
sure the automatic transmission is in high range
when performing an axle shift with the vehicle
moving.
If operation of the switch is not possible for any reason (ignition is turned off, vehicle is moving too fast,
etc.), the LED will stop blinking and turn off.
Axle shift is a function installed on vehicles with twospeed axles to allow the use of the low speed range
when greater traction and maximum pulling power is
needed at low engine speed (rpm).

etc.), the switch will continue to blink until the axles
lock together, or for a maximum of 10 seconds. As in
the normal response, the LED comes on steady and
stays illuminated.
Under normal operating conditions, the vehicle is operated using the high-speed gear ratios of the axle.
Under extreme weather or off-road conditions, at low
speed and rpm and/or to pull heavy loads, the vehicle must be operated using the low-speed, or reduction, gear ratios of the axle.
8.29
Drivetrain
Axle Shift Switch

The axle shift switch is a two-position guarded rocker
switch (Fig. 8.24) installed on vehicles with twospeed axles.
shifts. As in the normal response, the LED comes on

steady and stays illuminated.

30 seconds, the axle shift function/mechanism may
not be operating correctly. Bring the vehicle to an
authorized Freightliner service facility for testing.
Axle Switch Interlock

NOTE: On vehicles with tandem drive axles,
there is an interlock that prevents an axle from
shifting speed whenever the interaxle lock is on.
10/26/2001
f610594
Fig. 8.24, Axle Shift Switch
To shift the axle from low speed to high speed, press

the upper half of the rocker momentarily (at the
LED). To turn the axle shift off (switch from high
speed back to low speed), press the upper half of
the rocker again. When the axle has shifted speed,
the LED turns off.
If the axle shift switch is pressed when the interaxle

lock is on, the axle shift will not be completed. The
LED does the following:
If the LED is off, the LED comes on briefly and
turns off again.

If the LED is on, it stays on.
To complete the axle shift, turn off the interaxle lock

and press the axle shift switch again. If still needed,
the interaxle lock can then be reactivated.
When the panel lights are on, the AXLE SHIFT legend is backlit in green.
IMPORTANT: The axle shift rocker switch is

guarded to prevent unintentional switch activation. If the LED in the switch begins to blink during normal operation, when the switch has not
been activated, this indicates an error condition.
Bring the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner
service facility as soon as possible.
When the axle shift switch is pressed, three responses are possible: a normal response, a slow response, and an abnormal response.

the axle shifts speed. At this point, the LED comes
on steady and stays illuminated. In normal operation,
the axle may shift so quickly that the blinking of the
switch is barely noticeable.
If operation of the switch is not possible for any reason (interaxle lock is on, ignition is turned off, etc.),
the LED will stop blinking and turn off.

etc.), the switch will continue to blink until the axle
8.30
9
Steering and Brake Systems
Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1
9.1
9.4
9.5
9.6
Steering System
The power steering system includes the power steering gear, hydraulic hoses, power steering pump, reservoir, steering wheel and column, and other components. Some models are also equipped with a
separate hydraulic power cylinder on the right side of
the front axle, or a right-hand slave gear.
ing wheel spokes should be at the 3 oclock and 9

oclock positions or within 10 degrees of these positions. See Fig. 9.1.
The power steering pump, driven by the engine, provides the power assist for the steering system. If the
engine is not running, there is no power assist.
If the power-assist feature does not work due to hydraulic fluid loss, steering pump damage, or another
cause, bring the vehicle to a safe stop. Do not drive
the vehicle until the cause of the problem has been
corrected.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle without the power-assist feature of the steering system requires much greater
effort, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds,
which could result in an accident and possible
injury.
NOTICE
Never steam clean or high-pressure wash the
steering gear. Internal damage to gear seals, and
ultimately the steering gear, can result.
Drivers should carefully use the power available with
a power steering system. If the front tires become
lodged in a deep hole or rut, drive the vehicle out
instead of using the steering system to lift the tires
out of the hole.
NOTICE
Avoid turning the tires when they are against a
curb, as this places a heavy load on steering
components and could damage them.
Steering Wheel Adjustment

Two steering wheels are available: a standard 18inch (450-mm) steering wheel and an optional 20inch (500-mm) steering wheel.
When there is no load on the vehicle and the front
tires are pointed straight ahead, the standard steer-
9.1
10
10
2
10
10
05/10/2007
f462075
1. 9 oClock
2. 3 oClock
Fig. 9.1, Steering Wheel Centered
On the optional 20-inch (500-mm) wheel, the steering

wheel spokes should be at the 4 oclock and 8
oclock positions or within 10 degrees of these positions. For steering wheel adjustment procedures, see
Group 46 of the Business Class M2 Workshop
Manual.
Air Brake System

A dual air brake system consists of two independent
air systems that use a single set of brake controls.
Each system has its own reservoirs, plumbing, and
brake chambers. The primary system operates the
service brakes on the rear axle; the secondary system operates the service brakes on the front axle.
Service brake signals from both systems are sent to
the trailer.
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle with the front brakes
backed off or disconnected. Backing off or disconnecting the front brakes will not improve vehicle handling and may lead to loss of vehicle
control, resulting in property damage or personal
injury.
Air Brake System, General

Information
The warning light and buzzer come on if air pressure
drops below 64 to 76 psi (441 to 524 kPa) in either
system. If this happens, check the dual system air
pressure gauge to determine which system has low
air pressure. Although the vehicles speed can be
reduced using the brake pedal, either the front or
rear service brakes will not be operating at full capacity, causing a longer stopping distance. Bring the
vehicle to a safe stop and have the air system repaired before continuing.
IMPORTANT: In the event of a total loss of service brakes with full system air pressure, use
the parking brake control valve (yellow knob) to
bring the vehicle to a complete stop in the safest location possible.
Before a vehicle with insufficient system air pressure
can be moved, the spring parking brakes must be
released by applying an external air source at the
gladhands, or by manually caging the parking brake
springs.
WARNING
Do not release the spring parking brakes and
then drive the vehicle. There would be no means
of stopping the vehicle, which could result in serious personal injury or vehicle damage. Before
releasing the spring parking brakes, make the
connection to a towing vehicle or chock the tires.
After correcting the brake system problem, uncage
the spring parking brakes before resuming normal
vehicle operation.
Primary Air Brake System

Loss of air pressure in the primary air system causes
the rear service brakes to become inoperative. The
secondary air system will continue to operate the
front brakes and the trailer brakes (if equipped).
Secondary Air System

Loss of air pressure in the secondary air system
causes the front axle brakes to become inoperative.
The primary air system will continue to operate the
rear service brakes and the trailer brakes (if
equipped).
Air Brake System Operation

Before driving your vehicle, allow time for the air
compressor to build up a minimum of 100 psi (689
kPa) pressure in both the primary and secondary
systems. Monitor the air pressure system by observing the dual system air pressure gauge and the lowair-pressure warning light and buzzer. The warning
light and buzzer shut off when air pressure in both
systems reaches 64 to 76 psi (441 to 524 kPa).
IMPORTANT: Before driving the vehicle, secure

all loose items in the cab so that they will not fly
forward during a full brake application. Make
sure all passengers are wearing seat belts.
During normal brake stops, depress the brake pedal
until braking action slows down the vehicle. Increase
or decrease the pressure on the pedal so that the
vehicle comes to a smooth, safe stop. Apply the
parking brake if the vehicle is to be parked.
IMPORTANT: An air brake proportioning system

may be used in tractor air brake systems when
the vehicle is not equipped with antilock braking
system (ABS). When operating in bobtail mode,
the rear brake chambers (on which the axle
load has been greatly reduced) receive reduced
(proportional) air pressure, while the front axle
brake chambers receive full (normal) air pressure. This results in a different brake pedal
"feel," as the pedal seems to require more travel
and/or effort to slow or stop the vehicle. However, the air brake proportioning system actually
improves vehicle control when the tractor is in
bobtail mode. When the tractor is towing a
trailer, the rear brake chambers will receive full
(normal) application air pressure.
When parking a vehicle attached to a trailer that
does not have spring parking brakes, apply the tractor parking brake. Chock the trailer tires before disconnecting the vehicle from the trailer.
WARNING
If a trailer or combination vehicle is not equipped
with spring parking brakes, do not park it by pulling out only the trailer air supply valve knob.
This would apply only the trailer service brakes.
If air were to bleed from the trailer brake system,
9.2
the trailer brakes would release, possibly causing

an unattended runaway vehicle.
NOTICE
Never apply the service and spring parking
brakes simultaneously. To do so transmits excessive input force to the brake components, which
could damage or cause eventual failure of brake
actuating components.
Brake Controls
The trailer brake lever (hand control valve) is used
for applying the trailer brakes without applying the
truck or tractor service brakes. It is usually mounted
on the right-hand control panel. See Fig. 9.2. The
valve can be partially or fully applied, but in any partially applied position, it will be overridden by a full
application of the brake pedal. Moving the lever
down applies the trailer brakes, while moving it up
releases the trailer brakes. The lever will automatically return to the up position when it is released.
65 psi (448 kPa), the trailer air supply valve must be

pushed in. It should stay in to charge the trailer air
supply system and to release the trailer spring parking brakes.
Pull the trailer air supply valve out before disconnecting a trailer or when operating a vehicle without a
trailer. If pressure in both air systems drops to 35 to
45 psi (242 to 310 kPa), the trailer air supply valve
automatically pops out, exhausting the trailer air supply, and applying the trailer service or spring parking
brakes.
f610291
03/10/99
1. Trailer Air-Supply-Valve Knob

2. Parking-Brake-Valve Knob
WARNING
Do not use the trailer service brakes for parking;
they are not designed for this purpose. If air
bleeds out of the trailer air tank during parking,
the vehicle could roll, causing serious personal
injury or property damage.
Fig. 9.3, Brake Valve Knobs
The yellow diamond-shaped knob in the control

panel actuates the parking brake valve. See Fig. 9.3.
Pulling out the parking brake valve applies both the
tractor and trailer parking brakes and automatically
causes the trailer air supply valve to pop out.
NOTICE
Do not use the spring parking brakes if the service brakes are hot, such as after descending a
steep grade. To do so could damage the brakes.
Allow hot brakes to cool before using the spring
parking brakes.
f610591
10/17/2001
Fig. 9.2, Trailer Brake Lever
The red octagonal-shaped knob in the control panel

actuates the trailer air supply valve. See Fig. 9.3.
After the vehicles air hoses are connected to a
trailer and the pressure in both air systems is at least
9.3
Do not use the spring parking brakes during

freezing temperatures if the service brakes are
wet. To do so could cause them to freeze. If the
brakes are wet, drive the vehicle in low gear and
lightly apply the brakes to heat and dry them.
If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking
brakes, pulling out the parking brake valve applies
the tractor parking brake and the trailer service
brakes. When the tractor and trailer parking brakes
(or trailer service brakes) are both applied, the trailer
brakes are released by pushing in the trailer air supply valve, leaving the tractor parking brake applied.
Air pressure in the primary or secondary reservoir
must be at least 65 psi (448 kPa) before the tractor
spring parking brakes, or the trailer service or spring
parking brakes, can be released.
Automatic Slack Adjusters

Automatic slack adjusters should never be manually
adjusted except during routine maintenance of the
foundation brakes (e.g., replacing shoes), during
slack adjuster installation, or in an emergency situation.
When the brake pushrod stroke exceeds the legal
brake adjustment limit on a vehicle, there is likely a
mechanical problem with the foundation brake components or the adjuster is improperly installed.
Visit a repair facility as soon as possible when
brakes equipped with automatic slack adjusters are
determined to be out of adjustment.
WARNING
Manually adjusting an automatic slack adjuster to
bring the pushrod stroke within legal limits is
likely masking a mechanical problem. Adjustment
is not repairing. Before adjusting an automatic
slack adjuster, troubleshoot the foundation brake
system and inspect it for worn or damaged components. Improperly maintaining the vehicle braking system may lead to brake failure, resulting in
property damage, personal injury, or death.
Hydraulic Brake System

Hydraulic Brake System, General
Information
The hydraulic brake system includes a power
booster, master cylinder, reservoir, hydraulic lines, a
brake rotor on each wheel hub, and a brake caliper
and pad assembly at each rotor.
The master cylinder controls braking power to the
front and rear brakes. The Bendix Hydro-Max power
booster is attached to the rear of the master cylinder
and is connected to the power steering system
(which provides pressurized power steering fluid). An
electrical backup pump operates if there is inadequate fluid flow from the power steering pump to
the power booster.
f460513a
04/26/2012
A. Open caps and check fluid level.

B. Fill to this level.
Fig. 9.4, Hydraulic Brake Reservoir
The brake system warning light illuminates if there is

a problem within the system. Bring the vehicle to a
safe stop and correct the problem before continuing
operation of the vehicle. See Group 42 of the
Business Class M2 Workshop Manual for hydraulic
brake system troubleshooting and adjustment procedures.
Hydraulic Brake System Operation

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the fluid level in
the master cylinder reservoir is up to the ridge
that surrounds the reservoir. See Fig. 9.4. Use
only heavy-duty brake fluid, DOT 3 or DOT 4, in
the hydraulic brake system.
IMPORTANT: Before driving the vehicle, secure
all loose items in the cab so that they will not fly
forward during a full brake application. Make
sure all passengers are wearing seat belts.
During normal brake stops, depress the brake pedal
until braking action slows down the vehicle. Increase
or decrease the pressure on the pedal so that the
vehicle comes to a smooth, safe stop. Apply the
parking brake if the vehicle is to be parked.
When parking a vehicle attached to a trailer, apply
the tractor parking brake. Chock the trailer tires before disconnecting the vehicle from the trailer.
9.4
Meritor WABCO Antilock

Braking System
The Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking System (ABS)
is an electronic wheel speed monitoring and control
system that works with the brake system. ABS passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at all times, and
controls wheel speed during emergency stops or
wheel lock situations.
NOTICE
An accumulation of road salt, dirt, or debris on
the ABS tone wheels and sensors can cause the
ABS warning light to come on. If the ABS light
does come on, the tone rings and sensors
should be inspected for corrosion and serviced if
necessary. The service should include cleaning
of the tone rings and sensors. If any tone ring on
a vehicle shows severe corrosion, all tone rings
on that vehicle should be replaced.
During winter months in areas where corrosive
materials are used on the highways, periodically
clean the underside of the vehicle, including the
tone rings and sensors, to ensure proper ABS
function and to protect the components from corrosion. Clean more frequently when unusually
corrosive chemicals are being used.
IMPORTANT: For proper ABS system operation,

do not change tire sizes. The sizes of the tires
installed during production are programmed into
the electronic control unit (ECU). Installing
different-sized tires could result in a reduced
braking force, leading to longer stopping distances.
The ABS includes signal-generating tone wheels and
sensors located in the wheel hubs of each sensed
wheel. The sensors transmit vehicle wheel speed
information to an electronic control unit ECU located
behind the center dash. The ECUs main circuit interprets the speed sensor signals and calculates wheel
speed, wheel retardation, and a vehicle reference
speed. If the calculations indicate wheel lockup, the
main circuit signals the appropriate modulator valve
to reduce braking pressure. During emergency braking, the modulator valve alternately reduces, increases, or maintains air pressure supply in the
brake chamber to prevent front and rear wheel
lockup.
9.5
The Meritor WABCO ABS combines one front-axle

control channel with one rear-axle control channel to
form one control circuit. For example, the sensor and
modulator valve on the left-front axle form a control
circuit with the sensor and modulator valve on the
right-rear axle.
The ECU has a safety circuit that constantly monitors
the wheel sensors, traction control valve (if
equipped), modulator valves, and the electrical circuitry. If the safety circuit senses a failure in any part
of the ABS, the tractor warning lamp (TRACTOR
ABS) illuminates and the control circuit where the
failure occurred is switched to normal braking action.
The remaining control circuit will retain the ABS effect. Even if the ABS is completely inoperative, normal braking ability is maintained.
The ABS indicator lamp illuminates after the ignition
is switched on and will go out within three seconds if
the system is functioning correctly. If the ABS indicator lamp does not illuminate, or does not go out after
three seconds, have the vehicle serviced before
operation.
During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully
depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a
safe stop. Do not pump the brake pedal. With the
brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will control all
wheels to provide steering control and a reduced
braking distance.
Although the ABS improves vehicle control during
emergency braking situations, the driver still has the
responsibility to change driving styles depending on
existing traffic and road conditions. For example, the
ABS cannot prevent an accident if the driver is
speeding or following too closely.
Trailer ABS Compatibility

The Meritor WABCO ABS is designed to communicate with a trailer ABS, if they are compatible. Compatibility will result in the illumination of the TRAILER
ABS lamp during vehicle start-up and fault detection.
The TRAILER ABS lamp will not illuminate unless a
compatible trailer is connected to the tractor. The
dash-mounted lamp will operate as follows when a
compatible trailer is properly connected to the tractor:
When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-
tion, the TRAILER ABS lamp will illuminate momentarily, then turn off.
If the lamp illuminates momentarily during ve-
hicle operation, then shuts off, a fault was detected and corrected.
If the lamp illuminates and stays on during ve-
hicle operation, there is a fault with the trailer

ABS. Repair the trailer ABS system immediately to ensure full antilock braking capability.
IMPORTANT: If a compatible trailer is connected, and the lamp is not illuminating momentarily when the ignition key is turned to the ON
position, it is possible that the lamp is burnt out.
Automatic Traction Control

Vehicles with electronic engines and ABS may have
Automatic Traction Control (ATC). On these vehicles,
the ATC system automatically limits wheel spin during reduced-traction situations. In normal braking applications, the standard air brake system is in effect.
An additional solenoid valve is installed. During
reduced-traction situations, the ATC solenoid valve
controls air pressure to the modulator valves and
they in turn increase, hold, or reduce pressure to the
appropriate brake chambers to provide better traction
whenever wheel spin occurs.
When the ATC system is in the NORMAL mode, it
will apply gentle braking to the spinning wheel, to
feed power to the wheel(s) with better traction. If
both wheels are spinning, the system will signal the
engine to reduce power.
ATC includes a deep snow and mud option to increase available traction on extra soft surfaces like
snow, mud, or gravel. A momentary contact rocker
switch labeled ATC will be located on the dash.
Pressing the switch will temporarily allow more wheel
spin. The activation of the deep snow and mud option is indicated by a flashing WHEEL SPIN lamp.
Pressing the switch again will cycle the system back
to normal operation.
NOTICE
The deep snow and mud option is intended to be
used under specific slippery conditions that require momentary increased wheel spin. Using
this option for an extended period of time may
damage the vehicle brake system.
After the ignition switch is turned on, the TRACTOR
ABS lamp and the WHEEL SPIN indicator lamp illu-
minate for about three seconds. After three seconds,

the warning lights go out if all of the tractors ABS
components are working.
IMPORTANT: If any of the ABS warning lights

do not work as described above, or illuminate
while driving, repair the ABS immediately to ensure full antilock braking capability.
Enhanced Stability Control

WARNING
Enhanced Stability Control (ESC) is intended only
as an aid for a conscientious and alert driver.
Carefully read the information in this manual to
understand this system and its limitations. ESC
is not a substitute for safe driving procedures.
Failure to drive safely, and use the system properly, could result in personal injury and/or death
ESC automatically reduces engine power, applies the
engine brake, and/or applies the tractor and trailer
brakes when the acceleration sensor detects that the
vehicle is at risk of rolling over. In addition, ESC offers the added capability of complete directional stability (yaw control) in oversteer and understeer conditions to reduce the likelihood of drift-out or jackknife.
The system determines where the driver is attempting to steer the vehicle and how much brake demand
is required in order to more precisely control the vehicle in an emergency situation.
ESC works by constantly comparing the drivers intention with the vehicles actual behavior. The system
does this by monitoring systems such as wheel
speed, steering angle, yaw rate, lateral acceleration,
throttle position, and brake application. A central microcomputer analyzes the collected data and triggers
a response to keep the vehicle on course when an
unstable condition is detected.
The roll stability control system automatically reduces
engine power, applies the engine brake, and/or applies the tractor and trailer brakes when the acceleration sensor detects that the vehicle is at risk of rolling
over. The control can intervene even before an advisory message is displayed.
When the system detects that the vehicle is at risk of
oversteering or understeering, it applies individual
tractor wheel end brakes and trailer brakes, activates
9.6
the engine brake (if equipped), and/or cuts engine

power, depending on the severity. As a result, the
driver has full control over the vehicle until the system detects a potential risk and intervenes accordingly. ESC operates automatically; the driver does
not monitor or activate the system.
9.7
10
Fifth Wheels and Trailer
Couplings
Fifth
Fifth
Fifth
Fifth
Wheels, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1
10.1
10.4
10.7
Fifth Wheels and Trailer Couplings
Fifth Wheels, General

Information
Fifth Wheel Lubrication
WARNING
WARNING
Do not use any fifth wheel that fails to operate
properly. Doing so may cause loss of vehicle
control, possibly resulting in severe personal injury or death.
Air-Suspension Dump Valve

The air-suspension dump valve may be used to adjust the tractor height to aid with coupling to or uncoupling from a trailer. See Fig. 10.1. When the
switch is set to LOWER, the air-suspension dump
valve deflates the air springs to lower the rear of the
vehicle. In the AUTO position, the automatic ridecontrol valves operate for normal driving.
WARNING
Keep the fifth wheel plate lubricated to prevent

binding between the tractor and trailer. A binding
fifth wheel could cause erratic steering and loss
of vehicle control, possibly resulting in personal
injury or death.
The standard fifth wheel plate must be kept well lubricated with chassis grease to prevent friction and
binding between the tractor fifth wheel plate and the
trailer.
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, inspect the condition
of the low-lube pads. There should be no damaged
or missing pieces. Slight puckering at the outside
edges is normal.
For lubrication instructions, see Group 31 of the
Business Class M2 Maintenance Manual.
Fifth Wheel Coupling
Never exhaust air from the suspension while

driving. The suspension will not absorb road
shocks, possibly damaging components, and vehicle handling may be compromised. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in severe personal injury or death.
Fifth wheel coupling is activated with the lock control

handle located on either the right side or left side of
the fifth wheel. Coupling has successfully occurred
when the kingpin has been forced into the jaws and
the lock control handle has moved to the locked
position.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Do not operate the vehicle over uneven ground

such as ramps, speed bumps, curbs, etc. with
the air springs deflated. Doing this may lead to
air bag separation from the piston, preventing the
suspension air springs from inflating.
Some fifth wheels may be mounted on sliding

rails. Before attempting to couple a trailer to a
sliding fifth wheel, the slide feature must be
locked to prevent the top plate from sliding rapidly forward or rearward, causing damage to the
fifth wheel or kingpin.
Fontaine and Holland Fifth Wheels

Coupling
10/26/2001
Fig. 10.1, Air-Suspension Dump Valve
10.1
1.
Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to

prevent the trailer from moving.
2.
Ensure the fifth wheel jaw is fully open and the

operating rod is in the unlocked position. See
Fig. 10.2 or Fig. 10.3.
3.
Make sure the fifth wheel top plate is tilted so the

ramps are as low as possible.
f610597
1
2
A
2
1
3
B
2
f310110a
10/26/2010
NOTE: Make sure the safety latch is down when the

control handle is locked.
A. Unlocked
1. Safety Latch
B. Locked
2. Lock Control Handle
Fig. 10.2, Fontaine Locking Mechanism
4.
f310447
11/02/2010
1. Safety Latch
2. Operating Rod (locked)
3. Operating Rod (unlocked)
Fig. 10.3, Holland Simplex SE Locking Mechanism
Position the tractor so that the center of the fifth

wheel is in line with the trailer kingpin. The kingpin should be in a position to enter the throat of
the locking mechanism.
D
C
NOTICE
Attempting to couple at the wrong height may
cause improper coupling, which could result in
damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
5.
Adjust the trailer height if required.

For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel approximately 4 to
8 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the fifth wheel
pivot. See Fig. 10.4.
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel
must slide freely under the trailer, and the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel at the pivot. See
Fig. 10.5.
6.
With the fifth wheel lock opening aligned with the

trailer kingpin, back the tractor slowly toward the
trailer. After sliding under the trailer, STOP to
B
10/28/2010
A. Fifth wheel must lift

trailer
B. Adjust trailer height
f311124
C. Ramps tilted down

D. 4 to 8 inches
Fig. 10.4, Trailer Connection Point, Standard Fifth

Wheel
prevent from hitting the kingpin too hard, then

resume backing slowly until the fifth wheel locks.
On a standard fifth wheel, the fifth wheel must lift
the trailer.
On a low-lube fifth wheel, do not lift the trailer as
this may damage the fifth wheel plate.
10.2
B
A
09/10/2010
f311126
A. No gap between trailer

and fifth wheel
B. Kingpin inside lock
A
Fig. 10.6, Coupling Inspection
09/10/2010
f311125
A. Adjust trailer height
Fig. 10.5, Trailer Connection Point, Low-Lube Fifth

Wheel
7.
Apply the tractor parking brakes.
WARNING
A visual inspection is required by law. Some improper couplings can pass a pull test. Sound is
not reliable. Get out of the cab and look. Incorrect coupling could cause the trailer to disconnect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury
or death.
8.
Perform a coupling inspection, checking that

there is no gap between the bottom of the trailer
and the fifth wheel, and that the kingpin is securely locked. See Fig. 10.6
When lockup has occurred, the fifth wheel control handle moves to the locked position. Make
sure that the safety latch is down over the lock
control handle to hold the control handle in the
locked position. (The safety latch will only rotate
down if the operating rod is fully retracted in the
locked position.) See Fig. 10.2 for Fontaine fifth
wheels. See Fig. 10.3 for Holland fifth wheels.
9.
NOTICE
B. Ramps tilted down
Release the tractor parking brakes. Test for kingpin lockup slowly inching the tractor forward, pulling on the trailer against the chocks.
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps

the trailer air hoses and electrical cables positioned so that they do not rub on anything. Rubbing may wear through hoses or cables, resulting
in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, potentially affecting trailer brake or electrical systems.
11. Charge the air brake system with air, checking
that the air connections do not leak.
WARNING
Incorrect fifth wheel lock adjustment could cause
the trailer to disconnect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or death.
12. With the trailer wheels chocked and the brakes
set, check for clearance between the kingpin and

the fifth wheel jaws by moving the tractor forward
and backward against the locked kingpin. If slack
is present, uncouple the trailer and have the fifth
wheel inspected and adjusted by a certified
technician.
Jost Fifth Wheel Coupling

1.
Tilt the ramp down.
2.
Open the kingpin locks. See Fig. 10.7.
3.
Back the vehicle close to the trailer, centering the

kingpin on the fifth wheel.
4.
Chock the trailer wheels.
5.
Connect the air lines and electrical cable.
6.
Ensure that the red trailer air supply valve (trailer

brake) is pulled out, and that the trailer parking
10. After lockup is completed, connect the tractor-to-
trailer air system lines and the electrical cable to

the trailer. Take care to prevent dirt or foreign
material from entering the air system lines.
10.3
nect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury

or death.
10. Apply the tractor parking brake, then perform a
physical check for positive kingpin lockup, and

that there is no gap between the trailer and the
fifth wheel. See Fig. 10.6.
11. Ensure that the release handle is in the locked
position adjacent to the casting. See Fig. 10.8.

12. Release the tractor parking brakes and test for
09/10/2010
A. Lock held open by catch mechanism

Fig. 10.7, Jost Release Handle Unlocked
brakes are set. See Chapter 5 in this manual for

operation of the dash-mounted brake controls.
2.
Chock the trailer rear wheels.
3.
Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is

removed from the fifth wheel.
4.
Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air system lines

and electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent
dirt or foreign material from entering the lines.
For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer

should contact the fifth wheel approximately 4 to
8 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the pivot. See
Fig. 10.4.
5.
Verify that both the yellow parking-brake and red

trailer-air-supply knobs are out, the tractor and
trailer parking brakes are set, and that the trailer
is prepared for uncoupling.
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel

must slide freely under the trailer, and the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel at the pivot. See
Fig. 10.5.
6.
Release the kingpin locking mechanism following

the instructions for each manufacturer below.
Adjust the trailer height (if required).
6.1
Fontaine: Lift the safety latch and pull the

lock control handle to the unlocked position.
6.2
Holland: In the locked position the safety

indicator swings freely over the operating
rod. See Fig. 10.9, View A.
Back the tractor under the trailer.

On a standard fifth wheel, the fifth wheel must lift
the trailer.
On a low-lube fifth wheel, do not lift the trailer as
this may damage the fifth wheel plate.
9.
Manual Uncoupling
Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes.
Attempting to couple at the wrong height may

cause improper coupling, which could result in
damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
8.
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling

1.
NOTICE
7.
kingpin lockup by slowly moving the tractor forward, pulling on the trailer against the chocks.
f311128
After sliding under the trailer, STOP to prevent

from hitting the kingpin too hard, then resume
backing slowly until the fifth wheel locks.
WARNING
A visual inspection is required by law. Some improper couplings can pass a pull test. Sound is
not reliable. Get out of the cab and look. Incorrect coupling could cause the trailer to discon-
To unlock the mechanism, manually rotate

the safety indicator toward the rear of the
fifth wheel. See Fig. 10.9, View B.
Pull the operating rod out. When the
upper operating rod shoulder is outside
the slot, raise the handle and place the
shoulder of the upper rod against the plate
casting, above the slot. See Fig. 10.9,
View C.
10.4
OK
OK
09/10/2010
f311127
Fig. 10.8, Jost Release Handle Locked
The fifth wheel is now in the lockset position and is ready for uncoupling. As the
tractor pulls away from the trailer the kingpin forces the jaw to rotate, contacting the
lock. Continued rotation of the jaw forces
the lock to move outward, and drops the
upper rod back into the slot. See Fig. 10.9
View D. The wheel is now ready for
coupling.
6.3
7.
Jost: Pull the retractable handle out, then

secure it in the open position with the
catch.
Release the tractor parking brake then drive out

slowly, allowing the trailer to slide down the fifth
wheel and pick-up ramps.
been uncoupled and coupled again. Failure to do

so may result in separation of the trailer from the
tractor, possibly causing serious personal injury
or death.
Preparing the Trailer for Uncoupling

Before using the air valve to unlock a fifth wheel
kingpin, prepare the trailer as follows.
1.
Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes.
2.
Chock the trailer rear wheels.
3.
Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is

removed from the fifth wheel.
4.
Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air lines and electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent dirt or
foreign material from entering the lines.
Air-Actuated Uncoupling
An air-actuated kingpin release valve is optional with
all fifth wheels. See Fig. 10.10.
Fontaine and Holland Fifth Wheels AirActivated Kingpin Unlock
NOTE: In the event of an air system failure, airactuated kingpins can be manually released following the instructions for manual unlocking.
1.
WARNING
Once the kingpin release valve has been pulled
the kingpin lock is released. The vehicle MUST
NOT be driven with the trailer until the trailer has
10.5

trailer-air supply knobs are out, the tractor and
NOTE: On Fontaine and Holland fifth wheels, if

the tractor parking brake is not set, the airactuated kingpin-release valve will not activate.
11/02/2010
f311133
A. Locked Position
B. Unlatched Position (safety indicator rotated towards the
rear of the fifth wheel)
1. Safety Indicator
2. Operating Rod
C. Lockset Position (upper rod resting against casting

above slot)
D. Open Position (ready for recoupling)
3. Upper Rod
4. Plate Casting
Fig. 10.9, Holland Kingpin Locking Mechanism
2.
Pull and hold the kingpin release valve until the

kingpin lock mechanism opens and locks in
place. See Fig. 10.10.
3.
Release the pull valve.
4.
Release the tractor parking brake.
5.
Drive out from under the trailer.
Jost Fifth Wheels Air-Activated Kingpin

Unlock
1.

trailer-air-supply knobs are out, the tractor and
10.6
The maximum axle weight ratings are shown on the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
label or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(CMVSS) label attached to the left rear door post of
the tractor. The desired load on the axle is no less
than 80 percent of the maximum axle weight rating,
but in no instances should the axle load exceed the
maximum axle weight rating given on the FMVSS or
CMVSS label.
Manual Slide Operation

10/26/2010
f611102
The manual slide feature is operated from the fifth

wheel plate with a manual release handle using the
following procedure. See Fig. 10.11.
Fig. 10.10, Air-Actuated Kingpin Release Valve
NOTE: With Jost fifth wheels, if the trailer parking brake is not set the air-actuated valve will
not activate.
2.
Release the tractor parking brake.
3.
Pull and hold the kingpin release valve, then

drive forward slowly.
4.
After the trailer has slid down the fifth wheel and
pick-up ramps, release the pull valve.
Fifth Wheel Slide

WARNING
Adjust the fifth wheel slide correctly, and do not
overload any tractor axle by incorrectly loading
the trailer. Incorrect slide adjustment or improper
axle loading could cause erratic steering and
loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or death.
On sliding fifth wheel assemblies, the fifth-wheel
plate is attached to rails that allow forward and rearward movement of the fifth wheel to optimally distribute the load across the axles. Slots are evenly
spaced along the slide rails, and retractable wedges
are positioned through the slots to hold the fifth
wheel in the desired position.
The amount of load distribution on the front steering
axle and rear drive axle(s) will have a direct effect on
the steering control of the vehicle. Determine the
front and rear axle weights by weighing the vehicle
on scales designed for this purpose.
10.7
07/25/95
f310190
1. Locking Wedge
2. Slide Release Pull Handle
Fig. 10.11, Manual Release Sliding Fifth Wheel
(Fontaine shown)
1.
Stop the tractor and trailer in a straight line on

level ground. Pull the red trailer air supply knob
to apply the trailer parking brakes.
2.
Apply the tractor parking brake, then release the

sliding mechanism using the appropriate method
for the fifth wheel manufacturer.
2.1
Fontaine: Lift the slide release pull handle

to disengage it from the guide plate. Then,
pull out the handle until it is in the unlocked position and can be positioned
against the guide plate to hold it out. The
handle will stay in the unlocked position

until it is manually disengaged from the
guide plate. See Fig. 10.12.
5.
Release the tractor parking brakes, then slowly

move the tractor forward or backward until the
fifth wheel is in the desired location.
NOTICE
When moving the fifth wheel to the desired position, be sure the trailer landing gear will not at
any time come in contact with the tractor frame
or other components. Make sure that the front of
the trailer will not come in contact with the rear
of the cab or with other components if they extend beyond the rear of the cab.
WARNING
10/26/2010
f310050
Fig. 10.12, Releasing the Sliding Fifth Wheel, (Fontaine)
2.2
Holland: Pull the operating rod out. Make

sure both side plungers have released.
See Fig. 10.13.
Check that the locking wedges have seated in the

slots. Failure to achieve complete lockup may
allow disengagement of the tractor from the
trailer, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or death.
6.
Apply the tractor parking brakes, then lock the

sliding member in position using one of the following methods:
6.1
Fontaine: Disengage the slide release

pull handle from the guide plate. The slide
release pull handle is spring-loaded in the
locked position and will seek the locked
position when disengaged from the guide
plate. After the slide release pull handle
returns to the fully locked position, visually
and physically check the locking wedges
to make sure they are fully inserted into
the slots in the slide rails. Make sure the
handle is locked in position against the
guide plate.
6.2
Holland: Raise the operating rod so that it

is free to move inward. Make sure that the
lock pins have seated in the base plate
rail holes and the operating rod moves
into the locked position.
5
4
6
3
8
2
7
10/26/2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
Baseplate
Bolted Stop
Baseplate Rail
Fifth Wheel Mount
f310445
5.
6.
7.
8.
Slider Saddle Plate

Safety Latch
Operating Rod
Operating Lever
Fig. 10.13, Sliding Fifth Wheel Manual Release,

(Holland Simplex)
3.
Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to remove the weight from the tractor.
4.
Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to

prevent the trailer from moving.
NOTE: The fifth wheel may need to be moved

slightly to enable the locking wedges to enter
the fully locked position.
10.8
Air Slide Operation

The slide feature may be operated with an air switch
mounted in the dash, that operates an air cylinder
that locks and unlocks the slide. See Fig. 10.14.
02/22/2011
f611114
Fig. 10.14, Air-Slide Switch
1.
Set the air-slide switch to UNLOCK. See

Fig. 10.14
Ensure the locking plungers have released. See
Fig. 10.15.
For Jost fifth wheels, the mechanism activates as
shown in Fig. 10.16.
2.
Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to remove the weight from the tractor.
1
B
09/10/2010
f311131
A. Unlocked
B. Locked
Fig. 10.16, Jost Sliding Fifth Wheel
3.
Pull the red trailer-air-supply knob to set the

trailer-parking brakes.
4.
Slowly move the tractor forward or backward

until the fifth wheel is in the desired location.
NOTICE
Ensure the trailer landing gear does not come in
contact with the tractor frame or other components, and that the front of the trailer will not
come in contact with the rear of the cab or other
components if they extend beyond the rear of the
cab.
5.
2
f310189
07/25/95
1. Locking Wedge
2. Air Cylinder
Fig. 10.15, Air-Operated Sliding Fifth Wheel (Fontaine

shown)
10.9
Apply the tractor parking brakes.
WARNING
Check that the locking wedges have seated in the
slots. Failure to achieve complete lockup may
allow disengagement of the tractor from the
trailer, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or death.

6.
Set the air-slide switch to LOCK. Visually inspect

the locking wedges or plungers to make sure
that they are fully inserted in the slide rail slots.
Verify that the plungers have engaged by tugging
the tractor forward while the trailer brakes are
locked and the wheels are chocked.
NOTE: The fifth wheel may need to be moved

slightly to enable the locking wedges to fully
lock.
10.10
11
Pretrip and Post-Trip
Inspections and
Maintenance
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspection Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Daily Pretrip Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Weekly Post-Trip Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11
Monthly Post-Trip Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13
Pretrip and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspection

Checklists
Regulations in Canada and the U.S. clearly indicate
that it is the drivers responsibility to perform an inspection, and ensure the complete road-worthiness
of a vehicle, before placing it into service. Commercial vehicles may be subject to inspection by authorized inspectors, and an unsafe vehicle can be taken
out of service until the driver or owner repairs it.
Use the following checklists to ensure that vehicle
components are in good working condition before
each trip. Careful inspections eliminate stops later to
fix overlooked or forgotten items.
The checklists in this chapter can be copied and kept
as a record that the procedures have been completed. For details on how to inspect each item on
the checklists, see the corresponding procedure
(step number) in this chapter.
NOTE: Checklists in this chapter correspond

with the procedures and steps later in this chapter. Your vehicle may not be equipped with all
components listed below.
Checklists
Daily Pretrip Inspection Checklists
See the following tables for a list of procedures that
should be performed daily, before the first trip. Place
a check mark in the complete (Comp.) column to
indicate a procedure has been performed.
Inspector
Date
1
2
Suspension and Slack Adjusters

Suspension components
Slack adjusters
1
2
3
4
5
6
Wheels and Tires

Comp.
Wheel covers
Tire condition
Tire inflation
Rims and wheel components
Wheel bearing oil seals and lubrication levels
Mud Flaps
11.1
Comp.
Comp.
2
3
4
Saddle Tank Areas

Drain air reservoirs (without automatic drain
valves)
Fuel tank(s) secure
Frame rails and crossmembers
Visible exhaust components
Engine Compartment
Leakage under engine
Air intake system
Engine oil level
Power steering reservoir level
Engine coolant level
Visible engine wiring
Frame rails
Comp.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cab
Comp.
Reset dash-mounted air intake restriction
indicator
Air-pressure warning system
Air governor cut-in and cut-out pressures
Air pressure build-up time
Air system leakage
Air pressure reserve
Mirrors, windows, windshield
Horn, windshield wipers, windshield washers
Heater and defroster
Interior lights
Exterior lights
Seat belts and tether belts
Fuel level
Mirror adjustment
Service brakes
Natural Gas Fuel System Inspection
Fuel tanks
Required decals
Vent caps
Plumbing components, fuel fill fitting, fuel
lines
Fuel gauge components, fuel level sender
cable, LNG fuel tank pressure
Coolant hoses
LNG fuel tank pressure
LNG vaporizer
Comp.
Weekly Post-Trip Inspection Checklist

See the following table for procedures that should be
performed weekly, post-trip. Place a check mark in
the complete (Comp.) column to indicate a procedure has been performed.
Inspector
1
2
3
4
5
6
Engine Compartment
Windshield washer reservoir level
Air intake restriction indicator
Automatic transmission fluid level
Water in fuel/water separator
Steering components
Serpentine drive belts
Date
Comp.
Monthly Post-Trip Inspection Checklists

See the following tables for procedures that should
be performed monthly, post-trip. Place a check mark
in the complete (Comp.) column to indicate a procedure has been performed.
Inspector
Comp.
Comp.
2
3
Driver-Side Saddle Tank Area

Drain air reservoirs (with automatic drain
valves)
Batteries
Aerodynamic components
Engine Compartment
Hood and bumper
Hydraulic clutch reservoir
Radiator and heater hoses
Steering wheel play
Comp.
1
2
3
4
Natural Gas Fuel System

System leak test
Drain CNG high-pressure fuel filter housing
Comp.
Fluids Added
Use the following table to note any fluids that were
added during the inspection and maintenance procedures.
Fluids Added During Inspection
Fluid
Amount Added
Wheel Bearing Oil Seal
Lubricant
Engine Oil
Power Steering Fluid
Engine Coolant
Windshield Washer Fluid
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid,
DOT4
Date
Brake Components
Brake system components
Brake chambers
Air brake lines
Flex air hoses
Brake linings and brake drums
Brake lining thickness
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
11.2
Daily Pretrip Inspection and

Maintenance
Complete the following inspection and maintenance

procedures to ensure that vehicle components are in
good working condition before each trip. A driver who
is familiar with the vehicle and drives it regularly can
perform the daily inspections, then add the weekly
and monthly post-trip inspections as scheduled.
6
7
3
NOTE: If any system or component does not

pass this inspection, it must be corrected before
operating the vehicle. Whenever equipment requires adjustment, replacement, and/or repair,
see the Business Class M2 Workshop Manualfor procedures and specifications.
If the driver does not operate the vehicle on a consistent basis, all daily, weekly, and monthly inspection and maintenance procedures should be performed before the trip.
IMPORTANT: The pre- and post-trip checklists,

inspections, and maintenance procedures detailed in this chapter are not all-inclusive.
Refer to other component and body manufacturers instructions for specific inspection and
maintenance instructions, as well as local, state,
and federal guidelines.
1
10
f421398
06/17/2003
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
7/16-inch Adjusting Nut

Grease Fitting
Boot
Link
Brake Chamber Piston Rod
Clevis
1/2-inch Clevis Pin
1/4-inch Clevis Pin
Grease Relief Opening
Slack Adjuster Spline
Fig. 11.1, Gunite Automatic Slack Adjuster
Inspect slack adjuster boots, if equipped,
for cuts or tears.
Suspension and Slack Adjuster

Inspection
Inspect anchor straps, if equipped, for
Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect suspension and slack adjuster components.
Look for worn clevis pins on brake cham-
1.
Look for missing or damaged cotter pins
Inspect the following suspension components for

signs of structural damage, cracks, or wear.
springs
spring hangers
shocks
suspension arms
suspension brackets
axle seats
bushings
2.
11.3
Inspect slack adjusters for signs of damage. See

Fig. 11.1, Fig. 11.2, or Fig. 11.3.
damage.
ber pushrods.
on the clevis pins.
Ensure chamber piston rods are in line
with the slack adjusters.
Wheel and Tire Inspection

Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect each
wheel and tire assembly.
IMPORTANT: Wheel covers decrease drag force

as a vehicle moves, thereby improving fuel efficiency. If replacement of a wheel cover is necessary, the replacement cover must meet or exceed the drag reduction performance of the
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
7
6
2
5
10/11/2005
f421397
A. Rotate the control arm toward the brake chamber

until you can feel it contacting the internal stop.
1. Clevis
2. Slack Adjuster
3. Clevis Pin
4. Manual Adjusting Nut
5. Control Arm
6. Control-Arm Washers and Nut
7. Anchor Strap Slot
8. Anchor Strap
9. Brake Chamber
Fig. 11.2, Haldex Automatic Slack Adjuster
originally installed cover in order to maintain

compliance with greenhouse gas and full efficiency regulations (GHG14).
1.
If the vehicle was originally equipped with wheel

covers, ensure all wheel covers are present. Inspect wheel covers for damage or wear. Remove
wheel covers from rear drive wheels, if equipped,
prior to inspecting the tires and wheel components.
NOTE: During wheel cover installation, ensure

the V-notch in the liner inner retaining ring is
centered on the valve stem. The inner and outer
retaining rings should be uniformly aligned to
each other and to the wheel rim. The outer retaining ring of the liner is equipped with two
canvas flaps. When installing the face cover,
make sure the cover retaining ring is inserted
between the two canvas flaps on the liner outer
9
01/31/2011
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
10
f422530
Grease Fitting (if equipped)

Slack Adjuster Housing
Brake Chamber Pushrod
Clevis
Clevis Pin (large)
Clevis Pin (small)
Actuator Rod
Boot
Manual Adjusting Nut
Camshaft Splines
Fig. 11.3, Meritor Automatic Slack Adjuster
retaining ring so that the Velcro strips line up

between the face cover and the liner.
2.
Inspect each tire for the following:

valve stem caps on every tire, screwed on
finger-tight
bulges, cracks, cuts, and penetrations
oil contamination (petroleum derivatives will
soften the rubber and destroy the tire)

tread depthif tread is less than 4/32 inch
(3 mm) on any front tire, or less than 2/32
11.4
inch (1.5 mm) on any rear tire, replace the

tire
debris lodged between duel tire sets
correct tire inflation pressure for the vehicle

load.
4.
IMPORTANT: Low-rolling resistance (LRR) tires

minimize wasted energy as a tire rolls, thereby
decreasing rolling effort and improving fuel efficiency. If tire replacement is necessary, replacement tires must meet or exceed the rolling resistance of the originally installed tires in order to
maintain compliance with greenhouse gas and
full efficiency regulations (GHG14).
Contact your tire manufacturer/supplier to determine the rolling resistance of the originally installed tires. Visit www.epa.gov/smartway for
additional information and resources.
3.
Check tire inflation.

For inflation pressures and maximum loads, see
the tire manufacturers guidelines. Inflate the tires
to the applicable pressures if needed.
Examine each rim and wheel component. Check

the wheel nuts or rim nuts for indications of
looseness.
4.1
WARNING
Have any worn or damaged wheel components
replaced by a qualified person using the wheel
manufacturers instructions and the wheel industrys standard safety precautions and equipment.
Otherwise a vehicle or workshop accident could
occur, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or death.
4.2
If a tire has been run flat or under-inflated, check

the wheel and tire for damage before adding air.
Keep compressed air reservoirs and lines dry
during tire inflation. Use well-maintained inline
moisture traps and service them regularly.
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle with underinflated or
overinflated tires. Incorrect inflation can stress
the tires and make the tires and rims more susceptible to damage, possibly leading to rim or
tire failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
NOTICE
11.5
Inspect for broken, cracked, badly worn,

bent, rusty, or sprung rings and rims.
NOTICE
Use the recommended torque values and follow
the proper tightening sequence. Insufficient
wheel nut torque can cause wheel shimmy, resulting in wheel damage, stud breakage, and extreme tire tread wear. Excessive wheel nut torque
can break studs, damage threads, and crack
discs in the stud hole area.
4.3
5.
A weekly pressure loss of 4 psi (28 kPa) or more

in a tire may indicate damage. The tire should be
inspected and, if necessary, repaired or replaced
by a qualified tire service facility.
IMPORTANT: The load and cold inflation pressure must not exceed the rim or wheel manufacturers recommendations, even though the
tire may be approved for a higher load inflation.
Consult the rim or wheel manufacturer for the
Remove all dirt and debris from the assembly. Rust streaks or metal build-up
around stud holes, or out-of-round or worn
stud holes, may be caused by loose wheel
nuts.
Make sure all wheel nuts are tightened. If

tightening is necessary, use the tightening
pattern in Fig. 11.4 or Fig. 11.5.
Inspect the outboard side of all wheel hubs and

the hub oil seal area on the inboard side of each
wheel for signs of oil leakage. If any oil is found
on wheel and tire or brake components, remove
the vehicle from service until the leak has been
fixed.
If needed, fill the hubs to the level indicated on
the hub cap. See Group 35 of the Business
Class M2 Maintenance Manual for recommended
lubricants.
6.
Check that mud flaps are undamaged and hang

10 inches (25.4 cm) or less from the ground.
1.
10
Drain the brake system air reservoirs (reservoirs

without automatic drain valves only).
WARNING
4
7
Never operate the engine with the fuel tank shutoff valves partly closed. This could damage the
fuel pump, causing sudden loss of engine power,
possibly resulting in serious personal injury due
to reduced vehicle control.
2.
9
2
f400081a
08/23/93
If equipped with fuel tank shutoff valves, be sure

the valves are fully open.
Fig. 11.4, Tightening Pattern, 10-Hole Wheels
3.
Inspect visible frame rails for missing bolts, shiny

areas, or rust streaks. Check all visible crossmembers for damage or signs of looseness.
4.
Inspect visible components of the exhaust system to ensure connections are tight.
Inspect upstream of the aftertreatment device

(ATD) for cracking or signs of leaks, such as soot
trails. Inspect downstream of the ATD for signs of
exhaust leaks, such as blistering or warping of
nearby components.
Ensure fuel tanks are secured to their mounting

brackets and that the mounting brackets are secured to the frame.
Engine Compartment Inspection

3
03/08/2012
f400052a
Fig. 11.5, Tightening Pattern, 8-Hole Wheels
Saddle Tank Area Inspections
1.
Check the ground underneath the engine for fuel,

oil, or coolant leaks.
2.
Inspect the air intake system for leaks or damage.
NOTICE
WARNING
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into
the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or
sludge particles may be in the airstream and
could cause injury.
Failure to maintain a sealed air intake system

could allow the entry of dirt and contaminants
into the engine. This could adversely affect engine performance and result in engine damage.
2.1
Push the reset button on the air intake

restriction indicator located on the air
cleaner, if equipped.
2.2
Check the air intake duct from the air

cleaner to the engine intake. Make sure
the duct components are secure and airtight.
NOTICE
If the water drained from the air reservoirs is
cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the
compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the
air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air
brake system, which could adversely affect braking.
11.6
2.3
3.
Check the vacuator (spitter) valve(s) for

damage, and make sure the lips of the
valve are pliable and free of debris.
Check the engine oil level.

1
NOTICE
Operating the engine with the oil level below the
minimum fill (or "add") mark or above the maximum fill (or "full") mark could result in engine
damage.
3.1
Check the oil level with the vehicle parked

on a level surface. See the engine manufacturers guidelines for engine shutdown
time requirements prior to checking the oil
level.
05/21/2007
Fig. 11.6, Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
5.1
IMPORTANT: On engines that comply with

EPA07 or newer regulations, use CJ-4 engine oil with less than 1% sulfated ash. Failure to use CJ-4 oil may void the warranty on
emission aftertreatment components.
3.2
If the oil level is at or below the minimum

fill (or "add") mark on the dipstick, add
enough oil to maintain the level between
the minimum and maximum fill marks. See
the engine operation manual for recommended lubricants.
For natural gas vehicles, use only Exxon
Busgard Geo 15W-40 natural gas engine
oil.
4.
Check the power steering reservoir fluid level.

The power steering fluid level should be between
the MIN COLD mark and the middle mark just
above it. See Fig. 11.6. If needed, fill the reservoir with automatic transmission fluid that meets
Dexron III or TES-389 specifications.
NOTICE
5.
11.7
Check the engine coolant level in the radiator

surge tank.
If the coolant is low, fill the surge tank to

the MAX line with a 50/50 mixture of water
and the type of antifreeze currently installed in your vehicle.
For natural gas vehicles, use only Fleetguard ES Compleat EG Premix 50/50
engine coolant.
5.2
If the surge tank was empty, start the engine after refilling and check the level
again when the engine is at operating
temperature.
6.
Inspect visible engine wiring for damage or

looseness.
7.
Inspect visible frame rails for missing bolts, shiny

areas, or rust streaks.
Cab Inspection
1.
Push the reset button on the dash-mounted air

intake restriction indicator, if equipped.
2.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position,

check the air-pressure warning system.
2.1
If not previously drained, drain the air reservoirs using moderate brake applications
until pressure in both reservoirs is less
than 70 psi (483 kPa).
2.2
Turn the ignition to the ON position. The

ICU will complete a full gauge sweep and
bulb check, and the warning buzzer will
sound. Ensure the BRAKE AIR lamp remains illuminated and the warning buzzer
continues to sound after the gauge sweep
is complete.
Low coolant could result in engine overheating,

which could cause engine damage.
IMPORTANT: The surge tank must be cool to

check the coolant level.
f462079
1. Filler Cap
3.
Check air governor cut-in and cut-out pressures.

3.1
4.
Maximum Allowable Air Leakage

Pressure Drop:
psi (kPa) Per Minute
Description
Released Applied
Truck or Tractor Only
2 (14)
3 (21)
Truck or Tractor w/Single Trailer
3 (21)
4 (28)
Table 11.1, Maximum Allowable Air Leakage
WARNING
Check air pressure build-up time.

4.1
With the air system fully charged, make

one full brake application and note the air
pressure reading on the primary air
gauge.
4.2
Further reduce air pressure using moderate brake applications, then run the engine at governed rpm.
4.3
Note the time that the pressure reaches

the previously noted reading on the primary air gauge, then note the time that
the air pressure reaches cut-out pressure.
4.4
5.
With the engine idling, apply the brake

pedal several times. The air governor
should cut in when pressure in the primary
air reservoir (top air gauge) reaches approximately 100 psi (689 kPa).
Check the air pressure reserve.

With the engine still off, make one full brake application and observe the pressure drop on the
primary air gauge. If pressure drops more than
25 psi (172 kPa), eliminate any leaks before operating the vehicle.
Start the engine and ensure the BRAKE

AIR lamp goes out and the buzzer silences when pressure reaches approximately 70 psi (483 kPa) in both air reservoirs.
The air governor should cut out at approximately 120 psi (827 kPa). For vehicles with an optional dryer reservoir
module (DRM), the cut-out pressure is
approximately 130 psi (896 kPa).
3.2
6.
If it takes longer than 30 seconds to reach

cut-out pressure after the primary air
gauge passes the previously noted pressure (noted after one full brake application), eliminate any leaks or replace the air
compressor before operating the vehicle.
Check air leakage in the system.

5.1
5.2
With the parking brake applied, the transmission out of gear, and the air system
fully charged, release the service brakes
and shut down the engine.
Wait one minute and note the air pressure
drop in psi (kPa) per minute from the primary air reservoir.
If the pressure drop exceeds the limits
shown in Table 11.1, eliminate any leaks
before operating the vehicle.
When cleaning windshields and windows, always

stand on the ground or on a secure ladder or
platform. Use a long-handled window cleaner. Do
not use the cab steps, tires, fenders, fuel tanks,
engine, or under-hood components to access the
windshield or windows. Doing so could cause a
fall and result in an injury.
7.
Inspect the mirrors, window glass, and windshield for cracks or other damage.
8.
Ensure that the horn, windshield wipers, and

windshield washers are operating properly.
These devices must be in good working order for
safe vehicle operation.
9.
Ensure the heater and defroster are operating

properly.
10. Check the operation of all interior lights.

10.1
Turn on the headlights and leave them on.

Ensure all equipped gauge bulbs illuminate in the dash message center.
10.2
Ensure all equipped driver control

switches illuminate.
10.3
Ensure both turn signal indicator bulbs

illuminate in the dash message center
when the turn signal switch is activated.
11. Check the operation of all exterior lights. See
Fig. 11.7.
11.1
Activate the high-beam headlights and

hazard warning lights.
11.8
making any modifications to the system, may result in personal injury or death.
1
3
12.1
Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme

dirt and dust, or for severe fading from
exposure to sunlight, especially near the
buckle latch plate and in the D-loop guide
area.
12.2
Check operation of the buckle, latch, Komfort Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch (if
equipped), web retractor, and upper seat
belt mount on the door pillar. Check all
visible components for wear or damage.
12.3
Check the seat belt and tether belt connection points and tighten any that are
loose.
WARNING
5
8
10/31/2001
6
f543920
NOTE: The parking lights, front clearance lights, and

taillights all function as turn signals.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Utility Light
Identification Light
Marker Lights
Front Clearance Light
5.
6.
7.
8.
Headlight Low Beam

Headlight High Beam
Parking Light
Road Light
Fig. 11.7, Exterior Lights
11.2
Exit the cab and check that all exterior

lights and reflectors are clean and intact.
11.3
Check that the brake lights, taillights,

headlights, turn signals, marker lights,
identification lights, and clearance lights
are working properly.
12. Inspect the seat belts and tether belts.
WARNING
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an
accident, and the seat belt system was in use,
the entire vehicle seat belt system must be replaced before operating the vehicle. Do not attempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
could change the effectiveness of the system.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
11.9
Never fill fuel tanks to more than 95 percent of

their liquid capacity. This could make them more
likely to rupture from impact, possibly causing
fire and resulting in serious personal injury or
death by burning.
Do not mix gasoline or alcohol with diesel fuel.
This mixture could cause an explosion, possibly
resulting in serious personal injury or death. Do
not fill the fuel tanks in the presence of sparks,
open flames, or intense heat. These could ignite
the fuel, possibly causing severe burns.
IMPORTANT: On engines that comply with

EPA07 or newer regulations, use ultralow-sulfur
diesel (ULSD) with 15 ppm sulfur content or
less. Failure to use ULSD fuel may void the
warranty on emission components.
13. Check the fuel level in the fuel tank(s). To keep
condensation to a minimum, fuel tanks should be

filled at the end of each day.
14. Adjust the rearview and down view mirrors as
necessary.
15. Test the service brakes.
15.1
With the engine running and air system

fully charged, set the parking brake.
15.2
Put the vehicle in the lowest gear and

gently attempt to move it forward. The vehicle should not move.
If the vehicle moves, the parking brakes

are not operating correctly and must be
repaired before the vehicle is operated.
10
5
11
Inspect fuel tanks for dents, scratches, gouges,

or other signs of damage. Inspect the fuel lines
and connections for leaks.
Check that the fuel tanks are securely mounted.
Look for signs of abrasion between components.
12
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Fuel System:

Ensure that the CNG fuel cylinder storage box is
secured to the frame. Inspect for signs of looseness.
Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG) Fuel System: Ensure that the LNG fuel tank is secured to the
mounting brackets and that the mounting
brackets are secured to the frame. Ensure all
rubber isolator straps are secure around the LNG
fuel tank.
2.
Natural Gas Fuel System Inspection,

If Equipped
1.
Check for the presence of all required decals

present in the following locations:
Gas detection system overhead console;
Above the door handle on both doors;
Left front bumper;
End-of-frame crossmember;
3
2
1
05/05/2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
LNG fuel tank fill port (maximum psi), if
f470533
Pressure Control Regulator

Vapor Shutoff Valve
Fuel Fill Hose
Secondary Relief Valve (red cap)
Fuel Fill Fitting
Fuel Level Sender Box
Primary Relief Valve
Tank Pressure Gauge
Fill Vent Fitting
Excess Flow Valve
Fuel Shutoff Valve (liquid)
Fill Check Valve
Fig. 11.8, LNG Tank Plumbing Components
equipped.
3.
CNG Fuel System: Each fuel cylinder should

have two caps (one on each end), which are visible on the back of the CNG fuel cylinder storage
box. One additional cap is located on the pressure relief valve on the inboard side of the CNG
fuel box, next to the fuel outlet line.
LNG Fuel System: A red cap should be present
on the secondary relief valve (Fig. 11.8).
4.
flow valves, if equipped, for signs of damage or

leaks. See Fig. 11.8 or Fig. 11.9.
Check for the presence of vent caps on pressure

relief valves and devices. If any caps are missing, have the fuel system inspected by a qualified technician.
Inspect all plumbing components, including the

fuel shutoff valve(s), primary and secondary relief
valves, and the LNG vapor shutoff and excess
Inspect the fuel fill fitting for signs of damage or

leaks.
Inspect all lines for signs of leaks or damage,
and check all threaded connections.
5.
Inspect all fuel gauge components for signs of

leaks or damage. Inspect the fuel level sender
cable and wiring.
6.
Inspect all coolant hoses for signs of chafing,

kinks, or leaks. The LNG fuel system utilizes
coolant hoses between the engine and the vaporizer; the CNG fuel system utilizes coolant
hoses between the engine and the pressure
regulator inside the fuel panel.
11.10
2.
2
After resetting the air intake restriction indicator

during the daily pretrip inspection, check the indicator again with the engine off.
2.1
H IG
H PRESS UR E
RE
LOW PRES S U
CYLINDERS
INSPECT CYLINDERS
EVERY 36 MONTHS
OR 36000 MILES
WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST
Check a go/no-go indicator without graduations to see if the colored bar shows
through the clear window.
REGULATOR
INSPECT PRESSURE
RELIEF DEVICE
EVERY 2000 MILES
NATURAL
GAS
VEHICLE
110 PSIG
FILTER
ON
DRAIN HOUSING
EVERY 1500 MILES
REPLACE ELEMENT
EVERY 3000 MILES
OPEN VALVE
SLOWLY
M
SH AN
U U
VA T O AL
LV FF
E
3600 PSIG MAX.

SERVICE PRESSURE
04/30/2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
f470556
High Pressure Gauge

Low Pressure Gauge
Manual Fuel Shutoff Valve
Fuel Fill Port
Air Cleaner Element Maximum Restriction

Pre-EPA07
EPA07 and
Engine
Engines
Newer Engines
Caterpillar
25 inH 2O
Cummins
25 inH 2O
25 inH 2O
Detroit Diesel
20 inH 2O
22 inH 2O
22 inH 2O
Mercedes-Benz
22 inH 2O
Table 11.2, Air Cleaner Element Maximum Restriction
Fig. 11.9, CNG Fuel Panel
7.
8.
If equipped with an LNG fuel system, check the

fuel tank pressure gauge to ensure that pressure
is within the normal range of 120 to 150 psi (827
to 1034 kPa). If tank pressure exceeds 230 psi
(1586 kPa) and the pressure relief valve does
not open automatically, vent the tank immediately.
Inspect the LNG vaporizer for signs of damage
or leaks. See Fig. 11.10. Inspect the vaporizer
mounting brackets for signs of looseness.
Weekly Post-Trip Inspection

and Maintenance
Engine Compartment Inspection
WARNING
Washer fluids may be flammable and poisonous.
Do not expose washer fluid to an open flame or
any burning material, such as a cigarette. Always
comply with the washer fluid manufacturers recommended safety precautions.
1.
Check the windshield washer reservoir fluid level.

The reservoir is usually located near the righthand frame rail.
11.11
Check an indicator with graduations to see

if air restriction exceeds the value shown
in Table 11.2.
2.2
If air restriction exceeds the maximum allowable value, operate the vehicle for one
more day, making sure not to run the engine over rated rpm. Refer to the engine
operation manual for more information on
rated rpm for your engine.
2.3
If air restriction exceeds the maximum

value again, replace the air cleaner. For
instructions, refer to Group 09 of the
Business Class M2 Workshop Manual.
3.
If the vehicle is equipped with an Allison automatic transmission, check the automatic transmission fluid level.
4.
Check for water in the fuel/water separator, if

equipped.
IMPORTANT: When draining fluid from a

fuel/water separator, drain the fluid into an
appropriate container and dispose of it properly. Many jurisdictions now issue fines for
draining fuel/water separators onto the
ground.
4.1
Place a suitable container under the fuel/

water separator.
NOTE: A hose may be used to direct water

into the container. Use a hose with a -inch
pipe thread on DAVCO models.
1
12
10
11
06/29/2009
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pressure Relief Device

Fuel Inlet Line
Check Valve
CNG Quick-Connect Port
6
f470536
5.
6.
7.
8.
Coolant Inlet Line

Vaporizer
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Valve
Coolant Outlet Line
9.
10.
11.
12.
Pressure Gauge
Overpressure Regulator
Pressure Relief Valve
Fuel Outlet Line
Fig. 11.10, LNG Vaporizer Assembly
4.2
4.3
4.4
If the engine is equipped with a built-in

water separator, loosen the drain valve,
and allow the water to run out. Close the
drain valve, taking care not to overtighten
it.
5.
Inspect the steering components. See Fig. 11.13.

5.1
Inspect tie rods, steering arms, and the

drag link for signs of looseness (i.e., shiny
spots or rust tracks).
5.2
Check the steering gear mounting bolts

and pitman arm nut for signs of looseness.
DAVCO Models: Remove the vent cap

and open the drain. See Fig. 11.12.
5.3
Check the drag link nuts for missing cotter

pins.
Stop draining fluid when fuel begins to

drain out.
5.4
Inspect the steering intermediate shaft and

end yokes for excessive looseness or
other damage.
Alliance/Racor Models: Turn the drain plug

counterclockwise to open it. See
Fig. 11.11.
Alliance/Racor Models: turn the drain plug

clockwise to close it.
DAVCO Models: close the drain valve.
Install and hand-tighten the vent cap.
11.12
10
4
3
7
9
2
8
1
9
10
6
11
02/03/2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Washers (qty 2)
Nuts (qty 2)
Frame Rail
Fuel Outlet Port
Fuel Inlet Port
Priming Pump
5
f470552
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mounting Head
Mounting Bolts (qty 2)
Filter Element
Sight Bowl
Drain Plug
11
Fig. 11.11, Alliance Fuel/Water Separator Assembly and

Installation
NOTICE
12
Do not drive with a drive belt that is visibly worn

or damaged. If it fails, the lack of coolant flow
could rapidly cause damage to engine components.
6.
Inspect the serpentine drive belts for signs of

glazing, frayed edges, breaks, cracks, or oil contamination.
13
1
05/05/2009
Monthly Post-Trip Inspection

and Maintenance
Brake Component Inspection
Walk around the vehicle and visually the brake system components for visible damage.
11.13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Inlet Port/Check Valve

Lower Housing
Bypass Valve
Filter Element
Spring
Cover O-Ring
Clear Cover
f470530
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Vent Cap O-Ring

Vent Cap
Collar
120VAC Pre-Heater
12VDC Pre-Heater
Drain Valve
Fig. 11.12, DAVCO Fuel/Water Separator (Fuel Pro 482

shown)
6.
Check the thickness of the brake linings. Replace brake linings on all brake assemblies on
the axle if any brake linings are worn to less than
approximately 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) at the thinnest
point.
Saddle Tank Area Inspections
WARNING
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into

the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or
sludge particles may be in the airstream and
could cause injury.
1
3
NOTICE
10/11/2001
f461916
1. Steering Gear Mounting Bolt

2. Pitman Arm Pinch Bolt Nut
3. Drag Link Nut
Fig. 11.13, Steering Gear Fasteners
1.
Inspect all visible brake system components for

missing fasteners or signs of looseness, such as
rust tracks.
If the water drained from the air reservoirs is

cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the
compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the
air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air
brake system, which could adversely affect braking.
1.
Drain the brake system air reservoirs (reservoirs

with automatic drain valves only).
NOTE: Battery locations vary between vehicles.

2.
Inspect the batteries.
NOTICE
If the external breather tube or breather cap is
missing or incorrectly installed, road dirt and debris can adversely affect the operation of the
brake chamber. Once inside of the chamber, dirt
and debris can cause the internal parts of the
chamber to deteriorate faster.
2.
Inspect the exterior surfaces of brake chambers

for damage. Make sure that breather holes are
open and free of debris.
NOTE: Do not route air brake lines on top of

anything likely to be stepped on.
3.
Inspect air brake lines for dents, swelling, kinks,

twisting, abrasion, and damage, especially near
moving parts.
4.
Inspect flex air lines for deterioration or signs of

abrasion.
5.
Inspect for cracked, worn, or oil-contaminated

brake linings and brake drums (or rotors).
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. To prevent possible personal injury, always wash your hands after handling battery parts and related accessories.
2.1
Remove the battery box cover and inspect

all visible battery cables for loose wiring or
damage.
2.2
Check that the battery hold-down is secure.
IMPORTANT: Aerodynamic components decrease drag force as a vehicle moves, thereby

improving fuel efficiency. If replacement of an
aerodynamic component is necessary, replacement components must meet or exceed the
11.14
drag reduction performance of the originally installed component in order to maintain compliance with greenhouse gas and full efficiency
regulations (GHG14).
3.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten hose

clamps, as hose life can be adversely affected.
3.5
Inspect the following aerodynamic components, if

equipped, for structural damage, cracks, or wear.
Chassis fairings
Roof fairing/deflector
Side skirts
Cab extenders
Battery access cover
Engine Compartment Inspection and

Adjustments
Ensure hose support brackets are securely fastened. Make sure hoses are not
located near sources of wear, abrasion, or
high heat.
IMPORTANT: When replacing hoses, install

service-type knitted or braided yarn-reinforced
neoprene hose. Extended-service-life silicone
hoses may also be used. See the Alliance Parts
Catalog at www.alliancebrandparts.com or
contact your Freightliner Dealer.
4.
Check the steering wheel for excessive play.

4.1
IMPORTANT: If replacement of the hood or

bumper is necessary, the replacement component must meet or exceed the drag reduction
performance of the originally installed item in
order to maintain compliance with greenhouse
gas and full efficiency regulations (GHG14).
Start the engine. With the front tires

straight ahead, turn the steering wheel
until motion is observed at the front
wheels.
4.2
Align a reference mark on the steering

wheel to a rule, then slowly turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction until
motion is again detected at the wheels.
1.
Inspect the bumper and hood for structural damage, cracks, or wear.
4.3
2.
Check the hydraulic clutch reservoir, if equipped.

If necessary, add DOT 4 brake fluid.
3.
Inspect the radiator and heater hoses, including

the clamps and support brackets.
Measure the lash (free play) at the rim of

the steering wheel. Excessive lash exists
if steering wheel movement exceeds 2-1/2
inches (64 mm) with a 20-inch (508-mm)
steering wheel, or 2-1/4 inches (57 mm)
with an 18-inch (450-mm) steering wheel.
4.4
If there is excessive lash, check the steering system for wear or incorrect adjustment before operating the vehicle.
3.1
Inspect the radiator and charge air cooler

for damage and accumulated debris.
Straighten bent or damaged fins to permit
airflow across all areas of the cores.
NOTE: When traveling through areas of high

insect concentration, it may be necessary to
clean the exterior of the radiator or the
charge air cooler core as often as every 200
miles (320 km).
3.2
Make sure the radiator inlet and outlet

hoses are pliable and are not cracking or
ballooning.
3.3
Make sure the heater hoses are pliable

and are not cracking or ballooning.
3.4
Tighten hose clamps as necessary.
11.15
Natural Gas Fuel System Inspection,

If Equipped
1.
Leak test all fuel system components, joints, and

fittings using a methane detector. A bubble solution can be used to pinpoint the exact location of
leaks.
Replace any leaking or damaged fuel tanks and
fuel lines; repair or replace leaking or damaged
fittings.
2.
Drain the CNG high-pressure fuel filter housing,

if equipped.
2.1
2.4
Purge the CNG fuel lines by closing the

CNG fuel cylinder shutoff valves. Start the
engine and let it idle until the fuel lines are
empty and the engine stops.
Slowly open the bleed valve on the manifold to relieve remaining fuel pressure
within the system. See Fig. 11.15.
6
Gauges on the fuel panel should now read

at or near 0 psi (0 kPa).
2.2
Close the manual fuel shutoff valve on the

fuel panel.
2.3
Remove the two capscrews that secure

the access cover to the fuel panel, then
remove the access cover. See Fig. 11.14.
Save the capscrews for installation.
5
7
2
8
14
13
05/04/2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2
6
5
4
10
12 11
f470558
Coolant Inlet Port

Coolant Outlet Port
Pressure Relief Valve
Pressure Regulator
Wiring Harness
Manifold Bleed Valve
Manifold
Manual Fuel Shutoff
Valve
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Fuel Fill Port

High-Pressure Filter
Filter Bowl
Filter Drain Plug
Solenoid Valve
Fuel Line To Cylinders
Fig. 11.15, CNG Fuel Panel Components
IMPORTANT: Some pressure may remain in

the fuel system between the solenoid valve
and the engine. Use caution when loosening
fittings, as a small amount of gas may leak
out.
1
05/04/2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Fuel Panel Access Cover

Capscrews (qty 2)
Wiring Harness
Pressure Relief Valve and Cap
Coolant Outlet Line
Coolant Inlet Line
Fuel Inlet Line (to fuel cylinders)
Fuel Outlet Line (to engine)
Fig. 11.14, CNG Fuel Panel Assembly
f470557
2.5
Put a clean receptacle under the filter assembly.
2.6
Using an 11/16-inch wrench, remove the

drain plug from the filter bowl.
When all liquid has drained, install and
tighten the drain plug on the filter bowl.
2.7
Close the bleed valve on the manifold and

open the manual fuel shutoff valve on the
fuel panel.
Open the fuel cylinder shutoff valves.
11.16
2.8
Use a methane detector to leak test all

fuel system components between the fuel
cylinders and the solenoid valve. A bubble
solution can be used to pinpoint the exact
location of leaks.
Repair or replace any leaking components.
2.9
11.17
Install the access cover on the fuel panel.
12
Cab Appearance
Cab Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dashboard Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.2
12.2
Cab Appearance
Cab Washing and Polishing

CAUTION
When pressure washing the vehicle or leaving
the hood open when parked outdoors and subject to rain, cover the air cleaner inlet with a plastic bag to prevent water from entering the air intake system and possibly damaging the engine.
To protect the finish of your new vehicle, follow these
guidelines carefully:
During the first 30 days, rinse your vehicle fre-
quently with water. If the vehicle is dirty, use a

mild liquid soap. Do not use detergent.
During the first 30 days, do not use anything
abrasive on your vehicle. Brushes, chemicals,

and cleaners may scratch the finish.
During the first 120 days, do not wax your
vehicle.
To extend the life of your vehicles finish, follow these
guidelines:
Avoid washing your vehicle in the hot sun. Al-
ways use water. After the cab is completely

washed, dry it with a towel or chamois.
Do not dust painted surfaces with a dry cloth,
as this will scratch the paint.

Do not remove ice or snow from a painted sur-
face with a scraper of any sort.

To prevent damage to the finish, wax it regu-
larly. If the finish has become dull, before waxing, remove oxidized paint using a cleaner specifically designed for this purpose. Remove all
road tar and tree sap before waxing. Freightliner recommends that a quality brand of
cleaner or cleaner-polish and polishing wax be
used.
Do not let diesel fuel or antifreeze stand on a
painted surface. If either should occur, rinse

the surface off with water.
To prevent corrosion, have any nicks or other
damage on the finish touched up as soon as

possible.
Park your vehicle in a sheltered area whenever
possible.
12.1
Care of Fiberglass Parts

Wash unpainted fiberglass air fairings and shields
monthly with a mild detergent, such as dishwashing
liquid. Avoid strong alkaline cleansers.
Apply a wax specifically designed for fiberglass.
Care of Chrome Parts

To prevent rust, keep chrome parts clean and protected at all times. This is especially important during
winter driving and in coastal areas where there is
exposure to salt air.
When cleaning chrome parts, use clean water and a
soft cloth or sponge. A mild detergent may also be
used.
Sponge gently, then rinse. If necessary, use a nonabrasive chrome cleaner to remove stubborn rust or
other material. Do not use steel wool.
To help protect the chrome after cleaning, apply a
coat of polishing wax to the surface. Never use wax
on parts that are exposed to high heat, such as exhaust pipes.
Care of Exterior Lights

Clean the headlight lenses by hand only, using a
flannel cloth with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent,
and water.
CAUTION
Do not use a power buffer, paper towels, chemical solvents, or abrasive cleaners on the headlight lens, all of which can remove the UV coating
from the surface, and result in yellowing of the
lens.
Dashboard Care
Periodically wipe the dashboard with a waterdampened cloth. A mild detergent can be used, but
avoid using strong detergents.
CAUTION
Do not use Armor-All Protectant, STP Son-of-aGun, or other equivalent treatments. These
cleaners contain vinyl plasticizers that can cause
Cab Appearance
stress crazing in the interior plastic panels,

which can result in cracking of the panels.
pentine may be used. Use care to prevent contact

with parts of the upholstery that are not vinyl.
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning
Sulfide Stains
To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brushing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Harsh
cleaning agents can cause permanent damage to
vinyl upholstery. To preserve the upholstery and prevent damage, carefully review the following sections
for recommended cleaning procedures. Waxing or
refinishing improves soil resistance and cleanability
for all vinyls. Any hard wax, such as that used on
automobiles, may be used.
Sulfide compounds, such as those found in eggs and

some canned goods, can stain after prolonged contact with vinyl. These stains can be removed by placing a clean, unprinted piece of cloth over the spotted
area and pouring a liberal amount of 6 percent hydrogen peroxide onto the cloth. Allow the saturated
cloth to remain on the spot for 30 to 60 minutes. For
stubborn spots, allow the hydrogen-peroxide saturated cloth to remain on the area overnight. Use caution to prevent the solution from seeping into the
seams or it will weaken the cotton thread.
Ordinary Dirt
Wash the upholstery with warm water and mild soap,
such as saddle or oil soap. Apply soapy water to a
large area and allow to soak for a few minutes, then
rub briskly with a cloth to remove the dirt. This can
be repeated several times as necessary.
If dirt is deeply imbedded, use a soft bristle brush
after applying the soap.
If dirt is extremely difficult to remove, wall-washing
preparations normally found around the home can be
used. Powdered cleaners, such as those used for
sinks and tiles, are abrasive and must be used with
caution as they can scratch the vinyl or give it a permanent dull appearance.
Chewing Gum
Harden the gum with an ice cube wrapped in a plastic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Any remaining traces of gum can be removed with an allpurpose light oil (peanut butter will also work) and
wiped off.
Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote

Tars, asphalts, and creosote stain vinyl after prolonged contact. They should be wiped off immediately and the area carefully cleaned, using a cloth
dampened with naphtha.
Paint, Shoe Heel Marks

Paint should be removed immediately. Do not use
paint remover or liquid-type brush cleaner on vinyl.
An unprinted cloth, dampened with naphtha or tur-
Nail Polish and Nail Polish Remover

Prolonged contact with these substances causes permanent damage to vinyl. Careful blotting immediately
after contact minimizes damage. Do not spread the
liquid during removal.
Shoe Polish
Most shoe polishes contain dyes which penetrate
vinyl and stain it permanently. Shoe polish should be
wiped off as quickly as possible using naphtha or
lighter fluid. If staining occurs, try the procedure used
for sulfide stains.
Ball Point Ink

Ball point ink can sometimes be removed if rubbed
immediately with a damp cloth, using water or rubbing alcohol. If this does not work, try the procedure
used for sulfide stains.
Miscellaneous
If stains do not respond to any of the treatments described above, it is sometimes helpful to expose the
vinyl to direct sunlight for up to 30 hours. Mustard,
ball point ink, certain shoe polishes, and dyes often
bleach out in direct sunlight leaving the vinyl undamaged.
Velour Upholstery Cleaning

To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brushing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Spot
clean with a mild solvent or an upholstery shampoo,
12.2
Cab Appearance
or the foam from a mild detergent. When using a solvent or a dry-cleaning product, follow the instructions
carefully and clean only in a well-ventilated area.
Avoid any product that contains carbon tetrachloride
or other toxic materials. With either method, pretest a
small area before proceeding. Use a professional
upholstery cleaning service when extensive cleaning
is needed.
Grease and Oil-Based Stains

Dampen a small absorbent cloth with dry-cleaning
solvent or spot remover. Apply the cloth carefully to
the spot from the outer edge to the center. Pat and
blot the spot with a clean, dry cloth. Repeat several
times, as necessary, turning the cloths so that the
stain does not redeposit on the fabric.
Sugar and Water-Based Stains

Apply water-based detergent or cleaner, working in
circular motions. Pat and blot as dry as possible. Repeat if necessary before drying thoroughly.
Chewing Gum or Wax

Harden the gum or wax with an ice cube wrapped in
a plastic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Excess wax can be absorbed by placing a thick white
blotter over the wax and heating with a warm (not
hot) iron. Remove the remainder by using the procedure for grease and oil-based stains.
Mildew
Brush the dry fabric with a soft brush. Sponge with
detergent, and blot. If the fabric is colorfast, dilute a
teaspoon of bleach in one quart (one liter) of cool
water. Apply with a swab, directly on the mildew
stain. Dab repeatedly with clear, cool water, and blot
dry.
12.3
13
In an Emergency
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Kit, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Filter Replacement, Davco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Starting With Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.2
13.5
13.6
In an Emergency
Hazard Warning Lights
WARNING
The hazard warning light flasher (Fig. 13.1) is part of

the multifunction turn signal switch. It is a red rocker
switch located on the top of the multifunction switch
module.
Use extreme care when placing flares in emergency situations that involve exposure to flammable substances such as fuel. An explosion or
fire could occur causing serious personal injury.
Emergency Filter
Replacement, Davco
4
5
1
2
If the filter cover on the Davco fuel/water separator is

broken, it will not be possible to operate the vehicle.
A standard spin-on filter will correct this problem.
Refer to the Davco web site for additional information, www.davcotec.com.
11/16/2001
To replace the filter on all Davco fuel/water separators, follow these procedures:
f820386
Press down on the upper part of the rocker to activate

the flashers.
1. Washer Button
2. Wiper Control Dial
4. Hazard Flasher (red)
5. Multifunction Switch Module
Fig. 13.1, Hazard Warning Flashers
To flash the hazard warning lights, press down on

the upper part of the rocker (towards the dash). To
stop the hazard warning lights, press down on the
lower part of the rocker (towards the steering wheel).
1.
Drain the fuel until it is below the level of the filter collar. See Fig. 13.2 for the model 232/233
fuel/water separator and Fig. 13.3 for the model
382 fuel/water separator.
2.
Remove the filter vent and vent seal.
NOTE: The filter vent and vent seal are not

needed in the emergency replacement. They
should be retained for later installation at the
time when the filter cover is replaced.
3.
Remove the filter collar using channel-lock pliers.
4.
Remove the filter cover, filter cover seal and

spring. Retain them for later assembly.
Fire Extinguisher
5.
A fire extinguisher is located in the cab by the drivers door.
Remove the filter element and dispose of it properly.
6.
Install the standard engine spin-on filter (included

in the emergency kit) on the threaded stud.
Emergency Kit, Optional

An optional emergency kit is located in the cab. The
kit includes one or more of the following: a first aid
kit, a reflective vest, a triangular reflector, a flare kit,
and (on vehicles with a Davco fuel/water separator) a
spin-on fuel filter element.
If there is an emergency while driving, cautiously pull
off the road. Turn on the hazard warning lights. Place
the flares and reflector along the side of the road to
alert other drivers that an emergency situation exists.
13.1
NOTE: Remove the rubber grommet from the

stud.
7.
Install the filter cover, filter cover seal, and

spring, as removed.
8.
Install the filter collar over the filter cover. Tighten

the filter collar finger-tight.
9.
Start the engine and run it at increased rpm for

one minute to purge air from the fuel lines.
In an Emergency
1
2
3
8
4
9
5
6
10
11/14/2001
1.
2.
3.
4.
Filter
Filter
Filter
Filter
f470416
Vent
Vent Seal
Collar
Cover
5. Filter Cover Seal

6. Spring
7. Filter Element
8. Threaded Stud
9. Fuel Port
10. Drain
Fig. 13.2, Davco Model 232 and 233 Fuel/Water Separator
Emergency Starting With

Jumper Cables
When using jumper cables, follow the instructions
below.
WARNING
in the vicinity of the battery. Do not allow the vehicles to touch each other. Do not lean over the
batteries when making connections, and keep all
other persons away from the batteries. Failure to
follow these precautions could lead to severe
personal injury as a result of an explosion or
acid burns.
Batteries release explosive gas. Do not smoke

when working around batteries. Put out all flames
and remove all sources of sparks or intense heat
13.2
In an Emergency
1
2
3
8
9
4
5
6
10
11
11/14/2001
1.
2.
3.
4.
Filter
Filter
Filter
Filter
f470417
Collar
Vent
Vent Seal
Cover
5.
6.
7.
8.
Filter Cover Seal

Spring
Filter Element
Threaded Stud
9. Fuel Port
10. Drain
11. Bottom Plate Collar
Fig. 13.3, Davco Model 382 Fuel/Water Separator
CAUTION
Make sure both starting systems have the same
voltage outputs, and avoid making sparks. Otherwise the vehicle charging systems could be severely damaged. Also, do not attempt to charge
isolated, deep-cycle batteries with jumper cables.
Follow the battery manufacturers instructions
when charging deep-cycle batteries.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an optional

jump-start post, attach the positive cable clamp
to that post instead of to the battery.
13.3
1.
Apply the parking brakes and turn off the lights

and all other electrical devices.
2.
To gain access to the batteries, open the battery

compartment. See Fig. 13.4. For detailed instructions, see Chapter 2.
CAUTION
Always connect the battery, jumper cables, and
charger correctly (positive-to-positive and
negative-to-negative). Connecting a charging device backwards (positive-to-negative) will blow
fuses that power the bulkhead module (BHM) and
In an Emergency
chassis module (CHM), and the devices they control will not work.
3.
Connect an end of one jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery (or jump-start
post if equipped), and connect the other end of
the cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery (or jump-start post if equipped).
See Fig. 13.5.
WARNING
Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
severe personal injury from explosion and acid
burns.
4.
Connect one end of the second jumper cable to

the negative terminal of the booster battery, and
connect the other end of the cable to a ground at
least 12 inches (300 mm) away from the batteries of the vehicle needing the start. The vehicle
frame is usually a good ground. Do not connect
the cable to or near the discharged batteries.
WARNING
4
1
f543933
10/24/2001
1. Top Step
2. Battery
3. Cab
4. Battery Access Door
On vehicles with Mercedes-Benz AGS transmissions, make sure the current gear indicator displays "N" before starting the vehicle. If the transmision starts in gear, it could cause an accident
resulting in death, serious personal injury, or
property damage.
5.
Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster

batteries, and let the engine run a few minutes to
charge the batteries of the other vehicle.
6.
Attempt to start the engine of the vehicle with the

batteries receiving the charge. Do not operate
the starter longer than 30 seconds, and wait at
least two minutes between starting attempts to
allow the starter to cool.
7.
When the engine starts, let it idle a few minutes.
Fig. 13.4, Battery Compartment, Open
C
A
B
+
E
+
10/18/94
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.
2.
WARNING
F
f540303a
To Ground
3rd
To Frame (ground)
4th
Booster Battery
Discharged Battery
E. To Starter
F. 2nd
G. 1st
Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not

allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
severe personal injury from explosion and acid
burns.
8.
Disconnect the grounded cable from the frame or

other non-battery location, then disconnect the
other end of the cable.
9.
Disconnect the remaining cable from the newly

charged battery (or jump-start post if equipped)
first, then disconnect the other end.
Fig. 13.5, Jumper Connections
13.4
In an Emergency
10. Close the battery compartment. For detailed in-
to the vehicle frame. Use protection to keep the

chains from damaging the frame.
structions, see Chapter 2.

5.
Towing
When it is necessary to tow the vehicle, make sure
the instructions below are closely followed to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not tow an unbraked vehicle if the combined
weight of both vehicles is more than the sum of
the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR) of the towing vehicle. Otherwise brake capacity will be inadequate, which could result in personal injury or
death.
CAUTION
Do not pass a sling (for example, a rope or chain)
from one tow hook to another to fasten for towing (see Fig. 13.6). Known as reeving, this practice is not permissible in most industrial applications of towing and hoisting. Reeving can
overload the hooks and result in damage to the
vehicle.
6.
Attach the towing device. Due to the many variables that exist in towing, positioning the lifting
and towing device is the sole responsibility of the
towing-vehicle operator.
7.
Lift the vehicle and secure the safety chains. If

extra towing clearance is needed, remove the
front wheels.
8.
Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and signal lights. Connect any special towing lights required by local regulations.
Front Towing Hookup

1.
Disconnect the battery ground cables.
CAUTION
Failure to remove the axle shafts when towing
the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground
could result in damage to the transmission and
other parts.
2.
Remove both drive axle shafts. On dual drive

axles, if the vehicle is to be lifted and towed, remove only the rearmost drive axle shafts.
On vehicles equipped with an air fairing, remove
both the forward and rearmost drive axle shafts if
there is insufficient towing clearance.
3.
Cover the ends of the hubs with metal plates or

plywood cut to fit the axle opening, and drilled to
fit the axle shaft studs. This prevents lubricant
from leaking out and will keep contaminants from
getting into and damaging the wheel bearings
and axle lubricant.
WARNING
Failure to chock the tires or connect the tow
trucks air brake system before releasing the
spring parking brakes could allow the disabled
vehicle to suddenly roll. This could cause property damage or personal injury.
9.
4.
13.5
On dual drive axles, if the vehicle is to be lifted

and towed, chain the forward rear-axle assembly
Chock the tires on the disabled vehicle and connect the towing vehicles air brake system to the
vehicle being towed. Then, release the spring
parking brakes and remove the chocks.
Rear Towing Hookup
CAUTION
CAUTION
Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains
could cause damage, leading to eventual frame
failure.
Remove the bumper end caps and chrome

bumper (if equipped).
Using a rear towing hookup on a vehicle

equipped with a roof fairing could cause damage
to the cab structure.
1.
Place the front tires straight forward and secure

the steering wheel in this position.
2.
Disconnect the battery ground cables.
In an Emergency
OK
OK
f880694
01/11/2006
IMPORTANT: Do not reeve when towing.

1. Tow Hook
2. Chain
Fig. 13.6, Reeving
CAUTION
Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains
could cause damage, leading to eventual frame
failure.
3.
On dual drive axles, using protection to keep the

chains from damaging the vehicle frame, chain
the forward-rear drive axle to the frame.
4.
Attach the towing device. Due to the many variables that exist in towing, positioning the lifting
and towing device is the sole responsibility of the
towing-vehicle operator.
5.
Lift the vehicle and secure the safety chains. If

extra clearance is needed, remove the bumper
extension if equipped.
6.
Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and signal lights. Also connect any special towing lights
required by local regulations.
Safety Administration. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard #302 limits the flammability of specified
materials used inside the cab, but despite this, most
materials will burn. The cab of this vehicle contains
urethane foam, which is of concern in this respect.
WARNING
Urethane foam is flammable! Do not allow any
flames, sparks, or other heat sources such as
cigarettes or light bulbs to contact urethane
foam. Urethane foam in contact with such heat
sources could cause a serious, rapid fire, which
could result in death, severe burns, or gas poisoning, as well as damage to the vehicle.
In Case of a Cab Fire

As quickly as possible, bring the vehicle to a safe
stop, apply the parking brake, turn off the ignition,
and get out of the vehicle.
Fire in the Cab

The incidence of fire in medium-duty trucks is rare,
according to data from the National Highway Traffic
13.6
14
Headlight Aiming
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Checking Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Adjusting Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Headlight Aiming
Preliminary Checks
Before checking or adjusting the headlight aim, do
the following:
Check that the hood is closed and latched.
3.
On the screen or wall, mark the locations of each

headlight bulb center using the distances found
in step 2. See Fig. 14.2, Items 2 and 3.
4.
Turn on the low-beam headlights.
5.
Check the vertical adjustment of the low beams.

The center of each beam projection should fall
on or near the marks made during step 3. See
Fig. 14.3.
6.
Use Table 14.1 to determine the maximum vertical distance allowable between the marks on the
wall and the center of each low-beam projection.
Remove any large amounts of mud or ice from
the underside of the fenders.

Check the springs for sagging or broken
leaves.
Check the suspension for proper functioning of
the leveling mechanism. On cabs with air suspensions, make sure that the height is properly
adjusted.
If the distance between either projection center

and the mark made on the wall or screen is
greater than the maximum distance given in
Table 14.1, adjust the vertical positioning of that
headlight.
Check for damage to the hood and hinge as-
sembly. Repair as necessary.

With the vehicle unloaded, check that the tires
are inflated to the recommended air pressure.

Clean the headlight lenses. Use a soft cloth
Adjusting Headlight Aim
Checking Headlight Aim
NOTE: Freightliner vehicles are offered with

various headlight assembly options. Because of
the various options, the location of adjustment
screws on your vehicles headlight assembly
may vary from what is shown here.
1.
Park the vehicle on a level surface, 25 ft (7.6 m)

away from, and perpendicular to, a vertical
screen or wall. Shut down the engine and set the
parking brake. Chock the tires.
1.
2.
Each headlight has a height adjusting dot. See

Fig. 14.1. Measure the distance from the ground
to the height adjusting dot on each headlight
(Fig. 14.2, Item A). Note those distances.
with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent, and

water.
11/06/2002
f544236
Measure beam height from the ground to the small dot

roughly in the center of the headlight lens.
Fig. 14.1, Headlight Beam Height Adjusting Dot
14.1
Lift the flap over the rear end of the headlight

bucket to expose the two plastic adjusting knobs
on each headlight. See Fig. 14.4.
NOTE: Horizontal aim should not be adjusted in

the field.
2.
Turn both adjusting knobs as needed to adjust

the lights until the beam pattern meets the acceptable standard.
Headlight Aiming
3
A
B
B
7.6 m)
25 ft (
1
01/11/2012
A.
B.
1.
2.
f545850b
Measure the distance from the ground to the center of each headlight bulb.
Mark where the center of each headlight projection should appear.
Screen or Wall
3. Center of Left-Hand Headlight Projection
Center of Right-Hand Headlight Projection
Fig. 14.2, Headlight Aiming Screen/Wall
1
2
01/11/2012
f545851b
1. Low-Beam Angle Upper Limit

2. Ideal Low-Beam Projection
3. Low-Beam Angle Lower Limit
Fig. 14.3, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits
14.2
Headlight Aiming
1
2
f544235
11/05/2002
NOTE: The right-hand side headlight bucket is shown.

The left-hand side is opposite.
1. Inboard Adjusting Knob
2. Outboard Adjusting Knob
Fig. 14.4, Headlight Adjusting Knobs
Distance Between Ground

and Headlight: in (mm)
2236 (560900)
3648 (9001200)
4854 (12001400)
Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits

Desired Variation (Fig. 14.3, Upper Limit (Fig. 14.3, Item
Item 2): in (mm)
1): in (mm) up
0
3.9 (100)
2 (50) down
2 (50)
2.5 (64) down
1.6 (40)
Table 14.1, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits
14.3
Lower Limit (Fig. 14.3, Item

3): in (mm) down
3.9 (100)
6 (150)
6.5 (165)
15
Hybrid Electric Vehicle
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions (HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting, and Engine Shutdown (HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid System Fault Lamps (HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergencies (HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpstarting (HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing (HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1
15.2
15.2
15.2
15.3
15.3
15.3
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)

Overview
A hybrid electric vehicle (HEV) has both a diesel engine and an electric motor. Engine torque is augmented with electrical torque. The electric motor is
powered by batteries, which are charged by regenerative braking and, on vehicles equipped with the
ePTO option, the diesel engine.
The batteries cannot move the vehicle for long distances at highway speeds. In the event of a diesel
engine failure, drive the vehicle to a safe location as
quickly as possible.
Eaton Corporation developed and supplies the hybrid
electric system for Freightliner Trucks. The primary
system components are the hybrid drive unit (or
"HDU", which includes the electric generator/motor
and automated transmission), power electronics carrier (PEC), and the motor inverter/controller. Electric
power take-off (ePTO) and auxiliary power generator
(APG) components are optional on the HEV system.
Freightliner Trucks designed the stand-alone liquid
cooling system required to support the operation of
Eatons HEV system. Its primary system components
are the electric water pump, reservoir/expansion
tank, radiator, electric radiator fan, and coolant
plumbing.
High-Voltage Safety Features

The HEV has high-voltage cables and a service
switch on the PEC.
High-voltage cables are covered in orange insulation
and conduit. Each high-voltage component is tagged
with a warning or danger label.
IMPORTANT: The service switch on the PEC

should only be used for an emergency shutdown, or when the service manual or troubleshooting guide calls for work on the high-voltage
system. The service manual and troubleshooting
guide for the hybrid electric system are available
from www.roadranger.com.
The red service switch is located next to the highvoltage cable connections at one end of the PEC.
Pushing in the red service switch will shut down the
engine. The hybrid system will be disabled, and the
high-voltage batteries in the PEC, though still live,
are isolated in the PEC.
NOTE: The PEC may be mounted in an area

with limited access.
For information on emergency shutdowns, see
"Emergencies" in this chapter.
Cooling System
Body builders will develop the components for the

PTO, the PTO plumbing, and a safety switch to prevent the diesel engine from starting when the hood is
open.
The HEV requires a liquid cooling system for the

HDU, inverter, DC/DC Converter (if ePTO equipped),
and APG (if equipped). The HEVs cooling system is
separate from the engine cooling system.
Regenerative Braking
For coolant, use a mixture of 50 percent ethylene

glycol and 50 percent water.
Regenerative braking reduces vehicle speed by converting some of the vehicles kinetic energy into electric energy to charge the hybrid systems batteries.
When the accelerator pedal is at idle while coasting,
or the service brake is depressed to slow the vehicle,
the hybrid system charges the batteries.
The regeneration will feel as if the brake is being
lightly applied when you remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The full power of the service brake
is always available to the driver, and regenerative
braking is automatically shut off during an ABS (antilock brake) event.
The Eaton Hybrid Control Unit will automatically shut
off regenerative braking when the batteries are fully
charged.
15.1
Electric Power Take-Off (ePTO)

The Electric Power Take-Off (ePTO) option provides
standard hydraulic functions without continuous diesel engine operation. The PTO drive power is provided by the hybrid motor and hybrid batteries. When
the hybrid batteries deplete, the diesel engine automatically starts to recharge them and provide PTO
drive power. Once the batteries are fully charged, the
engine shuts down automatically. Vehicles with the
ePTO option are designed with a safety switch to
ensure the diesel engine does not start when the
hood is open.
A DC/DC converter is required for ePTO applications
to convert high-voltage DC to 12-volt DC.
NOTE: To maintain a power supply from the vehicles low-voltage batteries, the alternator
charges them when the vehicle is being driven.
5.
Safety Precautions (HEV)
Apply the service brake, then release the parking

brake.
6.
With the service brake applied, press the desired

mode on the shift control to put the vehicle into
gear.
7.
Slowly release the service brake.
The HEV has high-voltage components, including

340-volt DC batteries and a 500-volt AC motor.
Never cut high-voltage cables or connectors. Do not
paint high-voltage cables.
Avoid direct pressure wash on high-voltage connections (PEC, DC/DC Converter) and the air intake and
exhaust on the PEC.
Starting, and Engine Shutdown

(HEV)
The Cranking System
The primary engine starter is the electric motor in the
HDU, which cranks the engine very quickly. The
back-up cranking system is the standard 12-volt
starter on the engine. If the hybrid system is offline
or the hybrid batteries are insufficiently charged, the
vehicle will automatically use the 12-volt cranking
system to start the engine.
Starting
1.
2.
Place the key in the ignition, and turn it clockwise to the ON position to initiate power to the
hybrid system.
Wait for the gauges on the instrument panel to
complete two sweeps (one from left to right, and
one from right to left) and return to their normal
ranges.
3.
Ensure the transmission is in neutral. The gear

display should display a solid "N".
WARNING
Never start the engine unless the transmission is
in neutral and the brake is applied. Accidental
movement of the vehicle could result in property
damage, personal injury, or death.
4.
to return to the ON position. The engine will continue to run with the key in the ON position.
NOTE: The vehicle may be powered by the

electric motor or the diesel engine, depending
on battery charge and the demand for driveline
torque. If the electric motor alone is powering
the driveline, the diesel engine will stay at idle.
Engine Shutdown
1.
Place the transmission in neutral by selecting N

on the shift control.
IMPORTANT: The transmission must be in neutral for proper shutdown.

2.
3.
Turn the key counterclockwise to the OFF position.
NOTE: Intermittent noises such as clicking and

transmission shifting may be audible from the
transmission while it completes a self-test and
shutdown.
Hybrid System Fault Lamps

(HEV)
There are two lamps on the dashboard that indicate
a hybrid system fault is active the red STOP HYBRID lamp and the amber CHECK HYBRID lamp.
See Fig. 15.1. When the red STOP HYBRID lamp is
illuminated, do not drive the vehicle; have it towed to
a Freightliner dealer or an authorized service center
for repairs. When the amber CHECK HYBRID lamp
is illuminated, the vehicle can still be driven, though it
may operate without the assistance of the hybrid
electrical system.
Turn the key clockwise to the START position.

The engine will crank after a brief delay. As soon
as the engine starts, release the key, allowing it
15.2
Do not cut into or open the DC/DC converter.

Do not cut into or open the inverter.
If it is necessary to remove occupants using cutting

equipment, avoid high-voltage cables and the PEC.
CHECK
HYBRID
Jumpstarting (HEV)
STOP
HYBRID
07/09/2008
Jumpstarting vehicles equipped with the Eaton Hybrid System is identical to Non-Hybrid vehicles,
which use the vehicle 12-volt battery system.
f611013
Fig. 15.1, Hybrid System Fault Lamps
Emergencies (HEV)
Emergency Shutdown
WARNING
After disabling the vehicle, power is maintained
in the high-voltage electrical system for up to five
minutes. Unprotected contact with any "live" high
voltage components can cause serious injury or
even death.
There are two options for performing an emergency
shutdown. The preferred method is to turn off the
ignition key. The other option is to disconnect the
low-voltage (12-volt) vehicle batteries. In either case,
the engine will shut down, dash lights will shut down,
the hybrid electrical system will shut down, and the
high-voltage batteries in the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) will remain "live" but isolated in the PEC.
NOTE: If the service switch on the PEC is accessible, it may be pushed in to shut down the
hybrid electrical system and isolate the "live"
HEV batteries in the PEC.
In Case of an Accident or Fire

If the HEV becomes involved in an accident or fire,
be aware of the following:
Use CO2 or dry chemical extinguishers. The
batteries in the PEC are lithium ion.

Do not cut into high-voltage cables. The high-
voltage wiring is covered in orange insulation

or convoluted tubing.
Do not cut into or open the PEC.
15.3
Towing (HEV)
When towing the vehicle, the output shaft of the
transmission must not be allowed to spin or turn. If
the vehicle is towed with the drive wheels still in contact with the road surface, the vehicle axle shafts or
driveline must be removed or disconnected. See
"Towing" in Chapter 13.
16
Natural Gas Vehicle
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Fuel Tank Filling Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Gas Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5
Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.9
Major Repair and Replacement of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.10
Natural Gas Vehicle
General Information
The Business Class M2 can be equipped with a
compressed natural gas (CNG) fuel system, or a liquefied natural gas (LNG) fuel system. CNG is made
by compressing natural gas to less than 1% of its
volume at standard atmospheric pressure. LNG is
created by condensing natural gas into a liquid by
cooling it to approximately -259F (-162C).
When vaporized at ambient temperatures, natural
gas is less dense than air, and it rises and disperses.
However, LNG is intially heavier than air due to its
cryogenic temperature. When released in large
amounts, it may drop or pool on the ground before
its temperature rises and the LNG vaporizes. Cold
atmospheric conditions may prevent natural gas from
dispersing quickly when released in large amounts.
Safety Precautions
DANGER
Natural gas is highly flammable. Failure to observe the following safety precautions could lead
to the ignition of the natural gas, which could
cause serious bodily injury or death.
Follow these safety precautions when operating or
repairing a natural gas vehicle.
Do not start the engine if a natural gas leak is
detected.
Do not transfer CNG from one vehicle to an-
other, as a buildup of static electricity could

cause a spark and ignite the fuel.
Natural gas is nontoxic, but it can cause asphyxiation

if present in very large concentrations.
Avoid open flames or sparks near a natural
CNG often contains an odor-producing chemical,

while LNG does not have any odor. Users of naturalgas-fueled vehicles should never expect to detect
natural gas leaks by scent.
Cover eyes and exposed skin when working on
gas vehicle.
a natural gas fuel system or fueling a natural
gas vehicle.
Permit no smoking or other ignition sources
within thirty feet of a natural gas vehicle.
For natural gas to burn, it must first vaporize, then

mix with air in the proper proportions (flammable
range is 5 to 15% by volume in air), and then be ignited.
Have CO2 fire extinguishers (ABC minimum)
A typical natural gas fuel system consists of:
Always purge the fuel lines before performing
Fuel supply cylinders that store compressed
gas at high pressure (CNG), or a tank that

stores liquefied gas at an extremely low temperature (LNG).
A vaporizor or heat exchanging device that
changes LNG to gaseous form (LNG fuel systems only).

Pressure relief and manual fuel shutoff valves.
A filling connection with a check valve that pre-
vents the gas from flowing back out of the fuel

filling line.
High-pressure and low-pressure fuel filters.
A pressure control regulator that reduces the
high fuel tank or cylinder pressure to the lower

pressure needed for the engine.
A fuel contents gauge that indicates the fuel
supply in the tank or cylinders.
16.1
located in a highly visible and easily accessible

location.
maintenance or repairs on a natural gas fuel
system. To purge the lines, close the manual
fuel shutoff valve, and start the engine. Let the
vehicle idle until the fuel lines are empty and
the engine stops.
Always use a natural gas detector to test the
system for leaks, whether an odor is present or

not. Routinely inspect the fuel filtering and
regulating mechanisms, and the fuel lines. A
bubble solution can be used to pinpoint the
exact location of leaks.
Always tighten fasteners and fuel connections
to the required torque specification. Overtightening or undertightening could cause leaks.

Close the fuel shutoff valve(s) before perform-
ing maintenance and repairs.

Do not store a natural gas vehicle indoors for
any extended period of time. Do not bring a

natural gas vehicle inside indoors unless the
Natural Gas Vehicle
workshop is equipped with a methane detection and ventilation system.
Fuel Tank Filling Procedures
IMPORTANT: Close all windows and doors during the fueling process. Keeping windows and
doors closed allows for easier leak detection
inside the cab after fueling.
CNG Vehicle Fueling

CNG is moved from the fuel station storage tanks to
the vehicle cylinders through a metered dispenser.
During fueling, as pressure inside of the vehicle cylinders increases, so does the temperature. The dispenser shuts off when it determines the CNG cylinders are full.
CNG fuel cylinders cannot be filled to their full capacity of 3600 psi (24 800 kPa) in cooler weather. Since
temperature change causes gas to expand and contract, less pressure in the cylinders on a cold day is
equal to the same amount of gas at a higher pressure on a warm day. The fuel station dispenser has a
temperature-pressure compensating device, which
accounts for ambient temperature during fueling. See
Table 16.1 for approximate full cylinder pressures at
various temperatures.
CNG Temperature/Pressure Compensation Values
Fill Station Pressure Set Point
Temperature:
3000 psi (20 684
3600 psi (24 821
F (C)
kPa) Set Point
kPa) Set Point
100 (37.8)
3415 (23 546)
4086 (28 172)
90 (32.2)
3276 (22 587)
3909 (26 952)
80 (26.7)
3138 (21 636)
3754 (25 883)
70 (21.1)
3000 (20 684)
3600 (24 821)
60 (15.6)
2861 (19 726)
3445 (23 752)
50 (10)
2723 (18 774)
3288 (22 670)
40 (4.4)
2584 (17 816)
3131 (21 587)
30 (-1.1)
2446 (16 865)
2973 (20 498)
20 (-6.7)
2307 (15 906)
2814 (19 402)
10 (-12.2)
2169 (14 955)
2655 (18 306)
0 (-17.8)
2031 (14 003)
2495 (17 202)
-10 (-23.3)
1893 (13 052)
2336 (16 106)
-20 (-28.9)
1755 (12 100)
2180 (15 031)
-30 (34.4)
1616 (11 142)
2024 (13 955)
-40 (-40)
1477 (10 184)
1868 (12 879)
Table 16.1, CNG Temperature/Pressure Compensation
Values
Use the following steps to fuel a CNG vehicle.

1.
Shut down the engine and apply the parking

brake.
WARNING
Natural gas fuel tanks, lines, and valves are always pressurized. Always observe safety precautions. Failure to do so could lead to loss of control over a filling hose or to ignition of the natural
gas, which could cause serious bodily injury,
death, or severe property damage.
2.
Ensure all fuel cylinder shutoff valves are open.

See Fig. 16.1.
04/22/2010
1. Fuel Cylinder Storage

Box
2. Fuel Cylinder Shutoff
Valves (qty 5)
3. High-Pressure Gauge
4. Low-Pressure Gauge
f470554
5.
6.
7.
8.
Fuel Fill Port

Dust Cap
Manual Shutoff Valve
Fuel Panel Access
Door
Fig. 16.1, CNG Fuel Cylinder Storage Box (5-cylinder

system shown)
16.2
Natural Gas Vehicle
3.
Ensure the vehicle fuel system main shutoff

valve is open.
LNG Vehicle Fueling
4.
Open the CNG fuel panel access door and remove the dust cap from the vehicle fuel fill port.
5.
Ensure the O-ring is present inside the fuel fill

port. If the O-ring has been dislodged or is missing, the station dispensing nozzle will not connect securely to the fill port.
The LNG fuel tank is designed to be filled from any

LNG fuel source that has a 100 micron or finer fuel
filter and a fuel delivery pressure between 120 and
225 psi (827 and 1551 kPa).
6.
Turn the selector knob on the service pump to

the VENT position, if equipped.
7.
Connect the quick coupling on the dispensing

nozzle securely to the vehicle fuel fill port.
8.
Turn the selector knob on the service pump to

the FILL position, if equipped.
IMPORTANT: If at any time the service pump or

vehicle begins to vent CNG uncontrollably, notify
a station attendant or activate the service station emergency shut-off switch to cease the flow
of CNG.
9.
Switch on the service pump. A slight hissing

noise may be heard as the fuel cylinders fill.
10. Watch the pressure gauge on the service pump.
When the gauge reads approximately 3600 psi

(24 800 kPa), or when the fill pressure stops
climbing, the CNG cylinders are full. The service
pump will shut itself down automatically. See
Table 16.1 for pressure compensation values
based on ambient temperatures.
11. Move the selector knob on the service pump to
the VENT position, if equipped. A short hiss will

be heard as a small amount of natural gas is
vented into the hose.
WARNING
Do not attempt to remove the fill station nozzle
from the tank fill fitting until venting of pressure
is noted. If no venting occurs, ask for assistance
from the station attendant. Removing an unvented coupling could result in an uncontrolled
hose, which could lead to property damage or
personal injury.
12. Remove the station dispensing nozzle from the
vehicle fill port.

13. Install the dust cap on the vehicle fuel fill port
and close the fuel panel access door.
16.3
The LNG fuel tank is designed to be top-filled

through a single hose with no vent return. As cold
LNG is sprayed into the vapor space of the tank, the
cold liquid condenses the vapor and creates space
for itself inside the tank, eliminating any need to vent
during the filling process.
The LNG tank is equipped with a small internal ullage tank for vapor space, which allows for fuel expansion and increases vehicle standby time. When
an LNG tank is full, fuel can continue to flow into the
ullage tank. However, if the ullage tank is completely
filled during fueling, standby time will be reduced to
zero and the primary relief valve will open almost
immediately after fueling, allowing excess LNG vapor
to escape. If fueling is stopped when the ullage tank
is empty (i.e., the fuel tank has sufficient vapor space
to accommodate fuel expansion due to temperature
increase), the vehicle will have approximately one
week of standby time before venting will occur.
Use the following steps to fuel an LNG vehicle.
1.
Shut down the engine and apply the parking

brake.
IMPORTANT: Close all windows and doors during the fueling process. Keeping windows and
doors closed allows for easier leak detection
inside the cab after fueling.
WARNING
Liquefied natural gas is a cryogenic liquid stored
at approximately -259F (-162C). Cryogenic
burns can be caused by coming into contact with
the pressurized liquid stream, or by coming into
contact with fuel system components that have
been cooled to cryogenic temperatures. Always
wear gloves and a face shield, and cover exposed skin when fueling.
2.
Remove the fuel fill fitting dust cap. See

Fig. 16.2.
Natural Gas Vehicle
causing tank pressure to spike above 250 psi

(1724 kPa) and automatically shutting down the
station fuel pump. To prevent the pump from
shutting down, connect a vent line to the fill vent
fitting on the LNG tank to capture escaping
vapor, then open the shroud cover and open the
vapor shutoff valve (Fig. 16.3, Item 2).
6.
Open the stations fill valve, if equipped, and

start fueling. Monitor the flow or line pressure as
filling progresses. When filling begins, line pressure will spike quickly until the vehicle tank cools
down. The flow and pressure will then remain
stable during the remainder of the filling
procedure.
7
05/29/2009
4. Fill Vent Fitting

5. Shroud Cover
6. Shroud Cover Latches
f470534
1. Fuel Fill Fitting

2. Fuel Outlet Line
3. Primary Relief Vent
Line
10
5
11
12
Fig. 16.2, LNG Fuel Tank
3.
Using compressed air, remove any dirt, debris, or

water that may have collected in the fuel fill fitting and the station dispensing nozzle. Contaminants in the fuel system can cause drivability
problems.
4
3
2
WARNING
Natural gas fuel tanks, lines, and valves are always pressurized. Always observe safety precautions. Failure to do so could lead to loss of control over a filling hose or to ignition of the natural
gas, which could cause serious bodily injury,
death, or severe property damage.
4.
Connect the station fueling nozzle to the tank

fuel fill fitting.
5.
Connect an electrical ground clamp and cable to

the fuel tank.
IMPORTANT: An LNG tank which is first installed, or is on a vehicle that has not been operated in approximately ten days, is considered
to be a hot tank. When fueling a hot tank, LNG
entering the tank will immediately vaporize,
1
05/05/2010
1. Pressure Control
Regulator
2. Vapor Shutoff Valve
3. Fuel Fill Hose
4. Secondary Relief
Valve (red cap)
5. Fuel Fill Fitting
6. Fuel Level Sender
Box
f470533
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Primary Relief Valve

Tank Pressure Gauge
Fill Vent Fitting
Excess Flow Valve
Fuel Shutoff Valve
(liquid)
12. Fill Check Valve
Fig. 16.3, LNG Fuel Tank Plumbing Components
IMPORTANT: When fueling a hot tank, initially

put 5 to 10 gallons (19 to 37 liters) of LNG in
the tank and manually stop the fueling process.
Drive the vehicle for 15 to 20 minutes to cool
16.4
Natural Gas Vehicle
the tank and reduce tank pressure, then continue fueling the tank to full.
7.
When the tank is full, the line pressure will rapidly spike and the flow rate will fall. When a pressure rise or flow rate drop is observed, close the
stations fill valve, if equipped.
NOTE: Do not over-fill an LNG tank. If the ullage tank is completely filled during fueling, tank
standby time will be reduced to zero and the
primary relief valve will open almost immediately
after fueling.
8.
Disconnect the station hose from the tank fuel fill

fitting.
9.
Disconnect the electrical ground clamp and cable

from the fuel tank.
sor detects gas fumes in concentrations above 50%

LFL, and should allow ample time to utilize safety
procedures. However, individuals with special needs
should review the system with a professional safety
engineer.
Alarm Procedure
Before operating the vehicle, the driver must be familiar with the procedures as shown on the interior
sticker on the overhead panel (Fig. 16.4) and the
exterior sticker on the door (Fig. 16.5).
10. Install the dust cap on the tank fuel fill fitting.
Gas Detection System

A gas detection system is used in all Daimler Trucks
natural-gas-fueled vehicles. This system has a sensor in the engine compartment and one in the cab,
both situated in high areas to detect natural gas
buildup as a result of leaks.
The AMGaDS III Plus is a natural gas detection system. This device is meant to serve as a supplemental warning only. It is not intended to replace standard safety practices that should be conducted
around flammable gases.
IMPORTANT: To function properly, the gas detection system must be powered at all times.
The gas detection system is directly powered by
the batteries, and can only be powered off by
disconnecting the batteries.When servicing a
natural-gas-fueled vehicle, disconnect the batteries only when necessary, and do not leave
the batteries disconnected for extended periods
of time.
The lower flammability limit (LFL) is the smallest
amount of the gas that supports a flame when mixed
with oxygen and ignited. Zero percent (0%) LFL indicates a gas-free atmosphere. One hundred percent
(100%) LFL indicates that gas concentration has
reached its lower flammability limit (5% gas in air by
volume). The red warning light and audible alarm
located in the overhead console activate when a sen-
16.5
04/28/2009
f080157
Fig. 16.4, Interior Warning Sticker
IMPORTANT: If an audible alarm activates, do

not operate any electrical switch, including
lights. Avoid causing sparks and stay away from
arcing switches and equipment. Do not use a
telephone, including cellular phones or any
types of portable communication or electronic
devices that have a battery.
If the vehicle is in motion when the audible alarm
activates, bring it to a safe stop, shut down the engine, and exit the vehicle. Do not open the hood.
If outside the vehicle when the audible alarm activates, do not open the cab door or hood.
In the event of an audible alarm, immediately follow
these procedures, as allowed by conditions:
1.
Immediately shut off all engines. Extinguish any

cigarettes, pilot lights, flames, or other sources of
ignition in the area and adjacent areas.
Natural Gas Vehicle
frontwall. The sensors are located in high areas,

where rising gas vapors will pass by or accumulate.
If the system detects that one of the sensors has
been disconnected or has malfunctioned, the sensor
fault light for that zone will illuminate. A failed sensor
may trigger and lock on an alarm. If a fault condition
or locked alarm continues after the sensors connection and wiring integrity has been verified, replace
the sensor.
The sensors are sensitive to all hydrocarbon vapors.
An alarm may be triggered by the use of chemicals
such as cleaners, paint, polish, lacquer, gasoline,
silicone, silicone spray, or other harsh chemicals.
The sensors will also detect hydrogen fumes from an
overcharged battery. If a sensor sends an alarm, but
no gas fumes are present, check for recent use of
chemicals or a battery charger.
NOTICE
04/28/2009
f080158
Fig. 16.5, Exterior Warning Sticker
2.
Manually close all fuel shutoff valves, including

those on the LNG tank or CNG cylinders.
3.
If the vehicle is indoors (as in a service shop),

immediately open windows and doors to provide
extra ventilation to the area. Do not start the engine or any other type of equipment until the gas
leak is corrected and the area cleared of natural
gas.
4.
Evacuate the area.
5.
Check the fuel lines, LNG tank/CNG cylinders,

and fittings to locate the leak. After the area is
cleared of natural gas and the alarm is no longer
active, have the vehicle inspected by a qualified
technician.
IMPORTANT: Do not consider the area clear

until all alarm indicators are off, and the alarm
panel light returns to green.
Silicone-based chemicals and cleaners will permanently disable the sensors. When cleaning the
vehicle, cover the sensors with a plastic covering. Keep the sensors covered until the area has
been cleared of any cleaning fumes.
Harsh chemicals and extremely high temperatures may damage the sensor.
Puncture of or damage to the seal located inside
the sensor housing will significantly shorten the
sensor life.
Frequent exposure to high concentrations of gas
will accelerate sensor deterioration.
Overhead Console
The overhead console consists of an alarm panel on
the right side and the control module on the left side.
The alarm panel has a green light, a red light, a
buzzer, and a sensor. See Fig. 16.6. It is located
within view from outside of the vehicle. The large
green light is continuously illuminated during normal
operating conditions.
Sensors
Before entering the vehicle, always verify that the

green light is illuminated. If the green light is not illuminated, do not enter the vehicle. Complete the
alarm procedure previously outlined.
Gas detection sensors are located on the cab overhead console and in the engine compartment on the
The alarm panel meets the California Highway Patrol

Title 13-2008 and NFPA 52 2010 requirements. All
16.6
Natural Gas Vehicle
4
AMGaDS III Plus
Gas Detection System
Power
Push
To
Silence
Gas Concentration:
SIGNIFICANT
Silence
Engaged
10
11
Trace
12
13
2
ne
Zo
1
ne
Zo
Shutdown
Relay
Reset
Engaged
Sensor Fault
Push To Test
8
2
04/28/2009
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Test Button
Sensor Fault Indicator Lights
Zone 1 Leak Indicator Lights
Power Indicator Light
Zone 2 Leak Indicator Lights
f611034
6.
7.
8.
9.
Silence Button
Silenced Engaged Light
Relay Engaged Light
Shutdown Reset Button
10.
11
12.
13.
Buzzer Alarm
Red Light
Green Light
Sensor
Fig. 16.6, AMGaDS III Plus Overhead Console
drivers and technicians using it should be trained regarding the red and green lights, and the audible
warning.
The control module, located on the left side of the
overhead console, contains the status lights and control buttons for the system. The areas that the sensors monitor are defined as Zone 1 (cab) and Zone 2
(engine compartment). The control module has lights
assigned to each zone that will illuminate if a sensor
detects a trace level leak (between 20% and 30%
LFL), a significant level leak (above 50% LFL), or if a
sensor is disconnected or malfunctioning.
Trace Level: If either sensor detects gas fumes
at a concentration greater than 20% to 30%

LFL (1% gas in air by volume), the amber light
next to the Trace indicator for that zone will
flash. There is no buzzer alarm for a trace
level detection, and the large green light on the
alarm panel will remain illuminated.
16.7
Significant Level: If either sensor detects gas
fumes at a concentration greater than 50% to

60% LFL (2.5% gas in air by volume), the
small red light next to the SIGNIFICANT indicator for that zone will flash. After approximately 15 seconds, the large green light on the
alarm panel will switch off, the red light will illuminate, and the buzzer will sound. All alarm
indicators will remain on as long as fumes are
detected.
Sensor Fault: If the system detects that either
of the sensors has been disconnected or has

malfunctioned, an amber light next to the Sensor Fault indicator for that zone will illuminate.
The control module also has buttons used to test or
reset the the control module after an alarm. Red
lights next to each button indicate when they are engaged.
Natural Gas Vehicle
Shutdown Reset: If an alarm has been acti-
vated and the Relay Engaged light is illuminated, the Shutdown Reset button will reset
the internal relay. Press the Shutdown Reset
button only after the gas has cleared, the
buzzer has turned off, and the alarm panel
light has returned to green.
Push To Silence: If an alarm has been acti-
vated, the Push To Silence button will silence

the buzzer.
See Table 16.2 for the functions of all lights and buttons on the overhead console.
Testing
Daimler Trucks North America strongly recommends
that all operators follow California Code of Regulations (CCR) inspection requirements, regardless of
where the vehicle is operated. Per Title 13 CCR
935 (2), gas detection systems should be tested
Item
Green Power Light
Display
Illuminated
SIGNIFICANT Gas
Concentration Lights
Red (illuminated)
Trace Gas Concentration

Lights
Amber (flashing)
Off
On
Shutdown Reset Button
Relay Engaged Light
On
Off
Test Button
Silence Button
Test results validating the performance of the gas

detection system within the parameters established
by the component manufacturer and NFPA 52 2010
should be maintained as a permanent part of the vehicle service records. Use of alcohol, propane, and
other harsh liquids or gases are not acceptable
methods for testing.
Always test the system and sensors after any component has been replaced, or if the vehicle has been
involved in an accident or fire. Ensure that the gas
detection system is wired directly to the battery.
It is recommended that the highest level of safety
validation be utilized if there are multiple validation
requirements in the state or locality where the vehicle
is operated or domiciled.
Control Module Functions

Function
System is on.
Unlit
Sensor Fault Lights
three times per calendar year at equal intervals. The

testing procedure should simulate the same operating environment in which the vehicle is used, with the
same gaseous fuel.
Action Required
None required.
Ensure the batteries are
connected and replace any blown
Detection system is not
fuses. If the gas detection system
functioning.
is still not functioning, replace the
system immediately.
Suspend vehicle operation
Dangerous gas concentration
immediately and follow alarm
detected.
procedures.
Use caution and monitor the
Minor gas concentration detected.
system.
Sensor is functioning properly.
None required.
Sensor has malfunctioned.
Replace the sensor immediately.
Press to reset the system only
after the gas has cleared, the
Resets the system after an alarm
buzzer has turned off, and the
activation.
alarm panel light has returned to
green.
Relay is engaged and test or
Press the Shutdown Reset button.
alarm is being cleared.
Normal condition.
None required.
Press and hold for one minute to
Tests the overhead console
to activate a test of all overhead
operation and circuitry.
console components.
Silences the alarm buzzer.
Press to silence the alarm buzzer.
16.8
Natural Gas Vehicle
Item
Silence Engaged Light
Display
Control Module Functions

Function
On
Indicates the buzzer is active but

silenced.
Off
Normal condition.
Action Required
Suspend vehicle operation
immediately and follow alarm
procedures.
None required.
Table 16.2, Control Module Functions
Overhead Console Test

Press and hold the Push To Test button for one
minute. The system will proceed with a selfdiagnostic test that will include illumination of the
Trace and SIGNIFICANT gas concentration lights,
and the sensor fault lights. Verify the large red light
and buzzer activate, and that all lights illuminate or
flash to ensure that all bulbs are operational.
4.
Ensure that the transmission shift control is in

Neutral (N), Park (P), or the Park Brake (PB) position.
5.
Without starting the engine, turn the ignition

switch to the ON position (Fig. 16.7). The electronic gauges on the instrumentation control unit
(ICU) will complete a full sweep of their dials, the
warning and indicator lights will illuminate, and
the buzzer will sound for three seconds.
Sensor Test
The gas detection system sensors must be tested
using certified test gas, which can be purchased as
part of a test kit. Testing with alcohol or heavy gases
such as butane or propane does not satisfy CCR
935 (2) or NFPA 52 regulations.
Expose each sensor to certified test gas for at least
thirty seconds. The system will proceed through the
alarm procedure consistent with a significant leak
and the buzzer will sound after approximately fifteen
seconds. If a sensor fails to respond after exposure
to the test gas, replace the sensor.
09/12/2001
Engine Starting
NOTE: Before starting the engine, read Chapter 3 for detailed information on how to read the
instruments and Chapter 4 for detailed information on how to operate the controls. Read the
operating instructions in the engine manufacturers operation manual before starting the engine.
1.
Before engine start-up, complete the engine pretrip and post-trip inspections and maintenance
procedures in Chapter 11.
2.
Ensure the fuel shutoff valve is open.
3.
f610509
Fig. 16.7, Ignition Switch Positions
6.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position.

Press down on the clutch pedal, if equipped, but
do not press down on the accelerator pedal.
Release the key the moment the engine starts.
7.
Bring the engine up to operating speed gradually

as it warms up and develops stable oil pressure.
If the vehicle has not been operated previously in
a 24-hour period, allow the vehicle to idle for five
minutes.
NOTICE
Do not rev the engine if the oil pressure gauge
indicates no oil pressure. Shut down the engine
16.9
Natural Gas Vehicle
within approximately ten seconds to avoid engine

damage.
8.
Check the oil pressure gauge for any drop in lubricating oil pressure or mechanical malfunction
in the lubricating oil system.
Major Repair and Replacement

of Parts
If a natural-gas-fueled vehicle is involved in an accident, remove the fuel tank or cylinders from service
and have them inspected by a qualified technician.
Replace any leaking or damaged fuel tanks/cylinders
and fuel lines; repair or replace leaking or damaged
fittings. Install parts and components in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
16.10
Index
Subject
Page
A
Adjustable Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Adjusting Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Air Bag, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Air Bag Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Air Brake System, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Air Brake System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Automatic Slack Adjusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
Allison MD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Operating Instructions, MD
Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Allison On-Highway
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Operating Instructions, OnHighway Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
Range Inhibit Indicator, 2000
and 2400 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
All-Wheel-Drive Controls,
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
AWD Operation Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
AWD Range Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
B
Back-of-Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Climbing Down from Backof-Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Entering Back-of-Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Battery Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Battery Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Cab (Battery) Isolation
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Parking Brake Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Trailer Air Supply Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Trailer Brake Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
C
Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Cab Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Cab Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
With One Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
I-1
Subject
Page
Entering from the Drivers

Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Entering from the
Passengers Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Exiting from the Drivers Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Exiting from the Passengers
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
With Two Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Entering from the Drivers
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Entering from the
Passengers Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Exiting from the Drivers Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Exiting from the Passengers
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Cab Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Checking Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Air Conditioning, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Air Selection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Fresh Air Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Recirculation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Temperature Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Clutch Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Clutch Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Clutch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Clutch Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Sachs Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Cold-Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Cold-Weather Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Component GWR Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Dash-Mounted Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Shift Knob Controls, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
D
Daily Pretrip Inspection and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Cab Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
Engine Compartment
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
Index
Subject
Page

Inspection, If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10
Saddle Tank Area
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
Suspension and Slack
Adjuster Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Wheel and Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
Dashboard Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank,
EPA10 and Newer Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
DEF Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
DEF Warnings and Engine
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Fuel/DEF Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
E
Eaton Fuller AutoShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.12
Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13
Push-Button Shift Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.12
Selecting Gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.14
Eaton Fuller Range-Shift
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
General Information, RangeShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
Operation, Deep-Reduction
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.11
Operation, Range-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10
Eaton Fuller UltraShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
General Information,
UltraShift ASW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
UltraShift DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
Operation, UltraShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.16
UltraShift Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20
Eaton Fuller Straight-Shift
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
Straight-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
Operation, Straight-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Emergencies (HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
Emergency Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
In Case of an Accident or
Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
Emergency Filter Replacement,
Davco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Emergency Kit, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Emergency Starting With
Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2
Emission Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Subject
Page
Aftertreatment System
Indicators Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Certified Clean Idle Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
EPA Noise Emission Control
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Vehicle Emission Control
Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
ATS Warning Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
EPA07 Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
EPA10 and Newer Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Greenhouse Gas Emissions
and Fuel Consumption
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Engine Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Engine Brake Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
Engine Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Safety and Environmental
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
Enhanced Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Exhaust Braking Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
Exhaust Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
Mercedes-Benz Exhaust
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
Pacbrake Exhaust Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16
F
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Fontaine and Holland Fifth
Wheels Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Jost Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
Fifth Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
Air Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
Manual Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
Air-Actuated Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5
Manual Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
Fifth Wheels, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Air-Suspension Dump Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Fifth Wheel Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6
In Case of a Cab Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6
I-2
Index
Subject
Page
Freightliner SmartShift Shift

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
SmartShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15
Fuel Tank Filling Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
CNG Vehicle Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
LNG Vehicle Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3
Fuse Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Main Fuse Box/PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Trailer and Taillight Fuse
Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
G
Gas Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5
Alarm Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.8
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Grab Handles and Access
Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
H
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Heater/Air Conditioner Control
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
High-Altitude Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Hood Opening and Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
To Close the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
To Open the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Horn Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Air Horn, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Electric Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Electric Power Take-Off
(ePTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
High-Voltage Safety
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Hybrid System Fault Lamps
(HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2
Hydraulic Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
Hydraulic Brake System,
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
Hydraulic Brake System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
I
Ignition Switch and Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
I-3
Subject
Page
Instrumentation Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audible Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dash Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode/Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
3.4
3.1
3.2
3.4
3.4
J
Jumpstarting (HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
L
Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Light Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Lights and Light
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1
4.1
4.2
4.4
M
Major Repair and Replacement
of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.10
Mercedes-Benz Automated
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.22
AGS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26
General Information, AGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.22
Operation, AGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23
Mercedes-Benz Manual
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.22
Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Automatic Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Trailer ABS Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
Meritor Drive Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26
Axle Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.29
Drive Axles With Differential
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.27
Tandem Drive Axles With
Interaxle Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.28
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Down View Mirror, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Mirror Heat Switch, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Power Mirrors, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Monthly Post-Trip Inspection
and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13
Brake Component Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13
Engine Compartment
Inspection and
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15
Inspection, If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15
Saddle Tank Area
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14
Index
Subject
Page
Multifunction Turn Signal Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn-Signal Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5
4.7
4.6
4.5
4.6
O
Optional Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Restriction Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ambient Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Axle Oil Temperature
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Fluid
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turbocharger Boost
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Dash-Mounted Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CB Radio Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension Autofill Override
Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension Dump Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield-Fan Switches,
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12
3.12
3.13
3.13
3.13
3.14
3.14
3.14
3.15
3.15
4.14
4.14
4.14
4.15
4.14
4.14
3.15
P
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
After-Treatment System
(ATS) Request/Inhibit
Regen Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Axle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Cruise Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Engine Brake Switch,
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Engine Fan Switch, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Exhaust Brake Switch,
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Transmission Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspection
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Fluids Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Subject
Page
S
Safety Precautions (HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Seat Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Seat Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Bench Seat Adjustment
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Suspension Seat Adjustment
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Bench Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Bostrom Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
National 2000 Series Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Sears Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Standard Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Air Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Fuel Gauge, Pre-EPA10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Fuel/Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) Gauge, EPA10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Starting After Extended
Shutdown or Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Starting, and Engine Shutdown
(HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2
The Cranking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2
Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
T
Towing (HEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3
13.5
13.5
13.5
V
Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chewing Gum or Wax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grease and Oil-Based Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mildew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sugar and Water-Based
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
I-4
Index
Subject
Page
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ball Point Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chewing Gum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nail Polish and Nail Polish
Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordinary Dirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paint, Shoe Heel Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shoe Polish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sulfide Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
W
Warning and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Engine Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Weekly Post-Trip Inspection
and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11
Engine Compartment
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
I-5

Manual de Conduccion Camion Freightliner Business Class m2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Conduccion Camion Freightliner Business Class m2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Conduccion Camion Freightliner Business Class m2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What components are discussed in the vehicle manual?

What components are discussed in the vehicle manual?

What safety features are mentioned in the manual?

What safety features are mentioned in the manual?

Foreword

IMPORTANT: Descriptions and specifications in

Environmental Concerns and

Event Data Recorder

Emissions and Fuel Efficiency

Customer Assistance Center

Reporting Safety Defects

defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a

Component Information Label

The tire and rim portion of the FMVSS certification

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Fig. 1.1, Component Information Label

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Component GWR Label

Fig. 1.2, Vehicle Certification Label

Engines and vehicles manufactured after December

1. Tire and Rim Information

EPA Noise Emission Control Label

Fig. 1.3, Label Locations

A vehicle noise emission control label (Fig. 1.9) is

Fig. 1.4, Incomplete Vehicle Certification Label

It is a violation of U.S. federal law to alter exhaust

IMPORTANT: Certain Freightliner incomplete

Fig. 1.5, Canadian National Safety Mark

See Fig. 1.6 for a typical component GWR label.

Fig. 1.6, Component GWR Label

Applicable Emissions System Based on Build Date and EPA Regulations

Vehicle Emission Control Information

Certified Clean Idle Label

the engine after five minutes of idling in order to limit

EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION

Service Regeneration Required.

Filter has reached

Filter has exceeded maximum

Vehicle must be parked, and a

HEST (High Exhaust

Fig. 1.7, ATS Indicators, EPA07

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

Keep flammables and people away

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) level is

See operators manual for complete instructions.

Fig. 1.8, ATS Indicators, EPA10 and Newer

Fig. 1.9, Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

Fig. 1.10, Vehicle Emission Control Information Label

Fig. 1.11, CARB Clean Idle Label

Cab Door Locks and Handles

One key operates the ignition switch and all of the

IMPORTANT: Each key is numbered. Record

3. Door Pull Handle

To unlock the passengers door from outside the cab,

NOTE: The cab door locks can be operated

direction opposite to the unlocking direction

Close the door.

Fig. 2.2, Door Interior